Home

Part II

1. or any parameters equal to each other DI 1 0 horizontal DI 0 1 vertical DI 1 1 or DI 0 7 0 7 45 angle The relative size and sign of the two parameters determine the amount of rotation If you imagine the current pen location to be the origin of a coordinate system for the label you can see that the signs of the parameters determine which quadrant the label is in Table 23 14 Example Using the DI Command ESE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA3500 2500 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to 3500 2500 DT Define as the label terminator DI1 1 LB Print the word DIRECTION in the first DIRECTIONCHR quadrant and send a Carriage Return to return the pen to the Carriage Return point 3500 2500 DI1 1 LB Print the same word in the fourth quadrant and DIRECTIONCR return the carriage to the Carriage Return point DI Absolute Direction 23 33 Table 23 14 Example Using the DI Command continued DI 1 1 LB Print the same word in the third quadrant and DIRECTIONCR Carriage Return DI 1 1 LB Print the word in the fourth quadrant and DIRECTIONCR Carriage Return Fe960A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page run run
2. TR nj or TR Parameter Format Functional Range Default n clamped integer Oor 1 1 on e No Parameters Defaults to transparency mode on TR1 e n Specifies whether transparency mode is on or off e 0 Transparency mode off e 1 Transparency mode on default When transparency mode is on default the portion of a source image which is defined by white pixels does not affect the destination whatever was already written to the page shows through the white areas in the new image Source Original Final Destination Destination Figure 22 22 Transparency Mode ON 22 42 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN When transparency mode is off all source pixels are written to the destination obscuring any underlying images Source Original Final Destination Destination Figure 22 23 Transparency Mode OFF The transparency mode is defaulted by the E Reset IN or DF commands Note For more information on the transparency mode see the discussion of the Source Transparency Mode in Chapter 13 The PCL Print Model EN TR Transparency Mode 22 43 UL User Defined Line Type This command creates line types by specifying gap patterns which define the lengths of spaces and lines comprising a line type UL index gap1 gap20 or UL Parameter Format Functional Range Default index clamped 1 through 8 integer gaps clamped 0 to 32767 default line real t
3. DR1 1 LB 199125 Set the label direction and print 1991 DR1 0 LB 1992 Set the label direction and print 1992 DR 1 1 LB 1993f Change the label direction and print 1993 DR 0 t LB 1994 Set the label direction print 1994 CR and Carriage Return DR 1 1 B 1995 Set the label direction and print CR 1995 Carriage Return DR 1 0 LB 1996 Set the label direction and print CR 1996 Carriage Return Fe960A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 23 42 The Character Group EN EN 3500 2500 Figure 23 25 Table 23 21 point 9661 2 B Carriage return Related Commands CF Character Fill Mode CP Character Plot DI Absolute Direction DV Define Variable Text Path LB Label SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant SR Relative Character Size Group The Character Group IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 The Configuration Status Group DR Relative Direction 23 43 Table 23 22 POSSIBLE ERROR CONDITIONS Error Condition Printer Response or both parameters 0 number out of range ignores command DT Define Label Terminator This command specifies the character to be used as the label terminator and whether it is printed Use DT to define a new label terminator if you desire a differe
4. DT LBThe label terminator WILL NOT print This command would print as The label terminator WILL NOT print This example shows how to define and use a printable label terminator DT 0 LBThe label terminator WILL print This command would print as The label terminator WILL print For another example using the DT command see the example in the Character Plot CP command discussion Table 23 23 Related Commands Group LB Label The Character Group TD Transparent Data DT Define Label Terminator 23 45 DV Define Variable Text Path This command specifies the text path for subsequent labels and the direction of Line Feeds as either right left up or down Use DV to stack characters in a column DV path line or DV Functional Parameter Format Range Default path clamped 0 1 2 0r3 0 integer horizontal line clamped Oor 1 0 integer normal Line Feed The DV command determines the text path the direction that the current location moves after each character is drawn and the direction that the Carriage Return point moves when a Line Feed is included in the label string e No Parameter Defaults the text path to horizontal not stacked with normal Line Feed Equivalent to DVO 0 e Path Specifies the location of each character with respect to the preceding character relative to the labeling direction defined by the D
5. 6000 44009 I 3000 1500 Figure 22 5 Table 22 4 Related Commands Group FT Fill Type RF Raster Fill Definition SV Screened Vectors The Line and Fill Attributes Group FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group 22 8 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN FT Fill Type EN This command selects the shading pattern used to fill polygons FP rectangles RA or RR wedges WG or characters CF Use FT to enhance drawings using solid fill shaded fill parallel lines hatching cross hatch patterned raster fill or PCL user defined patterns FT fill type option1 option2 or FT Parameter Format Functional Range Default fill type clamped 1 4 10 11 21 22 1 integer optioni option2 clamped type dependent type real dependent Refer to the table following the parameter descriptions There are eight forms of fill types as shown above The type parameter tells the printer which form you are using If the fill type is specified but the option1 and or option2 parameter is omitted values previously given for the specified fill type are assumed or the defaults are assumed if none have been specified e No Parameters Defaults all FT parameters and sets the fill type to solid fill Equivalent to FT1 e Type Selects the fill pattern The table below lists
6. CAUSES and the inter line spacing by 25 of the Space control code print ES 2 25 CAUSES CP LBTHIS Send CP in place of CR LF and print THIS SPACING SPACING Fe960A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 23 52 The Character Group EN EN ES CAUSES THIS SPACING Eos Tl c cg CAUSES THIS SPACING ES Bg sed CAUSES THIS SPACING Table 23 27 Related Commands Group CP Character Plot LB Label The Character Group ES Extra Space 23 53 Fl Select Primary Font This command allows any accessible font that has been assigned a font ID number to be selected as the primary standard font the font characteristics are assigned to the standard font As mentioned the font must be accessible to the printer as either a resident font a downloaded font or a loaded cartridge font To be selected the font must have been previously assigned a font ID number in PCL mode Also for scalable fonts the Fl command must be preceded by an SD command specifying the font s point size or pitch see the Using the FI Command example FI font ID Parameter Format Functional Range Default font ID integer 0 to 32767 no default When the printer receives this command and the requested font is present the primary font characteristics are set to those of the requested font If the selected font is proportionally spaced the
7. Draw an arc from the current pen position through a point 700 750 plu away with an ending point 0 1500 plu from the beginning of the arc PU700 850 PD Lift the pen and move it 700 850 plu from the current pen position pen down 20 50 The Vector Group EN EN Table 20 31 Example Using the RT Command Relative Arc Three Point continued RT100 100 0 200 Draw an arc from the current pen position through a point 100 100 plu away with an ending point 0 200 from the starting point of the arc PU100 100 PD200 0 Lift the pen and move it 100 100 plu from the current pen position pen down and draw a line 200 plu in the X direction Fee DA Enter the PCL mode EE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 650 1150 3300 800 1000 100 Figure 20 22 RT Relative Arc Three Point 20 51 Table 20 32 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group 20 52 The Vector Group EN EN The Polygon Group Introduction All of the commands in this group use the polygon buffer a temporary data storage area in your printer Using the polygon buffer is an integral part of drawing wedges rectangles and other types of poly
8. The Configuration Status Group IP Input P1 and P2 19 25 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 This command establishes new or default locations for the scaling points P1 and P2 relative to the PCL Picture Frame size P1 and P2 are used by the Scale SC command to establish user unit scaling IR can also be used in advanced techniques such as printing mirror images enlarging reducing drawings and enlarging reducing relative character size or changing label text direction IR Xp7 Yp1 XP2 Y pai or IR Functional Parameter Format Range Default Xp1Yp Xp2Yp2 clamped real Oto 100 0 0 100 100 When P1 and P2 are set using IR the scaled area is page size independent As the PCL Picture Frame changes size P1 and P2 keep the same relative position within the PCL Picture Frame boundaries e No Parameters Defaults P1 and P2 to the lower left and upper right corners of the PCL Picture Frame respectively e X Y Coordinates Specify the location of P1 and optionally P2 as percentages of the PCL Picture Frame limits specifying P2 is not required If P2 is not specified P2 tracks P1 the P2 coordinates change so that the distances of X and Y between P1 and P2 remain the same This tracking process can cause P2 to locate outside the effective window Used carefully the tracking function can be useful for preparing more than one equal sized drawing on a page For an example refer to
9. 180 or 270 SI SR Sizes of bitmapped fonts are approximate only SL The Slant command is ignored for bitmapped fonts AD SD CP LB Note The Fl and FN commands implicitly change the value of SB For example if SB 0 and FI selects a bitmap font SB is set to 1 SD Standard Font Definition Defines the standard font and its characteristics symbol set font spacing pitch height posture stroke weight and typeface SD kind value kind value or SD Parameter Format Functional Range Default kind clamped 1to7 no default integer value clamped kind dependent kind dependent real Refer to the table following the parameter descriptions 23 68 The Character Group EN Note EN e No Parameters Defaults the standard font characteristics e Kind Specifies the characteristic for which you are setting a value Table 23 39 Kind Characteristic Default Value Description 1 Symbol Set 277 Roman 8 2 Font Spacing 0 fixed spacing 3 Pitch 9 characters per inch 4 Height 11 5 font point size 5 Posture upright upright 6 Stroke Weight 0 medium 7 Typeface 48 Stick fixed vector e Value Defines the properties of the characteristic specified by the kind parameter When selecting fonts the different characteristics symbol set spacing pitch etc are prioritized as shown in the table above with symbol set being
10. Add comments to your HP GL 2 command sequence Table 19 1 lists the commands described in this chapter Introduction 19 1 Table 19 1 The Configuration and Status Group Commands Command Summary CO Comment Allows comments to be included in an HP GL 2 command sequence DF Default Sets most programmable HP GL 2 features to their default conditions IN Initialize Sets all programmable HP GL 2 features to their default conditions IP Input P1 and P2 Establishes new or default locations for the scaling points P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 Establishes P1 and P2 locations as a percentage of the PCL Picture Frame IW Input Window Sets up a window soft clip limits PG Advance Full Page This command is ignored RO Rotate Coordinate Rotates the HP GL 2 coordinate system System RP Replot This command is ignored SC Scale Establishes a user unit coordinate system 1 These commands useful in plotter applications are not the optimal solution for PCL 5 printers Other PCL commands perform similar functions see the Number of Copies and Form Feed command descriptions 19 2 The Configuration and Status Group EN Establishing Default Conditions Note EN Whether you are using HP GL 2 mode or strictly the PCL printer language mode you should establish default conditions at the beginning of each print job to prevent unexpected results
11. Drawing Equal Sized Pictures on a Page earlier in this chapter e Neither X Y coordinate of P1 can equal the corresponding coordinate of P2 If either coordinate of P1 equals the corresponding coordinate of P2 the coordinate of P2 is incremented by 1 plotter unit 19 26 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN Sending the command IR25 25 75 75 establishes new locations for P1 and P2 that create an area half as high and half as wide as the PCL Picture Frame in the center of the picture frame Refer to the following illustration A 0 0 Physical Page Border PCL 300 300 x 900 600 Logical Page Border 600 600 900 1100 Figure 19 10 Example P1 and P2 command P1 or P2 can also be set outside the PCL Picture Frame by specifying parameters less than zero and greater than 100 For example sending IR 50 0 200 100 would set P1 and P2 as shown in the following illustration New P2 100 75 50 25 M Pe PUE New Pi 25 50 75 100 Figure 19 11 Example P1 and P2 command IR Input Relative P1 and P2 19 27 Note If you specify P1 and P2 beyond the PCL Picture Frame your drawing is scaled with respect to those locations however only the portion of the drawing fitting within the effective window is drawn The specified P1 P2 percentages are converted to the equivalent plotter unit coordinates If the coordinate system orientation subsequently changes for example by send
12. Fixed Pitch 9 characters per inch Height 11 5 point Posture Upright Stroke Weight Medium Typeface HP GL 2 Stick Label terminator ASCII end of text character ETX decimal code 3 Refer to the Define Label Terminator DT command Label starting point Current pen location LO1 Refer to the Label Origin LO command Label direction Horizontal Refer to the DI DR and DV commands Space between characters and lines Normal no extra space Refer to the Extra Space ES command Character Slant None vertical Refer to the Character Slant SL command Character Fill Mode Solid fill no edging Default Label Conditions 23 7 Enhancing Labels You can enhance your labels by changing such aspects as the character size and slant the space between characters and lines and the orientation and or placement of the label on the page To effectively use these enhancements you should understand the properties of the character cell Refer to Working with the Character Cell later in this chapter Character Size and Slant You can change the size of the characters using the Absolute Character Size and the Relative Character Size SI and SR commands The Absolute Character Size SI command establishes the nominal character width and CAP height in centimeters and maintains this character size independent of the location of P1 and P2 or the page size The Relative Character
13. PCL 5 printers can use either bitmap or scalable fonts A bitmap font is available in its one defined size only Scalable fonts on the other hand provide an outline for each character which can be scaled by the PCL 5 printers to produce a large range of character sizes EN EN Serial I O An input output I O interface that transmits information bit by bit in serial mode RS 232 is an industry wide standard form of a serial interface Soft Font Soft fonts are fonts stored on disks These fonts can be transferred to the printers memory and used the same way as cartridge or resident fonts Spacing Fonts have either fixed or proportional spacing Fixed spaced fonts are those for which the inter character spacing is constant In proportionally spaced fonts inter character spacing varies with the natural shape of a character Stroke Weight Stroke weight describes the thickness of the strokes that compose characters Medium and bold are examples of stroke weights Style Font style is defined by the angularity of the strokes of the characters with respect to the X axis Upright italic and condensed are examples of font styles Symbol Index This is a grouping of symbols An unbound font has the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary Symbol Index such as the Unicode or the MSL symbol indexes Each symbol in the index is identified by a unique symbol index number Appendi
14. Quadrant I o gt SY Quadrant rise O rise Quadrant III O ig Quadrant IV Figure 23 19 Varying Print Direction with DI Command Parameter Sign The DI command remains in effect until another DI or DR command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The following example illustrates the use of positive and negative parameters the use of the cosine and sine how the LB command updates the current pen location and how DI updates the Carriage Return point 23 34 The Character Group EN EN Table 23 15 Example Another DI Example EOE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA3500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 38500 2500 DT 1 Define the character as the label terminator DIO 1 LB 1990 Set the label direction to print at 90 and print 1990 DI1 1 LB_ 199155 Set the label direction to 45 and print 1991 DI1 0 LB_ 1992 Set the label direction to 0 and print 1992 DI 71 71 LB1993 Change the label direction using the cosine and sine of 315 and print __ 1993 DI 0 1 LB__ 1994 CR Change the label direction using the cosine and sine of 270 and print 1994 Carriage Return DI 71 71 LB 1995 CR Set the label dire
15. 290 DATA 10 58 0 5 58 10 67 5 10 67 300 END 5 58 10 67 Start 5 5 10 58 0 Figure 20 19 20 42 The Vector Group EN EN Table 20 27 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width SM Symbol Mode Line and Fill Attributes Group PE Polyline Encoded 20 43 PR Plot Relative This command establishes relative plotting and moves the pen to specified points with each move relative to the current pen location PR X Y or PR Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y increments current 230 to 230 4 no default units PR and PE have extended ranges of 23 to 230 1 plotter units If the current pen position goes out of this range the printer ignores HP GL 2 commands until it receives an absolute PA or PE coordinate within the extended range The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameters Defaults to relative plotting mode for subsequent commands e X Y Increments Specify incremental moves relative to the current pen location When you include more than one relative coordinate pair the pen moves to each point in the order given relative to the previous point using the current pen up down status If the pen is up PR moves the pen to the point if the pen is down PR draws a line to the
16. CA eackarD EH Pcr PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual Part Il Note EN An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics The PCL 5 printer provides the ability to print vector graphics using the HP GL 2 graphics language HP GL 2 graphics may be created within application software or imported from existing applications For various types of images many technical drawings and business graphics for example it is advanta geous to use vector graphics instead of raster graphics The advantages include faster I O transfer of large images and smaller disk storage requirements As a guideline use raster graphics for small complex images or those images that cannot be accomplished with HP GL 2 such as scanned photographs Use HP GL 2 for images that would involve a large amount of I O data transfer if printed using raster graphics or for drawings that are already in HP GL 2 format If the image is easier to describe using vectors instead of raster lines the image usually prints faster using HP GL 2 Printing with HP GL 2 requires leaving the PCL printer language mode and entering HP GL 2 mode Switching between modes involves only a few commands and software applications easily switch between the two modes as needed 17 1 Learning HP GL 2 Read through this chapter and Chapter 18 for a general overview of the HP GL 2 language and its relationship to the PCL printer language Then flip through the ot
17. Specify the location of P1 and optionally P2 in plotter units Specifying P2 is not required If P2 is not specified P2 tracks P1 and its coordinates change so that the X Y distances between P2 and P1 stay the same This tracking process can locate P2 outside the effective window Used carefully the tracking function can be useful for preparing more than one equal sized drawing on a page For an example refer to Drawing Equal Sized Pictures on a Page earlier in this chapter e Neither X Y coordinate of P1 can equal the corresponding coordinate of P2 If either coordinate of P1 equals the corres ponding coordinate of P2 the coordinate of P2 is incremented by 1 plotter unit The locations of P1 and P2 interact with the following commands Table 19 11 Commands Affected by P1 P2 Command Group IW Input Window The Configuration Status Group RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width WU Pen Width Unit Selection DR Relative Direction The Character Group LB Label SR Relative Character Size 19 24 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN An IP command remains in effect until another IP command is executed an IR command is executed or the printer is initialized Table 19 12 Related Commands Group IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale
18. 1 4 1 Butt clamped integer Kind 2 1 6 1 Mitered clamped real Kind 3 1 to 32 767 5 EN LA Line Attributes 22 15 There are three line attributes ine ends line joins and the miter limit The LA command parameters are used in pairs the first parameter kind selects a line attribute and the second parameter value defines the appearance of that attribute The printer uses the current line attributes when the optional parameter pairs are omitted e No Parameters Defaults the line attributes to butt ends mitered joins and a miter limit of 5 Equivalent to LA1 1 2 1 3 5 e Kind Specifies the line attribute for which you are setting a value Attributes and kind parameter values are listed in the following table e Value Defines the characteristics of the attribute specified by the kind parameter The available values are listed in the following table and described under each attribute Table 22 8 Attribute Kind Value Description Line Ends 1 Butt default Square Triangular AION Round Line Joins a4 Mitered default Mitered beveled Triangular Round Beveled oc AJ wo N No join applied Miter Limit 5 default refer to description under Miter Limit Lines with a width of 0 35 mm or less always have butt caps and no join regardless of the current attribute setting Full range is 1
19. 13 18 master y resolution pattern descriptor 13 18 matching coordinates HP GL 2 and PCL 19 15 measure unit of Glossary 15 medium stroke weight 7 6 memory available 16 21 16 24 entity storage 16 3 font usage 7 8 16 22 macro 12 3 overflow avoiding 16 2 24 15 RAM 8 3 raster graphics usage 15 6 ROM 8 3 status readback free space 16 4 user 8 3 menu Glossary 7 metric data Intellifont 11 63 11 64 mirror image 19 8 creating 19 12 fonts 23 74 miter limit 22 19 mnemonic HP GL 2 syntax 17 7 Mode Enter command HP GL 2 18 13 Mode Enter command PCL 18 14 modified print environment 3 1 3 7 Glossary 7 MSL and Unicode numbers 9 11 character requirements 10 7 Master Symbol List defined Glossary 8 symbol index 11 35 11 36 symbol index example 10 14 symbol index numbers 9 11 N negative angle of rotation 20 7 Glossary 8 nesting macro 12 7 networking printer status 16 2 none status readback error 16 19 non volatile RAM Glossary 8 non zero winding fill method for polygons 21 13 number of characters font header 11 30 Number of Copies command 4 4 19 39 0 off line on line Glossary 8 offset print job 4 11 one byte typeface value 11 24 opaque print model mode 13 3 OR threshold font header 11 35 orientation 7 8 Glossary 8 character descriptor 11 56 effect on HP GL 2 17 17 font header 11 19 fonts 7 8 8 20 HP GL 2 labels 23 9 in font selection 8 25 raster graphics 15 8 Orientation command 5 5 orig
20. 230 to 230 1 no default Yuin Y MAX real 230 to 230 1 no default type clamped 0 1 0r2 0 integer left clamped 0 to 100 50 real bottom clamped 0 to 100 50 real XFACTOR Yractor real 230 to 230 4 no default For more information about the basic concept of scaling refer to The Scale Command earlier in this chapter 19 40 The Configuration and Status Group EN There are three forms of scaling anisotropic isotropic and point factor The Type parameter tells the printer which form you are using Refer to the following table Table 19 18 Scaling Form Type Description Anisotropic 0 Establishes standard user unit scaling allowing different unit size on X axis and Y axis Isotropic 1 Establishes standard user unit scaling with same unit size on X axis and Y axis Point Factor 2 Establishes P1 user unit location and a specific ratio of plotter units to user units e No Parameters Turns off scaling subsequent coordinates are in plotter units For Scaling Types 0 and 1 The following forms of scaling establish a user unit coordinate system by mapping user defined coordinate values onto the scaling points P1 and P2 The type parameter selects between anisotropic Type 0 and isotropic scaling Type 1 Table 19 19 Scaling Form Type Syntax Anisotropic 0 SCXMIN XMAX YMIN YMAXT type Isotropic 1 SC Xyin X vax Yuins YmaxLtypel left bo
21. E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SM PA200 1000 PD200 1230 400 1560 PD700 1670 1300 1600 1800 2000 PU Enter symbol mode using the asterisk as the symbol move to absolute location 200 1000 set the pen down and draw first to 200 1230 then to 400 1560 Place the pen down and draw from the current pen position 400 1560 to 700 1670 then to 1300 1600 then to 1800 2000 lift the pen SM3 PA700 500 900 450 1300 850 Enter symbol mode again with 3 as the current symbol print a 3 in the following locations 700 500 900 450 and 1300 850 PA1750 1300 2500 1350 PU SM With the pen still up and 3 still the current symbol print a 3 at 1750 1300 and 2500 1350 lift the pen and exit symbol mode PA3300 1100 PD SMY PA4400 1890 SMZ Move to 8300 1100 set the pen down and enter symbol mode with Y as the symbol draw a line to 4400 1890 and print a Y re enter symbol mode with Z as the current symbol 22 36 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Table 22 18 Example Using the Symbol Mode Command PA4600 1590 SMX Draw a line to 4600 1590 and print a z PA3300 1100 PU specify X as the next symbol move to 3300 1100 and print an X lift the p
22. Every subsequent pen move can be specified using the same coordinate numbers in either mode The following commands demonstrate that the grids are synchronized PU300 300 PD600 600 Lift the pen and move it to 300 300 then draw a line to 600 600 This draws a line at a 45 angle down from the starting point ELIA Enter the PCL mode with HP GL 2 s pen position being inherited as PCLs CAP 600 600 Fe c300a4b0P Draw a horizontal line rule that is 300 PCL units wide by 4 PCL units Note that the cursor position after a rule is printed is at the beginning of the rule in this case 600 600 19 16 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 5 Example Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System in Portrait Orientation Fc961BPU PR300 0 PD PR0 500 Enter HP GL 2 mode inheriting PCL s CAP and lift the pen move to a point 300 user units dots to the right place the pen down and print a line 500 user units down Fe961A Enter the PCL mode with the CAP at the current HP GL 2 pen position ERE Reset the printer to end the job and eject a page Physical Page Border Logical lt Page Border 600 600 Fa PCL 300 300 900 600 900 1100 b P2 Figure 19 7 Adapting the HP GL 2 coordinate system to match the PCL system in portrait orientation EN Using Scaling Effectively 19 17 Windowing Sett
23. FT11 3 for an index number of 3 e No Parameters Defaults all raster fill patterns to solid fill e Index Specifies the index number of the pattern being defined Eight patterns can exist concurrently When you send RF with an index parameter only RFn the corresponding pattern is defaulted to solid fill e Width Height Specify the width and height in pixels of the pattern being defined 22 32 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Note EN A pixel is equal to the size of one dot at the current printer resolution e Pen Number Represents a pixel in the pattern being defined and indicates its color black or white 0 White gt 0 Black The pen number parameter defines pixels left to right top to bottom The total number of pen number parameters should be equal to the width times height parameters For example to define a pattern that is 8 x 16 pixels you need 128 pen number parameters If you do not include enough pen number parameters the rest of the pixels are assumed to be white zero Patterns are printed in rows parallel to the plotter unit X axis Table 22 16 Example Creating and Printing a Fill Pattern E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PU5 5 Lift the pen and move to absolute position 5 5 PA
24. HP GL 2 example 17 13 call macro 12 4 CAP current active position 2 2 6 1 17 21 cap height 23 74 cap height font header 11 31 Carriage Return CR control code 6 7 line termination modes 6 13 point HP GL 2 23 5 23 26 23 29 23 37 23 41 23 63 suppressing 24 7 cartridge fonts 7 2 fonts status readback 16 8 macro 12 1 CC Character Complement 11 41 cell height font header 11 18 cell width font header 11 18 centronics I O Glossary 2 CF command 23 20 example 23 22 chapter summaries vi character height 7 5 orientation 8 20 pitch font selection 8 10 positioning 2 9 spacing 24 5 character cell 11 4 23 12 illustration 11 19 Intellifont 11 4 TrueType 11 5 character clipping 2 8 character code and symbol index numbers 9 11 command 11 49 delete 9 5 character complement 10 7 font header field 11 35 numbers 9 10 character coordinates TrueType 11 5 character data blocks 11 48 character descriptor field 11 57 compression 11 54 height 11 57 Intellifont 11 64 TrueType size 11 69 character definition command 11 50 examples 11 70 PCL 11 48 character descriptor 11 1 11 62 Glossary 2 bitmap example landscape 11 72 bitmap example portrait 11 70 character data 11 57 character data compression 11 54 character header 11 51 checksum 11 64 11 69 class 11 53 11 62 11 63 11 68 component list 11 65 compound 11 61 continuation 11 52 11 68 cursor positioning 11 57 data offset 11 63 11 64 data size 11 63 11 69
25. PCL 4 1 hints 24 3 job separation 4 11 K Kind 1 symbol set 23 69 2 font spacing 23 70 3 pitch 23 70 4 height 23 71 5 posture 23 71 6 stroke weight 23 71 7 typeface 23 72 L LA command 22 2 22 15 label default conditions HP GL 2 23 7 EN EN direction 23 29 orientation and placement 23 9 terminator 23 11 23 44 text 17 11 text HP GL 2 23 1 23 3 23 8 Label LB command 23 3 23 59 Label Origin LO command 23 10 23 62 labeling pen movement 23 24 landscape defined Glossary 8 character data example 11 73 orientation 5 5 print boundaries 2 8 LaserJet customer assistance Customer Support 1 printer features v last code 10 7 font header 11 30 layers and transparency mode 22 42 LB command 23 3 23 59 example 23 60 Left Margin command 5 13 Left Offset Registration command 4 7 left offset character descriptor 11 56 legal vs letter page selection 24 4 LF Line Feed 6 13 line drawing HP GL 2 20 2 ends 22 17 fill types 22 1 joins 22 17 pen widths 22 5 screening 22 39 segments four types HP GL 2 19 18 thickness 23 21 types 22 2 types user defined 22 44 width 23 74 Line and Fill Attributes Group HP GL 2 commands 17 6 22 1 Line Attribute LA command 22 2 22 15 Line Feed LF 6 13 23 5 23 16 changing distance 23 8 specifying direction 23 46 Line Spacing command 5 24 Line Termination command 6 13 Line Type command 22 2 22 22 LO command 23 10 23 62 location type status rea
26. PCL printer language commands and HP GL 2 commands As the name implies the PCL printer language commands are used when in the PCL printer language mode They define the area on the page where HP GL 2 graphics are printed and provide a means to enter HP GL 2 mode The HP GL 2 commands are used within HP GL 2 mode They define the image that is printed and allow you to return to the PCL printer language mode The HP GL 2 language has its own syntax and each command is listed in this section of the manual The vector graphics commands have been grouped into functional categories The categories are designated as shown in Table 17 1 through Each of the command categories is discussed in its own chapter beginning with Chapter 19 The Configuration and Status Group Table 17 1 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 1 of 5 CONFIGURATION GROUP CO Comment DF Default Values IN Initialize IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window PG Advance Page RO Rotate Coordinate System RP Replot SC Scale 1 Ignored by HP LaserJet printers EN HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 3 Table 17 2 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 2 of 5 VECTOR GROUP AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up RT
27. Pen Width 22 29 Note e Pen Specifies the pen number to which the new width applies If the pen parameter is not specified the printer applies the width to both pens Specifying pen numbers other than 0 or 1 causes the printer to ignore the command Pen width does not set the width of lines for drawing labels unless the stroke weight value is set to 9999 Stick Arc fonts only The width of character lines is determined by the stroke weight attribute of the Alternate Font Definition AD or Standard Font Definition SD commands A PW command remains in effect until another PW command or a WU command is executed PW is not defaulted by the Default Values DF command Table 22 14 Example Using the PW Command E Reset the printer 950B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA3500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move the pen to 3500 2500 PW1 5 PD4500 2800 4500 1800 3500 1500 3500 2500 Select a pen width of 1 5 mm Set the pen down and draw a line from the current position to 4500 2800 then 4500 1800 next to 3500 1500 and then to 3500 2500 PW 8 PD2300 2900 2300 1900 3500 1500 Set the pen width to 8 mm Place the pen down and print a line to 2300 2900 then to 2300 1900 and finally to 8500 1500 PW 5 PU2300 2900 PD3300 3200 450
28. Print DEF followed by Line Feed LBGHI Print GHI without CR or LF DV Define Variable Text Path 23 49 Table 23 24 Example Using the DV Command continued FC960A Enter the PCL mode ESE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page LO1 GDA ESSE uj a 4000 3000 _ Laue J EWS 2000 3000 K ES cog DEF Lot L ILI L_ GHI LEH Figure 23 29 Table 23 25 Related Commands Group CP Character Plot The Character Group DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction LB Label LO Label Origin Note Used with specific LO Label Origin settings labels can be concatenated see LO command description later in this chapter 23 50 The Character Group EN ES Extra Space EN This command adjusts space between characters and lines of labels without affecting character size ES width height or ES Parameter Format Functional Range Default width clamped real 32768 to 32767 0 height clamped real 32768 to 32767 0 The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameters Defaults the spaces and lines between characters to no extra space Equivalent to ESO 0 e Width Specifies an increase positive number or decrease negative number in the space between characters For maximum legibility do not specify more than one extra space or subtract more than half a space e Height Specifies an increase
29. SELECT 16 11 Set Status Readback Location Type command 16 8 Set Status Readback Location Unit command 16 9 soft fonts 16 13 symbol set status 16 10 SYMBOLSETS 16 13 TOTAL 16 22 unbound scalable fonts 16 13 user identification 16 25 user defined pattern status 16 10 status readback error internal 16 19 Stick font 23 74 Stick Arc fonts 23 15 stroke weight 7 6 defined Glossary 13 font header 11 23 Font Selection command 8 16 HP GL 2 23 71 in font selection 8 24 table 8 16 style Glossary 13 defining characteristics 7 6 font 7 6 font header 11 23 font selection command 8 14 fonts pictured 8 15 in font selection 8 24 italic pictured 7 6 MSB font header 11 16 upright pictured 7 6 values table 8 14 style word 11 16 subpolygons 21 11 summaries chapter vi support HP customer assistance Customer Support 1 SV command 22 39 sweep angle 21 6 in wedges 21 28 symbol collection 9 9 10 7 symbol index Glossary 13 examples 10 13 10 14 number 10 11 numbers and character codes 9 11 symbol map 10 11 symbol mode 20 44 20 47 Symbol Mode SM command 22 35 symbol set 7 2 defined Glossary 14 7 bit ISO 8 7 entity 16 3 font header 11 20 Font Selection command 8 6 font selection command 8 23 HP GL 2 23 69 ID code 10 6 ID Code command 10 2 ID selection value 10 2 10 6 ISO 8 8 mapping table 9 12 status readback 16 10 16 18 user defined 8 7 user defined also see user defined symbol set 10 1 user defined defin
30. Yi YY YY A YY Figure 21 20 Table 21 18 Related Commands Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge PM Polygon Mode RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group FT Fill Type LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group FP Fill Polygon 21 33 PM Polygon Mode Command This command enters polygon mode for defining shapes such as block letters or any unique area and exits for subsequent filling and or edging Fill polygons using the Fill Polygon FP command and or outline them using the Edge Polygon EP command PM polygon definition or PM Parameter Format Functional Range Default polygon clamped 0 1 and 2 0 definition integer In polygon mode you define the area of the polygon s using graphics commands These commands and associated X Y coordinates are stored in the polygon buffer The polygon is not printed until you exit polygon mode and fill and or outline the area e No Parameters Clears the polygon buffer and enters polygon mode Equivalent to PMO e Polygon Definition Defines polygon mode status as follows e 0 Clears the polygon buffer and enters polygon mode e 1 Closes the current polygon or subpolygon and remains in polygon mode all commands sent following PM1 but before a PM or the next
31. amp amp amp ell 5 2 3 Select Default Font as Secondary 8 27 ID Secondary Symbol Set 8 6 s B Secondary Stroke Weight 8 16 s H Secondary Pitch 8 10 s S Secondary Style 8 14 s T Typeface Secondary 8 18 s V Secondary Height 8 12 s W Font Header 11 6 s1P Secondary Spacing 8 9 b M Set Compression Method 15 16 b W Transfer Raster Data 15 29 b Y Raster Y Offset 15 15 c A Horizontal Rectangle Size PCL Units 14 3 c B Vertical Rectangle Size PCL Units 14 4 c D Font ID assign 9 4 c E Character Code 11 49 c F Font Control 9 5 c H Horizontal Rectangle Size Decipoints 14 3 c P Fill Rectangular Area 14 9 c Q Pattern Control 13 23 c R Symbol Set ID Code 10 2 c S Symbol Set Control 10 12 s Index 1 Index 2 c V Vertical Rectangle Size Decipoints 14 4 c W User Defined Pattern 13 16 p R Set Pattern Reference Point 13 22 p X Horizontal Cursor Positioning PCL Units 6 6 p Y Vertical Cursor Positioning PCL Units 6 12 r A Start Raster Graphics 15 14 r F Raster Graphics Presentation 15 8 r T Raster Height 15 11 r T Raster Width 15 13 rC End Raster Graphics 15 30 s M Free Space 16 21 s X Echo 16 25 t R Raster Graphics Resolution 15 6 v N Source Transparency Mode 13 6 v O Pattern Transparency mode 13 7 v T Select Current Pattern Command 13 12 amp Sp 6 13 ERRO
32. data types 11 51 delta 11 57 format 11 52 glyph ID 11 69 height 11 57 Intellifont scalable fonts 11 60 left offset 11 56 11 68 number of components 11 65 orientation 11 56 PCL bitmap fonts 11 51 scalable contour data format 11 61 size 11 53 11 62 11 68 top offset 11 56 11 68 tree data 11 64 tree offset 11 64 TrueType 11 65 width 11 57 11 68 xy coordinate data 11 64 Index 3 Index 4 xy data offset 11 64 character design 7 7 Character Fill Mode command 23 20 Character Group HP GL 2 23 1 commands list 17 5 commands summary 23 1 character orientation 7 8 character origin 23 63 Character Plot CP command 23 5 23 8 23 16 23 24 character positioning 6 1 character requirement MSL 10 7 number 9 10 Unicode 10 9 user defined symbol set header 10 7 character row height 5 22 character sets fonts 7 1 character size HP GL 2 23 8 23 74 Character Slant command 23 8 23 78 character slope 23 29 character space 23 8 adjusting 23 51 character spacing 24 4 fixed spaced fonts 5 20 horizontal 7 5 character stroke weight 8 16 character style 8 14 character thickness 7 6 character parameter parameterized 1 6 characteristics font 8 1 24 5 characters designing large continuation 11 53 printable range 11 30 user defined symbol sets 10 4 characters per inch 7 5 8 10 checksum character descriptor 11 64 11 69 font header 11 39 11 42 chord angle 20 10 20 25 21 16 and circle smoothness 20 26 example 20 10 varying e
33. one dot can equal either 1 300th or 1 600 inch The number of dots printed per inch is referred to as the printer s resolution Glossary 3 Downloading The process of transferring soft fonts macros or raster data from a host computer to the printer s user memory is called downloading DTR Polarity The configuration of DTR polarity determines whether pin 20 on the serial interface connector is high or low when the printer is ready If DTR polarity is Hl pin 20 is high when the printer is ready If DTR polarity is LO pin 20 is low when the printer is ready Escape Character The first character of a PCL command or escape sequence is identified by the symbol ASCII decimal code 27 This character is a control code used specifically by the printer to identify a string of characters as a printer command As the printer monitors incoming data from a computer it is looking for this character When this character appears the printer reads it and its associated characters as acommand to be performed and not data to be printed Escape Sequence or PCL Command PCL escape sequences consist of two or more characters The first character is always the escape character which is identified by the symbol This character is a control code used specifically by the printer to identify a string of characters as a printer command As the printer monitors incoming data from a computer it is looking for this char
34. positive number or decrease negative number in the space between lines For maximum legibility do not specify more than two extra lines or subtract more than half a line An ES command remains in effect until another ES command is executed or until the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Table 23 26 Example Using the ES Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing ES Extra Space 23 51 Table 23 26 Example Using the ES Command continued PA2500 3200 Specify absolute plotting and move to S1 187 269 2500 3200 specify a relative character size of 187 cm wide by 269 cm high DT ES Define the character as the label terminator and set the extra space setting to default no extra space LBES CAUSES Print ES CAUSES CP LBTHIS Send a CP command as a CR LF and print SPACING THIS SPACING PA2500 2500 Move to 2500 2500 ES 1 25 Decrease the inter character spacing by 1 LBES 1 25 and the inter line spacing by 25 print CAUSES ES 1 25 CAUSES CP LBTHIS Send CP in place of CR LF and print THIS SPACING SPACING PA2500 1800 Move to 2500 1800 ES 2 25 LBES 2 25 Increase the inter character spacing by 2
35. 13 amp amp a M Right Margin 5 14 amp amp a P Print Direction 5 9 amp amp a R Vertical Cursor Positioning Rows 6 9 amp amp a V Vertical Cursor Positioning Decipoints 6 11 amp amp d D Enable Underline 8 29 amp amp d Disable Underline 8 29 amp amp fitS Push Pop Cursor Position 6 14 amp amp f X Macro Control 12 7 amp amp fitY Macro ID assign 12 6 amp amp k G Line Termination 6 13 amp amp k H Horizontal Motion Index 5 20 amp amp p X Transparent Mode 8 28 amp amp r F Flush All Pages 16 24 amp amp r T Inquire Status Readback Entity 16 10 amp amp r T Set Status Readback Location Type 16 8 amp amp r T Set Status Readback Location Unit 16 9 amp amp s C End Of Line Wrap 24 12 amp amp u B Unit Of Measure 4 13 amp sp 6 13 B Primary Stroke Weight 8 16 X Primary Font Selection by ID 8 26 3 Select Default Font as Primary 8 27 B boolean 10 5 11 14 11 51 f W Define Symbol Set 10 4 ID Primary Symbol Set 8 6 s H Primary Pitch 8 10 s P Primary Spacing 8 9 s S Primary Style 8 14 s T Typeface Primary 8 18 s V Primary Height 8 12 s W Character Descriptor Data 11 50 SB signed byte 10 5 SI signed integer 10 5 SLI signed long integer 10 5 UB unsigned byte 10 5 UI unsigned integer 10 5 ULI unsigned long integer 10 5 1 3 Glossary 4 X Secondary Font Selection by ID 8 26
36. 14 Switch from the alternate font to the standard font using the ASCII Shift In control character SI decimal code 15 Note that a Shift In or Shift Out outside of the label command string is ignored Designating and Selecting Fonts 23 17 AD Alternate Font Definition This command is similar to the Standard Font Definition SD command that defines the primary HP GL 2 font In addition the AD command defines an alternate HP GL 2 font and its characteris tics font spacing pitch height posture stroke weight and typeface It allows the font characteristics to be assigned to the secondary alternate font definition Use AD to set up an alternate font that you can easily access when labeling AD kind value kind value or AD Parameter Format Functional Range Default kind clamped 1to7 no default integer value clamped kind dependent kind dependent real Refer to the table following the parameter descriptions The AD command allows you to define another font and its font characteristics e No Parameters Defaults the alternate font characteristics to that of the Stick font see the following table e Kind Specifies the characteristic for which you are setting a value see the following table Table 23 6 Kind Characteristic Default Value Description 1 Symbol Set 277 Roman 8 2 Font Spacing 0 fixed spacing 3 Pitch 9 characters per inch 4 Height 11 5
37. 2500 1500 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page EN Drawing Rectangles 21 3 10 10 Figure 21 1 2500 1500 The Fill Rectangle Absolute RA and Fill Rectangle Relative RR commands both discussed later in this chapter fill their rectangles with the default or current fill pattern You may also want to edge or outline the rectangle for better image definition with some fill types The following command sequence draws two filled rectangles one edged and one not Table 21 4 Example Filled Rectangles E Reset the printer 950B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PAO 0 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 0 0 FT3 Specify fill type 3 hatching parallel lines RR1500 1000 Fill a rectangular shape with the currently active fill pattern The lower left corner of the rectangle should be the current location 0 0 and the upper right corner should be 1500 plu in the X direction and 1000 plu in the Y direction from the starting location 21 4 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 4 Example Filled Rectangles continued EP Draw an edge around the rectangle that was just drawn Since the previous RR command leaves its definition in the polygon buffer 1500 1000 you do not n
38. As the printer enters HP GL 2 mode for the first time since ELE power on or control panel reset all HP GL 2 variables are at their default settings as determined by the Picture Presentation Directives the PCL Picture Frame Size Picture Frame Anchor Point and HP GL 2 Plot Size commands Table 18 2 Example Creating a Simple Drawing ELE Reset the printer E amp amp I2A Set the page size to letter E amp amp I00 Specify portrait orientation E c3600x3600Y Specify a 5 inch wide by 5 inch high PCL Picture Frame 5in x 720 decipoints in 3600 decipoints E p450x675Y Move the cursor to the point you desire as the picture frame anchor point Physical Page Anchor Point 450 675 PCL Picture Ig Frame E COT Set the picture frame anchor point to the cursor position 18 16 The Picture Frame EN E 1B IN SP1 SC0 100 0 100 PD100 0 100 100 0 100 0 0 Table 18 2 Example Creating a Simple Drawing continued Enter HP GL 2 mode with the cursor pen at the PCL cursor position In this example the cursor is at the picture frame anchor point 450 dots 1 5 in down from the top margin and 675 dots 2 25 in to the right of the left logical page boundary Initialize HP GL 2 command values and select pen number 1 black The IN command moves the pen position from the anchor point to the HP GL 2 origin the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame Set up user scaling so that
39. Command Group Cl Circle The Vector Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute The Polygon Group EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge LB Label The Character Group SM Symbol Mode The Line and Fill Attributes Group Notes Whenever the printer receives a Pen Down command it produces a dot at the current pen location If the pen is already down when the printer receives a command with an automatic Pen Down the unnecessary dot can mar your final output For best results include a Pen Up PU command before any command with an automatic Pen Down Only the portion of the pen falling within the effective window is printed The pen is centered on a line between the beginning and end points with half of the pen width falling on either side of this line The definition of each command tells you whether it has an automatic pen down If you find that part of your image is not drawn make sure your command sequence uses the PD command before the affected commands 17 22 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN EN Pen Location Pen location refers to the X Y coordinates of the current active position CAP the point at which the next HP GL 2 command begins Most commands when completed update the pen location The next command then begins at that location Some c
40. HP GL 2 1 4 Configuration and Status Group 19 1 Configuration Group 17 3 coordinate system 2 6 17 15 19 15 cursor positioning 6 1 default conditions table 19 19 default conditions establishing 19 3 default settings 18 15 default values 17 9 defining the image area 18 2 designating a font example 23 73 drawing arcs 20 5 drawing Bezier curves 20 8 drawing circles 20 4 drawing lines 20 2 drawing polygons 21 10 drawing rectangles 21 3 drawing wedges 21 6 effective window 17 19 enlarging reducing images 19 8 Enter Mode command 18 13 environment 3 7 5 5 factory default settings 3 5 font selection 8 27 font spacing 23 15 font special effects 7 11 graphics limits 17 19 19 12 Index 11 Index 12 image creation hints 24 9 importing existing images 17 25 labels 23 1 Line and Fill Attributes Group 17 6 22 1 line segments four types 19 18 line types patterns 22 22 listing of commands 17 3 macro overlay environment 12 4 matching coordinate system with PCL 19 15 omitting optional parameters 17 9 orientation 17 17 page size independent image 18 3 parameter formats 17 10 PCL picture frame 18 1 pen location 17 23 picture frame 2 6 picture frame scaling 18 3 Plot Horizontal Size 18 11 Plot Vertical Size 18 12 Polygon Group 17 4 21 1 print area limiting boundaries 17 19 print environment 19 3 printing text 23 1 23 59 programming languages 17 13 range of parameter values 17 10 reset 3 8 rotate coordinate system 19 34 scaling
41. Join 1 2 line width Triangular Join 3 Formed by Rounded join 4 Formed Beveled join 5 two lines extending from the by an arc with a diameter Formed by a line connecting the outer edge of one vector to the outer edge of the other vector outer edge of each vector to a equal to the current line point 1 2 line width beyond the width end intersection of the vectors Figure 22 12Five Line Joins When you select no join LA2 6 the currently selected line ends for the two lines merely overlap Refer to the following illustration No Join No Join Butt End Square End No Join No Join Triangular End Round End Figure 22 13 Overlapping Line Ends without Line Join Selection 22 18 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Miter Limit The value you specify for miter limit determines the maximum length of a mitered join as shown in the following illustration The miter limit is the ratio of the miter length the length of the diagonal line through the join of two connecting lines to the line width For example with the default miter limit of 5 the miter length can be as long as 5 times the line width miter length Miter Length Miter Limit _ _ Line Width Figure 22 14 Miter Limit When the miter length exceeds the miter limit the point of the miter is clipped to the miter limit the clipped miter is equivalent to a beveled join The default miter limit is usually suffici
42. P1 is 0 0 and P2 is 100 100 these points are the lower left and upper right corners of the PCL Picture Frame respectively 100 by 100 User Scaling mit Draw a box marking the perimeter of the PCL Picture Frame Default Settings 18 17 Note 18 18 Table 18 2 Example Creating a Simple Drawing continued PU50 50 CI25 E o c 1A E cE Physical Page gt 100 100 100 0 Lift the pen and move to the center of the PCL Picture Frame 50 50 draw a circle with a radius that is 25 of the picture frame width Enter the PCL mode with the cursor at the current HP GL 2 pen position Reset the printer to end the job and eject a page Physical Page Radius 25 User Units Any line drawn along the border of the effective window will cause the line to be clipped producing a line width one half of the defined pen width For example all the lines drawn in the above example are half the width of the other lines since they are clipped at the window borders The Picture Frame EN EN The Configuration and Status Group Introduction The configuration and status group commands help you Establish default conditions and values for HP GL 2 features Scale images in the dimensional units you want to use Enlarge reduce images for different media sizes Establish a window soft clip limits Draw equal sized and mirror imaged drawings Rotate the HP GL 2 coordinate system
43. PA2500 3500 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 2500 3500 EN Drawing Wedges 21 7 Table 21 5 Example Drawing Wedges continued EW600 90 60 Draw the outline of a wedge using the current pen location 2500 3500 as the point of the wedge The wedge has a radius of 600 plotter units begins at 90 from the default zero degree reference point and sweeps for 60 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page P2 2500 3500 P1 Figure 21 5 The following example uses different fill types with wedges and circles Table 21 6 Example Filling Wedges and Circles E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black PA1400 2500 Select absolute plotting mode and move to 1400 2500 WG600 150 120 Fill a wedge with radius 600 plu a start angle of 150 and a sweep angle of 120 Since no fill type was specified the wedge is black solid black is the default fill type 21 8 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 6 Example Filling Wedges and Circles continued PA2300 2500 FT3 75 45 Specify absolute plotting and move to 2300 2500 Select fill type number 3 hatching parallel lines with 75 plu between hatching lines and hatching lines tilted at 45 WG600 90 180 Fill a wedge with the current fill type use a radius of 600 plu a
44. Pitch Values Pitch Values Description 0 to 32 767 9999 characters per inch default 9 Fixed spaced fonts depend on pitch to determine character size Proportional fonts ignore pitch Note that with the SD and AD command you cannot create tall skinny characters or short wide characters the character aspect ratio is preserved unless an SI or SR command overrides it 23 70 The Character Group EN Note EN Kind 4 Height For proportional fonts the height characteristic defines the font point size the height of the character cell Fixed spaced fonts ignore height the point size is calculated using the font pitch There are approximately 72 points in an inch Note that with the font definition command SD or AD you cannot create tall skinny characters or short wide characters the character aspect ratio is preserved Table 23 42 Kind 4 Height Values Height Values Description 0 to 32 767 9999 font point size default 11 5 Kind 5 Posture Posture defines the character s vertical posture The default posture is upright Table 23 43 Kind 5 Posture Values Posture Values Description 0 Upright Default 1 Italic 2 Alternate Italic Kind 6 Stroke Weight The stroke weight characteristic defines the line thickness used in the fonts design The default stroke weight is medium When relative sizing is in effect changes in P1 and P2 cause the relative str
45. Relative Arc Three Point Table 17 3 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 3 of 5 POLYGON GROUP EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon PM Polygon Mode RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge 17 4 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Table 17 4 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 4 of 5 CHARACTER GROUP AD Alternate Font Definition CF Character Fill Mode CP Character Plot DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction DT Define Label Terminator DV Define Variable Text Path ES Extra Space Fl Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LB Label LO Label Origin SA Select Alternate Font SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant SR Relative Character Size SS Select Standard font TD Transparent Data 1 These commands are part of HP GL 2 s Dual Context Extensions EN HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 5 Table 17 5 The HP GL 2 Commands by Group 5 of 5 LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP AC Anchor Corner FT Fill Type LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width RF Raster Fill Definition SM Symbol Mode SP Select Pen sv Screened Vectors TR Transparency Mode UL User defined Line Type WU Pen Width
46. Shading is a special type of raster fill and PCL cross hatch and PCL user defined fills Figure 22 3 shows the first four types The user defined fill tyoe shown on the right can be printed using the HP GL 2 RF raster fill command User defined fills can also be selected with the FT Fill Type command after having been created in PCL context see User Defined Raster Graphics in Chapter 13 PPO WS 4A P KP HP HPHP HP HP HP HP HP HP P HP HP HPHP HP HPHP HP HPHP PHP HP HPHP HP HP HP HP HPHP PHP HP HPHP HP HP HP HP HPHP X CRISIS IIAN OQ OSS SESS KROLL PHP HP HPHP HP HPHP HP HP NP Figure 22 3 Fill Types When you use HP GL 2 hatching or cross hatch fill types the lines are drawn using the currently selected line width type and attributes For example if you have selected a dashed line type and a hatched fill type your figure is filled with dashed parallel lines All fill types have an anchor corner the starting point of the fill pattern Its default location is in the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame Conceptually the fill type replicates out from the anchor corner in the plus X directions and plus Y directions as shown in the following illustration Figures are filled by that portion of the fill type resident to the area refer to rectangles 1 and 2 22 4 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN wo gt N anchor corner Figure 22 4 Fill Area Anchor Corner Use the A
47. Size SR establishes the nominal character width and CAP height as a percentage of the distance between P1 and P2 Subsequent changes in the location of P1 and P2 cause the character size to change with the SR command Changing the character size changes the size of the CP Character Plot cell and proportionally changes the line width used in labels refer to AD and SD Note When the Shift In SI or Shift Out SO control codes are used to select a font the font size reverts to that font specified using the AD or SD commands You can use the Character Slant SL command to slant the characters at a specified angle in either direction from the left vertical side of the CP Character Plot cell The CP cell is not altered Character Spaces and Text Lines You can use the Extra Space ES command to automatically increase or decrease spaces between all characters or lines For example ES can be used to increase space between every character in a label such as MEMORANDUM or to increase or decrease space between every line of text such as double spacing 23 8 The Character Group EN Note EN You can use the Character Plot CP command to move the pena specific number of lines or spaces character cells from the current pen location Use the CP command for example to indent a label a certain number of spaces Label Orientation and Placement You can place your labels anywhere on the page in any orientation The Absolute
48. Unit Selection 1 These commands are part of the Palette Extensions to HP GL 2 As shown in the tables above each HP GL 2 command is a two letter mnemonic code designed to remind you of its function For example IN is the Initialize command SP is the Select Pen command and Cl is the Circle command Parameters are used with certain HP GL 2 commands to tell the printer to complete the command in a particular way Understanding HP GL 2 Syntax HP GL 2 commands have four components a mnemonic parameter s separator s and a terminator Refer to the following illustration of a typical HP GL 2 command and the description of its components 17 6 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN EN Bison Separator Terminator PA30 30 Parameters Figure 17 1 Typical HP GL 2 Command e Mnemonic The two letter mnemonic reminds you of the command s function The mnemonic can be uppercase or lowercase e Parameter s Some commands have no parameters for those commands which have them parameters can be either required or optional as indicated in the description of that command e Separator s When you use parameters you must separate them with a comma or space or in the case of a numeric parameter with a or sign Commas are recommended because some computers eliminate spaces especially when sending variables e Terminator All commands require a terminator Most HP GL 2 commands are terminated by a
49. a faxback service called HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology A wealth of information on HP peripherals including the full line of HP LaserJet printers is available to anyone with access to a group 3 fax machine The phone number for the HP FIRST service is 208 344 4809 HP s Personal Peripherals Assist Line If your organization s support personnel or your dealer are unable to answer your question Hewlett Packard has a Personal Peripherals Assist Line available to you It is available from 7 AM to 6 PM Mountain Standard Time Monday Tuesday Thursday and Friday and 7 AM to 4 PM MST Wednesday 208 323 2551 Before you call the Personal Peripherals Assist Line do the following 1 Check the Troubleshooting Checklist section of your printer User s Manual 2 Use the printers control panel to print self test if possible 3 Check with you software vendor for help if you suspect a software problem Customer Support 2 EN EN When you call the Personal Peripherals Assist Line please have the following information available to help us answer your questions Identify which computer you are using Identify any special equipment or software you are using for example spoolers networks switch boxes modems or special software drivers Identify the cable you are using and who sold it to you Identify any special interface I O or RAM boards installed in your printer Identify the software n
50. a drawing to be page size independent it must not specify any parameters in absolute units This implies that e No parameter of any command is in plotter units The scaled mode SC command must be used exclusively either the default locations of P1 and P2 are used or their positions are specified with the IR Input Relative P1 and P2 command The default window is used or the window is specified in user units using the IW command e For labels only the SR Relative Character Size mode is used the SI Absolute Character Size mode is not used e The Pen Width selection mode WU is specified as relative instead of metric e The pattern length for the Line Type LT is specified as relative instead of metric e Scalable fonts are used exclusively e The default window is used or the window is specified in user units e The DR command relative direction is used for label direction not DI absolute direction Automatically Adjusting Image Size to Fit the PCL Picture Frame 18 3 Note If a drawing does not meet the above criteria and the drawing is not the same size as the picture frame the HP GL 2 plot size must be specified to accomplish the desired scaling If it is not specified the image is clipped to the effective window and no scaling occurs The above bulleted items are required for automatic scaling when the picture frame size changes without specifying the HP GL 2 plot size However if an HP GL 2 pl
51. also be offset by an amount equal to 25 times the point size or 16 grid units 0 33 times the point size for the Stick font LO position or LO Parameter Format Functional Range Default position clamped integer 1 to 9 1 11 to 19 21 The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameters Defaults the label origin Equivalent to LO1 e Position The position numbers are graphically illustrated below Each dot represents the current pen location The label positions LO 11 through LO 19 differ from LO 1 through LO 9 only in that the labels are offset from the current pen location The label position 21 provides a PCL compatible label origin The character s are printed at the same location as in PCL Notes Label origins do not change text path To change the text path use the Define Variable Text Path DV command Label position 21 is not shown in Figure 23 33 because the exact location is dependent on the PCL position 23 62 The Character Group EN EN M 16 13 T TE T 14 T Dn AN 12 5 Li 18 2 2 Msh n 1 4 Le TES le ces S T 14 17 Figure 23 33Label Origin Positioning Each time an LO command is sent the Carriage Return point is updated to the location the pen was in when the LO command was received The current pen location but not the Carriage Return point is updated after each character is drawn and the pen automatically
52. an absolute character size of 1 cm wide by 1 5 cm high On the right a Univers font was used first at 12 point and scaled to 1 cm by 1 5 cm using the SI command Table 23 46 Example Using the SI Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA700 3000 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to 700 3000 DT Define the label terminator as the character LBPrint Print the word Print in the default font PA700 2000 SI1 1 5 Move to 700 2000 specify an absolute LBPrint character size of 1cm wide by 1 5 cm high and print the word Print SI Send SI with no parameters to return to the default size SD1 21 2 1 4 12 Designate a 12 point Univers font and 5 0 6 0 7 4148 SS select it SI Absolute Character Size 23 75 Table 23 46 Example Using the SI Command continued PA4000 3000 Move to 4000 3000 and print Print in LBPrint 12 point Univers PA4000 2000 Move the pen to 4000 2000 and specify SI1 1 5 LBPrinti a character size of 1 cm by 1 5 cm then print Print Fe960A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Print Print 700 3000 4000 3000 700 2000 4000 2000 Figure 23 34 The following are examples of negative parame
53. an angle from vertical The base of the character always stays on the horizontal as shown in the following illustration H G ay Positive Slant Figure 23 38 Character Slant 23 78 The Character Group Negative Slant EN Note EN The SL command only affects each character relative to an imaginary line beside the label The direction or placement of the label on the drawing does not affect the SL command neither do the settings of P1 and P2 The DI and DR commands however do affect the slant direction since the base of a character always stays on the baseline of the label You can specify the actual tangent value or you can use the TAN function available in most computer languages An SL command remains in effect until another SL command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Example Using the SL Command The following example illustrates the Slant command using a tangent value listed in the previous table Many languages require that tangents be calculated in radians Consult your programming language documentation if you are not familiar with your language s tangent function Table 23 49 Example Using the SL Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SD1 21 2 1 4 25 Designate the 25 point CG Tim
54. angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default radius current units 290 to 230 4 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5e The CI command includes an automatic pen down When a CI command is received the pen lifts moves from the center of the circle the current pen location to the starting point on the circumference lowers the pen draws the circle then returns with the pen up to the center of the circle After the circle is drawn the previous pen up down status is restored To avoid leaving a dot at the center of the circle move to and from the circle s center with the pen up e Radius Measured from the current pen location Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 Refer to the Arc Absolute AA command discussion earlier in this chapter for an explanation of the chord angle Each chord of the circle is drawn using the currently defined line type width and attributes Refer to Chapter 22 The Line and Fill Attributes Group for more information Do not use an adaptive negative line type to draw a circle as the printer attempts to draw a complete pattern for every chord 72 with the default chord angle Always use isotropic scaling in drawings that contain circles unless you want your circl
55. character descriptor scalable 11 61 compound character escapement 11 65 compound scalable character 11 63 compression Glossary 2 adaptive 15 25 adaptive operation hints 15 27 bitmap character data 11 53 11 54 byte counts 15 29 delta row 15 16 15 20 15 24 raster data 15 13 15 16 15 19 run length 15 16 TIFF 15 17 TIFF raster data 15 16 CompuServe HP Forum Customer Support 1 configuration Glossary 2 Configuration and Status Group 19 1 Configuration Group HP GL 2 commands 17 3 Configuration Menu Glossary 2 continuation character descriptor 11 53 11 62 11 68 user defined pattern descriptor 13 17 control user defined symbol sets 10 12 control bytes adaptive compression 15 25 control characters printing 23 86 control codes 1 3 Glossary 3 character printing 8 28 horizontal cursor positioning 6 7 in labels 23 6 printing 24 12 Space character 5 20 vertical cursor positioning 6 13 control panel Glossary 3 coordinate pairs 17 16 coordinate system Agfa design window 11 4 HP GL 2 2 6 17 15 matching HP GL 2 and PCL 19 15 PCL 2 1 2 4 physical 11 4 Rotate RO command 19 34 TrueType 11 5 units 6 3 copies number of 4 4 copyright font header 11 39 CP Character Plot cell 23 8 23 14 CP Character Plot command 23 5 23 8 23 16 23 24 23 26 CP copyright field 11 41 CR Carriage Return 6 7 cross hatch 22 4 22 9 fill pattern 14 9 patterns 13 11 14 8 patterns selection 13 8 14 5 current active position CAP 2
56. characters when printing text Printing Labels Note EN Use the Label command LB to create text charts or to emphasize areas of a diagram or graph that need special attention or explanation You can control almost all aspects of the label s appearance its position size slant spacing and direction All labels are drawn using the font currently designated refer to the SD or AD commands and selected for use refer to the SS or SA commands If you are using a font other than the default use SD Standard Font Definition or AD Alternate Font Definition commands to designate a font that can be selected Then use the SS Select Standard Font or SA Select Alternate Font commands to select the designated font You can follow the LB Label command with virtually any characters including non printing control codes such as a Line Feed or Carriage Return Symbol mode is a special case of a Label At the end of a label you must use a special label terminator to signify the end of text The default terminator is the ASCII end of text character ETX decimal code 03 or you can define a terminator using the DT command Without the label terminator in place your printer continues to label your picture with all subsequent HP GL 2 commands and parameters The following example demonstrates printing a simple label using the SD command to designate a font the SS command to select that font the DT command to define a label te
57. circle Draw this circle with a radius of 750 user units and a chord angle of 5 default E A Enter the PCL mode Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 45 Degree chord angle 15 Degree chord angle Figure 20 16 EN 30 Degree chord angle 5 Degree chord angle CI Circle 20 27 Table 20 17 Example Drawing Circles with Different Radii and Line Types EGE Reset the printer EL B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black SC 75 75 75 75 1 Set up user scaling with 75 75 as P1 and 75 75 as P2 the 1 parameter specifies isotropic scaling PAO 0 Specify absolute plotting and move to user unit location 0 0 LT CI5 Specify a default line type solid and draw a circle with a radius of 5 user units LTO CI 12 Select line type 0 dotted and draw a circle with a radius of 12 user units the minus sign indicates starting at the 180 point LT1 CI19 LT2 CI 26 Select line type 1 and draw a circle with a radius of 19 user units Then select line type 2 and draw a circle with a radius of 26 user units LT3 C133 LT4 CI 40 Select line type 3 draw a circle with a radius of 33 user units Then select line type 4 and draw a circle with radius of 40 user units LT5 CIA47 LT6 CI54 Draw the outer two circles the first with a line type of 5 and a radius of 47 user units the second with a
58. commands allow you to set whether you want to draw using absolute or relative pen moves Absolute pen movement uses X Y coordinates to specify an exact fixed point relative to the origin 0 0 In Figure 17 9 the coordinates 3 8 5 4 and 8 1 are always in the same place with respect to the origin no matter where the pen is when the coordinates are issued Figure 17 9 Absolute Coordinates Relative pen movement uses X Y increments to specify the number of units the pen moves from its current pen location All commands that use relative increments include relative in their name except the PE command An example is the Edge Rectangle Relative ER command In Figure 17 10 for example assume that the pen is currently at the origin 0 0 To move to the absolute points shown in Figure 17 9 using relative coordinates count 3 units to the right and 8 units up from the current pen location these are both positive directions with respect to the origin This is the relative location 3 8 Now move 5 positive X units and 7 negative Y units from this location to the lower point this is the relative location 5 7 From this location move to the last point by moving 3 negative X units and 3 positive Y units 3 3 Absolute and Relative Pen Movement 17 25 Note Starting pen location X axis Figure 17 10Relative Coordinates Relative movement is useful in many applications where you know the dimensions of
59. complete subpolygon The printer automatically closes the first polygon if any before starting the circle and uses the first coordinates if any after the circle is drawn to start a new subpolygon If you did not close your first polygon completely before sending the Cl command the printer automatically closes the polygon by adding a point at the starting point of the previous subpolygon This can change your current pen location and the placement of the circle in your polygon resulting in an inaccurate polygon Approximating Polygon Buffer Use You can use the following formula to estimate how much buffer space a polygon consumes Each point in a polygon uses 8 bytes For example the minimum number of points the printer will hold is 512 21 14 The Polygon Group EN If you multiply 512 points by 8 bytes per point the result is 4096 bytes 4 Kbytes That means the minimum your printer can store in the polygon buffer is 4 Kbytes That is the worst case however Unless the printer has a substantial amount of fonts macros or graphics already downloaded into user memory you can put much more into the polygon buffer As we just calculated for every 4 Kbytes of extra unused user memory the polygon buffer can store 512 more points You can see how in most cases there is little chance of a polygon buffer overflow especially with the addition of optional printer memory The following formula explains how to calculate the buffer sp
60. coordinates is specified in other words an X coordinate without a corresponding Y coordinate the printer ignores the last unmatched coordinate Table 20 30 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative SM Symbol Mode The Vector Group Line and Fill Attributes Group U Pen Up 20 47 RT Relative Arc Three Point This command draws an arc segment using relative coordinates from a starting point through an intermediate point to an end point Use RT when you know these three points of an arc RT XVincr inter Yincr inter X incr ena Yincr ena chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default Xincr inten Yiner inter current units 230 to 230 4 no default Xincr end Yiner end Current units 230 to 230 1 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5 The RT command uses the current pen location and two specified points to calculate a circle and draw the appropriate arc segment of its circumference The arc starts at the current pen location using the current pen line type line attributes and pen up down status You specify the intermediate and end points After drawing the arc the pen location remains at the end of the arc Xincr Inter YIncr Inter Specify the location of an intermediate point of the arc in relative increments relative to the current pen location The arc is drawn in a negati
61. current 2 to 230 1 no units default The anchor corner is the point at which any fill pattern starts Setting the anchor corner guarantees that a corner point of the selected fill pattern is at the specified coordinate aligned vertically and horizontally e No Parameters Defaults the anchor corner to the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame relative to the current coordinate system Equivalent to ACO 0 e X Y Coordinates The coordinate position defines the position of the starting point for any fill pattern The following example prints three adjacent squares with fill patterns anchored at the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame The fill pattern is continuous across each of the squares In the set of squares below that each square has an anchor corner set in its own lower left corner Notice how this helps distinguish between the adjacent figures Table 22 3 Example Changing the Anchor Corner E Reset the printer 2 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode 22 6 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN Table 22 3 Example Changing the Anchor Corner continued RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing PA3000 3000 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 3000 3000 FT3 400 45 Specify fill type number 3 parallel lines with each line 400 plu apart and set
62. due to leftover command parameters from a previous job From within HP GL 2 mode there are two ways to establish default conditions using the Initialize IN command or using the Default DF command Using the IN command sets the printer to its user selected defaults This process is called initialization The reset command CE executes an Initialize IN command automatically so if a reset was sent at the beginning of your print job HP GL 2 command parameters are at their user selected default state when HP GL 2 mode is first entered See Chapter 3 for a more thorough discussion of the printer environment and how it is affected by the reset command HP GL 2 command parameters are set to their default values the first time HP GL 2 mode is entered during a print job assuming that an EGE reset is sent at the beginning of the job After commands have been sent to modify the current print environment the command parameters are no longer set to their defaults When re entering HP GL 2 mode immediately sending an IN command ensures that HP GL 2 features are set to their default conditions if that is desired The DF command is not as powerful as the IN command The conditions set by the DF and IN commands are described later in this chapter Establishing Default Conditions 19 3 The Scaling Points P1 and P2 When you scale a drawing you define your own units of measure ment which the printer then converts to plotter units Sca
63. eliminates the need to set every feature each time a job is run Table 24 1 Structure of a Typical Job E So 2345X UEL Command exit language EE Printer Reset Command Preamble Job Control Commands Page 1 Page Control Commands Data Page n Page Control Commands Data ECE Printer Reset Command E So 2345X UEL Command exit language 1 If a number of consecutive pages within a job have the same format such as margins VMI HMI etc the associated page control commands only need to be sent once for that group of pages The UEL Command Ec 12345X has the same effect as the EE command and also enters PJL Mode of operation for printers that support PJL The EE command should be included to ensure backward compatibility the UEL command is ignored if received by a printer that does not support PJL Do not perform a printer reset within a job Job Control 24 3 PCL Page Control 1 Paper Source The primary use for the paper source command is to allow access to locked out Secured paper trays Page Size This command specifies the exact size of the page media to be used Text Area Margins Avoid setting the top margin or text length to values outside of the printable area This may cause data loss Top Margin and Text Length commands use the current line spacing the last VMI or Ipi commands Specifying the text length establishes the bottom margin When
64. ends and joins are shaped LT Line Type Selects the line pattern to use for drawing lines PW Pen Width Specifies a new pen width RF Raster Fill Definition Defines a pattern for use as area fill SM Symbol Mode Draws a symbol at each coordinate location SP Select Pen Selects a pen for plotting Introduction 22 1 Table 22 1 The Line and Fill Attribute Commands SV Screened Vectors Selects the type of area fill to be applied to vectors lines cross hatch lines arcs circles edges of polygons rectangles and wedges TR Transparency Mode Defines how the white areas of the source graphics image affect the destination graphics image UL User Defined Line Type Defines a line pattern WU Pen Width Unit Selection Specifies whether the pen width is defined in millimeters or as a percentage of the P1 P2 distance Using Line Attributes and Types You can change the appearance of the lines you draw by using the Line Attribute LA and Line Type LT commands The Line Attribute command lets you specify whether the ends of lines and corners of joined lines should appear as square triangular round or beveled Square Round ends ends EN Beveled join Round join Figure 22 1 Line Ends Attribute Line types are repeated patterns of dots and or dashes including solid lines The following shows some examples of line types Note that you can also vary the width of the li
65. factor 18 2 selecting fonts 23 17 23 68 state variables 5 5 syntax 17 6 terminating labels 23 11 units of measure 17 20 using fonts 23 15 varying text line spacing 23 8 vector fill 22 39 vector graphics Glossary 15 vector graphics on PCL logical page 2 6 Vector Group 17 4 20 1 Vector Group commands summary 20 1 when to use HP GL 2 17 1 HT horizontal tab 6 9 l I O Glossary 6 buffer Glossary 6 status response 16 1 throughput 24 11 ID code symbol set 10 2 10 6 ID command Font 8 26 ID number 9 2 font selection 8 26 macro 12 3 12 6 ROM based macros 12 8 user defined pattern 13 16 IF Intellifont Face Data 11 42 Image area HP GL 2 18 2 image raster 15 1 importing images HP GL 2 17 25 initialization 19 3 Initialize IN command 17 10 19 3 19 15 19 21 Input P1 and P2 IP command 19 23 19 36 Input Window IW command 17 19 19 29 Inquire Status Readback Entity command 16 10 integer 17 10 Intellifont coordinate system 11 4 font header 11 10 11 11 global data size 11 35 scalable character descriptor 11 60 Intellifont manual x interface connector Glossary 6 interface throughput 24 11 internal fonts 7 2 7 11 Glossary 7 status readback 16 8 internal unit 2 5 invalid entity status readback error 16 19 invalid location status readback error 16 19 IP command 19 23 19 36 IR command 19 26 ISO symbol sets 8 8 isotropic scaling 19 4 19 41 19 42 italic style 7 6 IW command 19 29 J job control commands
66. font point size 5 Posture upright upright 23 18 The Character Group EN Note Note EN Table 23 6 continued 6 Stroke Weight 0 medium 7 Typeface 48 Stick fixed vector e Value Defines the properties of the characteristic specified by the kind parameter When selecting fonts the different characteristics symbol set spacing pitch etc are prioritized as shown in the table above with symbol set being the highest priority and typeface being the lowest The font selection priority is the same for HP GL 2 as for PCL font selection For more information about the priority of font characteristics see the Font Selection by Characteristic discussion in Chapter 8 To avoid duplication of many pages of tables the tables listing the kind parameters symbol set spacing typeface etc are located with the description of the SD Standard Font Description command The following example shows the command used to designate a 30 point CG Times Bold Italic font in the ASCII symbol set use the Select Alternate Font SA command to select this font after it is designated AD 1 21 2 1 4 30 9 PI Pp Vp Symbol Font Height Posture Stroke Typeface Set Spacing Weight Note that the pitch parameter is missing in the above command because the designated font is proportionally spaced Table 23 7 Related Commands Group Fl Select Primary Font The Character Group FN Se
67. have exactly the same effect The advantage of using the DR command is that as the locations of P1 and P2 change the slope of the baseline changes to match the stretching or compressing of the P1 P2 rectangle For example if the relative direction is set so that rise run the slope of the baseline is 45 as long as the P1 P2 rectangle is square If the P1 P2 rectangle stretches so that it is twice as high as it is wide the slope of the baseline remains parallel to an imaginary line running from P1 to P2 see illustration below EN DR Relative Direction 23 39 Figure 23 23 Effects of Scaling on Label Direction Labels begin at the current pen location and thus are drawn parallel to the directional line not necessarily on it Also negative parameters have the same effect on direction as described for the DI command At least one parameter must not be zero The ratio of the parameters to each other is more important than the actual numbers The table below lists three common label angles produced by using ones and zeros Table 23 19 DR Command Label Direction DR 1 0 horizontal DR 0 1 vertical DR 1 1 or DI 0 7 0 7 diagonal from P1 to P2 any parameters equal to each other The relative size and sign of the two parameters determine the amount of rotation If you imagine the current pen location to be the origin of a coordinate system for the label you can see that the signs of the parameters determine in wh
68. ignored until a command is received which specifies an absolute move to a point within the internally representable number range HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 11 Notes When LOST mode is entered the pen is raised and the following commands are ignored AA AR AT Cl CP EA ER EW LB PE PM PR RA RR RT and WG The commands allowed in LOST mode are AC AD CF CO DF DI DR DT DV ES FT IN IP IR IW LA LO LT PA PD PG PU PW RF RO RP SA SB SC SD SI SL SM SP SR SS TD UL WU and the PM1 PM2 forms of PM The commands IN PG RP and PA with in range parameters clear LOST mode PD and PU in absolute plotting mode with in range parameters also clear LOST mode When PD clears LOST mode a line is drawn from the last valid current position to the first point in the PD parameter sequence If PA clears LOST mode the pen will not go down until a PD command is received 17 12 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Using HP GL 2 With Programming Languages The HP GL 2 examples included in this manual are given in a generic format they show the commands required to perform a specific function but usually do not use a specific programming language In most cases the commands are accompanied by a brief description of the command being used To see how HP GL 2 commands are used in BASIC and the C programming language see the following examples Example BASIC This example uses BASIC to
69. in Figures 2 2 and 2 3 EN EN Portrait See Orientation Print Environment The group of all the printer s current feature settings collectively is referred to as the print environment The printer identifies four levels of changes of this print environment the factory default environment the user default environment the modified print environment and the overlay environment Printer Commands See PCL Commands and HP GL 2 Printing Menu Identifies a few printer features which can be selected from the printers Operator Control Panel Menu key Print menu features select the user default items which are included in the print environment features which can be selected with printer commands Raster Graphics Images composed of groups of dots are raster images Pictures in newspapers or on televisions are examples of raster images PCL includes commands for printing raster images Reset Resets are used to return the printer to a known environment Depending on the type of reset performed the printer returns to either the User Default Environment or the Factory Default Environment A Printer Reset restores the User Default Environment and deletes temporary fonts macros user defined symbol sets and patterns A Printer Reset is performed by sending the E command or through the printer s control panel see the printer User s Manual Glossary 11 Glossary 12 Resolution The high quality output achieved
70. is ejected using one of the above commands the PCL cursor position is set to the top of form on the new page The Top of Form is 3 4 of a line below the top margin An alternative method of ejecting a page from PCL is the Form Feed control code A Form Feed causes an unconditional page eject and advances the current active cursor position to the top of form on the next page The horizontal cursor position remains the same as before the page eject The HP GL 2 pen position is not affected by a Form Feed it occupies the same position on the next page PG Advance Full Page 19 33 RO Rotate Coordinate System This command rotates the printer s coordinate system relative to the default HP GL 2 coordinate system in the following increments of rotation 90 180 and 270 Use RO to orient your drawing vertically or horizontally or to reverse the orientation RO angle or RO Parameter angle Format clamped integer Functional Range Default 0 90 180 or 270 0 The printer interprets the command parameters as follows e No Parameter Defaults the orientation of the coordinate system to 0 Equivalent to HOO This is the same as PCL s current orientation e Angle Specifies the degree of rotation 0 Sets the orientation to PCL s current orientation 90 Rotates and shifts the coordinate system 90 degrees ina positive angle of rotation from PCLs current orien
71. job and eject the page SR Relative Character Size 23 83 RELATIVE LABEL SIZE 0 2700 NEW Pi AND P2 CHANGE LABEL SIZE 0 2000 NEW SR INSTRUCTION CHANGES LABEL SIZE 0 1000 Figure 23 40 Table 23 52 Related Commands Group CP Character Plot SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 SI Absolute Character Size The Character Group 23 84 The Character Group EN SS Select Standard Font This command selects the standard font already designated by the Standard Font Definition SD command for subsequent labeling Use the SS command to shift from the currently selected alternate font to the designated standard font SS The SS command tells the printer to print subsequent labeling commands using characters from the standard symbol set designated by the SD command The SS command is equivalent to using the Shift In control character SI ASCII decimal code 15 within a label string The default designated standard font is the Stick font and uses symbol set 277 Roman 8 This font is in effect when the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The SS command remains in effect until an SA command is executed Table 23 53 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group DT Define Label Terminator Fl Select Primary Font FN Select Se
72. line type of 6 and a radius of 54 user units E A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 28 The Vector Group EN EN Current pen location starting point 4200 2900 Figure 20 17 Table 20 18 bm QU E 4600 2500 Related Commands Group EW Edge Wedge WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group SC Scale The Configuration Status Group AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point RT Relative Arc Three Point The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group CI Circle 20 29 PA Plot Absolute This command establishes absolute plotting and moves the pen to the specified absolute coordinates from the current pen position Note PA X Y or PA Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates currentunits 290 to 290 1 no default The printer interprets the parameters as follows No Parameters Establishes absolute plotting for subsequent commands X Y Coordinates Specify the absolute location to which the pen moves When you include more than one coordinate pair the pen moves to each point in the order given using the current pen up down status If the pen is up PA moves the pen to the point if the pen is down PA draws a line to the point Lines are drawn using the curre
73. name user designated ASC 16 11 33 font number font header 11 32 font selection 8 1 by characteristic 8 1 23 68 24 5 by ID 8 26 24 6 escape sequence 8 21 example 8 21 8 22 final 9 11 font select table 8 1 HP GL 2 8 27 23 17 priority 8 2 8 3 8 24 23 19 short method 8 5 specifying 24 5 summary 8 23 unbound fonts 9 8 Form Feed FF 6 13 19 33 19 39 Format 0 font header bitmap 11 7 Format 10 font header Intellifont bound 11 10 Format 11 font header Intellifont unbound 11 11 Format 15 font header TrueType scalable 11 13 Format 20 font header resolution specified bitmap 11 8 format field character descriptor 11 52 character descriptor bitmap 11 52 character descriptor scalable 11 62 TrueType character descriptor 11 67 user defined pattern descriptor 13 17 user defined symbol set 10 6 FP command 21 12 21 31 example 21 32 EN EN Free Space command status readback 16 21 FT command 22 9 G gaps in user defined line types 22 44 GI Global Intellifont Data 11 35 11 41 global italic angle font header 11 35 glyph ID TrueType 11 69 glyphs TrueType downloading 11 49 graphic patterns 13 8 14 5 graphics cross hatch patterns 14 1 14 8 errors 24 15 limits HP GL 2 17 19 19 12 patterns 14 1 raster 15 1 resolution 14 2 shading 14 1 14 6 special effects 13 1 transparency mode 13 1 user defined patterns 13 13 vector Glossary 15 group character PCL command
74. negative start angle positions the radius in a negative direction from the zero degree reference point If you specify a start angle greater than 360 a start angle equal to the remainder of the start angle 360 is used 21 46 The Polygon Group EN e Sweep Angle Specifies in degrees the angle through which the arc is drawn A positive angle draws the angle in the positive direction angle of rotation X axis to the Y axis a negative angle draws the angle in the negative direction X axis to the Y axis Note the relation of the X axis to the Y axis Y axis can change as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes If a sweep angle greater than 360 degrees is specified a 360 degree angle is used e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to define the arc The default is 5 degrees Refer to the Chord Angle discussion in the Arc Absolute AA command discussion Chapter 20 for information on setting the chord angle P2 EW700 30 60 90 Positive r7 Positive start angle 30 T 0 Zero degree pa l reference point Current pen location positive radius A S starting point N j 700 plotter units M fev 270 PI 4X Positive Radius P2 EW 700 45 90 270 x Current pen location P4 M starting point Zero degree 4 N reference point Negative radius 4 700 Plotter Units Y Positive start angle 45 Positive i f
75. number of fractional binary bits contained in the coordinate data Default is zero Absolute Indicates that the next point is defined by absolute coordinates 7 7 bit Mode Indicates that all subsequent coordinate pair values should be interpreted in 7 bit mode Once you send a seven bit flag base 32 is used and eighth bits are ignored for the remainder of the command We recommend you always follow a pen up flag with a relative move of 0 0 This ensures that the next plotting coordinates are drawn EN PE Polyline Encoded 20 35 Note Because SP is not allowed in polygon mode if you select a pen within PE while in polygon mode the Select Pen command is ignored e Value Specifies data according to the preceding flag For example a value following a select pen flag should be a pen number Flag values are encoded in the same manner as coordinate data Instructions for encoding flag values follow the parameter descriptions e Pen Number Specifies the pen to be selected black 1 or white 0 The pen number must be encoded into a base 64 or base 32 equivalent e Number of Fractional Binary Bits Specifies the number of fractional binary bits contained in the coordinate data The number of fractional binary bits must be encoded into a base 64 or base 32 equivalent see the explanation on the next page Table 20 23 Value Format Range pen number integer 0 to 1 number of fractional
76. of 3 5 the printer determines the actual character size as follows width 2 100 x 6956 6956 278 24 plu or 0 695 cm height 3 5 100 x 4388 4388 307 16 plu or 0 768 cm If you changed P1 and P2 settings to 100 100 and 5000 5000 but did not change the SR parameters the character size would change as follows width 2 100 x 5000 100 98 plu or 0 245 cm height 3 5 100 x 5000 100 171 5 plu or 0 429 cm Note that in most languages the width of a letter is typically less than the height If you set your characters to have a different aspect ratio they may look odd to your readers Note Either negative SR parameters or switching the relative position of P1 and P2 produces mirror images of labels When P1 is in the lower left and P2 is in the upper right the SR command gives the same mirroring results as the SI command However if you move P1 to the right of P2 characters are mirrored right to left when you move P1 above P2 characters are mirrored top to bottom When both of these situations occur using negative parameters in the SR command with an unusual P1 P2 position double mirroring may result in either direction in which case the two inversions cancel and lettering appears normal An SR command remains in effect until another SR command is executed an SI command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions 23 82 The Character G
77. on default values if they are omitted When you omit a parameter you must omit all subsequent parameters in the same command the Define Label Terminator DT command is an exception For example the Line Type LT command has three optional parameters type pattern length and mode The following command shows all three being used type 6 pattern length 25 mode 1 LT6 25 1 HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 9 If you omit the second parameter you must also omit the third parameter as shown below LT6 The printer uses the most recently specified pattern length and mode If you have not specified a length or mode since sending a Default Values DF or Initialize IN command the printer uses the parameter s defaults For example if you send the following command omitting the second parameter the printer interprets the 1 as the second parameter LT6 1 Parameter Formats You must give parameters in the format type of units required by each HP GL 2 command The required format is stated in the parameter table of each command s description and is described as follows 1 Integer An integer from 1 073 741 823 290 1 to 1 073 741 823 290 1 The printer automatically rounds fractional parameters to the nearest integer within the range Sending a number outside the parameter range may produce unexpected results 2 Clamped Integer An integer from 32 768 215 to 32 767 215 1 The prin
78. operation is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored The only difference between the WG command and the EW Edge Wedge command is that the WG command produces a filled wedge and the EW an outlined one Always use isotropic scaling in any drawing that contains wedges to avoid drawing an elliptical wedge Refer to the discussion of scaling in Chapter 17 for more information Anisotropic Isotropic scaling scaling Figure 21 26 Fill Wedge with Scaling e Radius Specifies the distance from the current pen location to the start of the wedge s arc Since the wedge is a portion of a circle this parameter is the radius of the circle It specifies the distance from the current pen location which becomes the center of the circle to any point on the circumference of the circle The radius is interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off The sign of the radius or determines the location of the zero degree reference point The illustration following the parameter descriptions shows the location of the zero degree reference point for a positive and negative radius e Start Angle Specifies the beginning point of the arc as the number of degrees from the zero degree reference point A positive start angle positions the radius in the positive direction the direction from the X axis toward the Y axis from the zero degree reference point a
79. pitch characteristic is not changed Notes This command does not select the font for label printing if you are currently using the alternate font The Fl and FN commands implicitly change the value of SB For example if SB 0 and FI selects a bitmap font SB is set to 1 This affects the performance of certain HP GL 2 commands Refer to SB command later in this chapter Example Using the Fl Command The following example demonstrates assigning a font ID number from within PCL mode entering HP GL 2 mode using the Fl command to select that font and printing a short line of text 23 54 The Character Group EN EN Table 23 28 Example Using the FI Command EGE Reset the printer Fe c1 5D Specify a font ID number of 15 Fe s1 p18v0s3b4148T Select an 18 point Univers Bold font as the primary font Fe c6F Assign the currently selected font as a temporary font with the current ID number 15 Fe960B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 1500 Move to location 1500 1500 Printers CR LF DT Define as a label terminator non printing LBLaserJet Print LaserJet Printers in the currently selected font which is the default Stick font Carriage Return Line Feed Note label text should not contain carriage returns or any control codes unle
80. point Lines are drawn using the current line width type and attributes When you use the symbol mode SM command PR draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you use the polygon mode PM command the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer and are used when the polygon is edged or filled Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off 20 44 The Vector Group EN Table 20 28 Example Using the PR Command EOE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing PA10 10 PD Move to absolute position 10 10 and put the pen down PR2500 0 2500 Specify relative plotting and draw lines 1500 0 1500 beginning at 10 10 and then moving the relative coordinate distances indicated E A Enter the PCL mode ESE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 2500 1500 Start 5 4500 10 10 2500 0 Figure 20 20 Note If an odd number of coordinates is specified an X coordinate without a corresponding Y coordinate the printer ignores the last unmatched coordinate EN PR Plot Relative 20 45 Table 20 29 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width
81. polygon or subpolygon and remain in polygon mode the printer adds a closure point if necessary When you use PMf1 the point after PM1 becomes the first point of the next subpolygon This move is not used as a boundary when filling a polygon with FP When drawing the polygon the pen always moves to this point in the up position regardless of the current pen status Each subsequent coordinate pair after PM defines a point of the subpolygon 21 36 The Polygon Group EN EN PM2 Use PM2 to close the current polygon or subpolygon and exit polygon mode Remember if you have not closed your polygon executing PM2 adds a point to close the polygon Refer to Pen Status and Location in Chapter 17 Introduction to HP GL 2 Graphics The following example draws the surface area of a 3 prong electrical receptacle as a series of subpolygons then fills and edges it using the FP and EP commands respectively Table 21 20 Example Using the PM Command E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA2000 2000 Specify absolute plotting and move to 2000 2000 PMO PD3000 2000 Enter polygon mode store a Pen Down 3000 3000 command and store locations 3000 2000 and 3000 3000 PD2000 3000 Store two more pen down locations 2000 2000 2000 3000 and 200
82. print three lines forming a simple triangle shown below 10 LPRINT CHRS 27 E REM Reset the printer 20 LPRINT CHR 27 0B REM Enter HP GL 2 Mode 30 LPRINT IN REM Initialize HP GL 2 Mode 40 LPRINT SP1PA10 10 REM Select Pen amp move to 10 10 50 LPRINT PD2500 10 10 1500 10 10 REM Pen down amp draw 60 LPRINT CHR 27 0A REM Enter PCL Mode 70 LPRINT CHR 27 E REM Reset to end job eject page Pe d M c C 6 8128 10160 10 1500 Start 10 10 2500 10 008 et pe ern ese me eroe ees Picture Frame 7 Figure 17 3 EN Using HP GL 2 With Programming Languages 17 13 Example C Programming Language This example uses the C programming language to print the same three lines shown on the previous page Table 17 6 include lt stdio h gt main FILE prn prn fopen PRN wb fprintf prn 033E fprintf prn 033 gt 0B fprintf prn IN fprintf prn SP1PA10 10 fprintf prn PD2500 10 10 1500 10 10 fprintf prn 033 0A fprintf prn 033E 17 14 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics open the printer EAE to reset printer Enter HP GL 2 Initialize HP GL 2 Mode Select pen 1 amp move to 10 10 Pen down amp draw enter PCL at previous CAP Reset to end job eject page EN
83. rectangle using absolute coordinates Use EA when drawing charts or schematic diagrams that require rectangles EA X Y Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates current units 230 to 290 4 no default The EA command defines and edges a rectangle using absolute coordinates and the current pen line type and line attributes The EA command performs an automatic pen down When the command execution is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored e X Y Coordinates Specify the opposite corner of the rectangle from the current pen location The current pen location is the starting point of the rectangle Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Note The following illustration shows the current pen location in the lower left corner and the command s X Y coordinates in the upper right corner Depending on the coordinate values the points can be in any two diagonally opposite corners EN EA Edge Rectangle Absolute 21 17 Note 2500 1500 0 0 Figure 21 12 Any line drawn along the border of the effective window causes the line to be clipped producing a line width one half of the defined pen width For example all the lines drawn in the above example are half the width of the other lines since they are clipped at the window borders The only difference between the EA command
84. same label at 2000 1 700 This label should not contain carriage returns to print as shown in the plot for this example PU3000 1300 Pen Up and move to position 3000 1300 PD4500 1300 4500 3700 Pen Down and begin drawing box indicating the soft clip window PD3000 3700 3000 1300 Finish drawing the soft clip window box PU Pen Up Fc960A Enter PCL Mode EGE Reset the printer to end the job and eject the page IW Input Window 19 31 4500 3700 THIS IS 2000 3200 Pen stops 2000 1700 here Pen programmed to draw line here P and start label 7 E 7 t Pen restarts here 3000 1300 Window established by IW Figure 19 13 Example IW command Table 19 16 Related Commands Group IP Input P1 and P2 The Configuration Status Group IR Input Relative P1 and P2 RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale 19 32 The Configuration and Status Group EN PG Advance Full Page Note EN This HP GL 2 command is ignored by the printer since it could cause undesirable results when importing plots A page eject can be accomplished only from the PCL printer language mode The following PCL commands cause a conditional page eject meaning that a page is ejected if there is any printable data in the print buffer e CE Reset e UEL Universal Exit Language e Flush All Pages Page Length Page Size Orientation e Paper Source When a page
85. standard 2 Mbytes memory Refer to the appropriate Users Manual for specific memory requirements The Page Protection feature can be used to prevent possible ERROR 21 conditions ERROR 21 is reported when data is too complex for the printer to process concurrent with actual physical printing A frequent cause of ERROR 21 when printing graphics is that the program sends commands to print a single point many times during the page run Page protection can be set for letter A4 or legal sized pages Set page protection for the page size most often used l O The Parallel Centronics I O has higher throughput than the RS 232C serial I O While text processing may not benefit from a faster I O raster graphics processing and soft font downloads will usually benefit from increased I O throughput Performance 24 11 Troubleshooting Commands End of Line Wrap The End of Line Wrap command defines the action that occurs when a line of text reaches the right margin Ec amp s C it 0 Enables End of Line Wrap 1 Disables End of Line Wrap When end of line wrap is enabled a character or space that moves the cursor to the right of the right margin executes a CR LF prior to the printing of the character or space When end of line wrap is disabled a character or space that would move the cursor to the right of the right margin may be clipped refer to Chapter 2 When a character is clipped the cursor is set to the right margin The p
86. start angle of 90 and a sweep angle of 180 FT1 0 0 WG600 270 60 Specify a fill type of solid black and fill a wedge using the same center and radius as the previous wedge Start the wedge at 270 with a sweep of 60 FT4 60 45 WG600 330 120 Specify fill type number 4 cross hatching with 60 plu between lines and the lines tilted at 45 Filla wedge using the same center and radius as the previous two wedges Start the wedge at 330 with a sweep of 120 PA3500 2500 WG400 0 360 Select absolute plotting and move to 3500 2500 Create a filled circle using the current fill type cross hatching specifying a start angle of 0 and a 360 sweep PA4500 2500 FT Move to 4500 2500 select a solid WG400 0 360 fill and fill a 360 wedge circle 950A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page EN Drawing Wedges 21 9 1400 2500 006050606 9 9 9 9 BSS Figure 21 6 Drawing Polygons A polygon consists of one or more closed sequences of connected line segments which may cross each other Drawing polygons requires the use of the polygon mode The Polygon Mode PM command tells the printer to store subsequent commands and coordinates in the polygon buffer before printing the shape Rectangles and wedges are polygons which have their own drawing commands the printer automatically generates and stores the coordin
87. symbol in the index is identified by a unique Unicode number Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide contains the Unicode symbol index EN EN Unit of Measure The number of units per inch used in PCL cursor moves is deter mined by the current setting of the Unit of Measure command The current unit of measure setting affects all PCL Unit moves horizontal and vertical rectangle size bitmap and scalable font metrics how the cursor moves after printing a character See Unit of Measure Command in Chapter 4 User Default A default selectable through the printer s control panel For example user defaults may be selected for number of copies manual feed mode fonts and vertical form length VMI User Default Environment The User Default Environment consists of the user default settings any user default settings selected from the control panel with the remainder of the environment features set to the factory default values User Defined Pattern In addition to the eight shading patterns and six cross hatch patterns users can design their own patterns area fill These user defined patterns are downloaded to the printer and used in subsequent area fills See User Defined Pattern Graphics in Chapter 13 User Defined Symbol Sets User defined symbol sets are supported in some HP LaserJet printers Symbols are user selected from a Symbol Index such as Unicode or MSL To specify a user defined symbol set u
88. techniques available with the raster picture area Set resolution prior to the start raster graphics command Once the start raster command is received the resolution cannot be set until after a subsequent end raster graphics command Set presentation mode prior to the Start Raster Graphics command Once the start raster command is received the presentation mode cannot be set until after a subsequent End Raster Graphics Command Some applications and I O drivers insert carriage returns or line feeds into the data stream sent to the printer This modification of the data stream must be suppressed for correct printer operation The most efficient way to draw lines horizontal and vertical is using graphics rules black fill rectangular areas The most efficient way to draw diagonal lines is using HP GL 2 vector graphics PCL Raster Graphics 24 7 Macros When a macro ID is specified for which no macro has been defined the macro invocation macro deletion and make macro permanent or temporary commands are ignored The macro enabled for auto macro overlay is executed on each page until the macro is disabled or deleted a reset occurs Eck UEL or control panel or the page length page size or orientation is changed When the modified print environment is restored upon exiting a called or overlaid macro if the page length page size or the orientation has changed or the primary or secondary font has been deleted the
89. the current pen location using the current pen line type line attributes and pen up down status You specify the intermediate and end points After drawing the arc the pen location remains at the end of the arc XinterY inter Specify the absolute location of an intermediate point of the arc The arc is drawn in a positive or negative angle of rotation as necessary so that it passes through the inter mediate point before the end point Xgna YEna Specify the absolute location of the end point of the arc e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 The Arc Absolute AA command description earlier in this chapter contains more information on chords and chord angles Intermediate and end point coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If current scaling is not isotropic the arc drawn is elliptical rather than circular Note the following about locating the intermediate and end points e If the intermediate point and end point are the same as the current pen location the command draws a dot e If the intermediate point is the same as either the current pen location or the end point a line is drawn between the current pen location and the end point 20 16 The Vector Group EN e If the end point is the same as the current pen location a circle is drawn with its diameter being
90. the highest priority and typeface being the lowest The font selection priority is the same for HP GL 2 as for PCL font selection For more information about the priority of font characteristics see the Font Selection by Characteristic discussion in Chapter 8 The following tables list the kind parameters with their associated values note that these tables are also valid for the AD Alternate Font Definition command Kind 1 Symbol Set The symbol set characteristic defines the set of characters to be used in the alternate font For a complete list of symbol set values refer to Appendix C of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide SD Standard Font Definition 23 69 Note Note Stick font is available only in ASCII Roman 8 and Roman Extension symbol sets Kind 2 Font Spacing The font spacing characteristic defines whether the spacing is fixed all characters occupying an equal horizontal space or proportional each character occupying a space proportional to its size Refer to Using Fonts in the beginning of this chapter Table 23 40 Kind 2 Font Spacing Values Font SpacingValue Description 0 fixed spacing default 1 proportional spacing Kind 3 Pitch The pitch characteristic is a horizontal measurement defining the number of characters per inch for fixed spaced fonts When selecting proportional fonts do not include pitch in the font definition command SD or AD Table 23 41 Kind 3
91. the shape you want but do not want to calculate the absolute coordinates For example if you want a box 4 X units by 8 Y units you can use the Edge Rectangle Relative ER command to draw the box without having to calculate the absolute coordinates of the opposite corner The ER command draws a rectangle using the current pen location as one corner and the specified relative coordinates as the opposite corner Absolute pen movement is the default mode coordinates received within a PU Pen Up or PD Pen Down command are interpreted as absolute plotter units unless a PR Plot Relative command establishes relative mode As with absolute coordinates the relative units can be either user units or plotter units depending on whether the SC command is in effect Relative increments add to the current pen location The printer automatically converts the new relative location to absolute coordinates and updates the current pen location Using relative coordinates can be faster in cases where the I O speed limits your print speed since relative coordinates are generally smaller numbers and therefore transmit less data over the I O 17 26 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN EN The Picture Frame Introduction When importing an existing HP GL 2 file or creating an HP GL 2 image within an application you use several PCL commands to set up the picture frame size choose the picture frame location and enter and exit HP GL 2 mod
92. this chapter For more information on spaces lines and the character cell refer to Working with the Character Cell earlier in this chapter e No Parameters Performs a Carriage Return and Line Feed moves one line down and returns to the Carriage Return point e Spaces Specifies the number of spaces the pen moves relative to the current pen location Positive values specify the number of spaces the pen moves to the right of the current pen position negative values specify the number of spaces the pen moves to the left Right and left are relative to current label direction The space width is uniquely defined for each font use the ES command to adjust the width Note If you are using a proportionally spaced font the width of the Space control code is used 23 24 The Character Group EN EN e Lines Specifies the number of lines the pen moves relative to the current pen location Positive values specify the number of lines the pen moves up from the current pen position negative values specify the number of lines the pen moves down a value of 1 is equivalent to a Line Feed Up and down are relative to the current label direction The Line Feed distance is uniquely defined for each font use the Extra Space ES command to adjust the height When you move the pen up or down a specific number of lines the Carriage Return point shifts up or down accordingly The illustration below shows the interaction of l
93. to default conditions The following example draws a label then establishes a window and again draws the label along with a line Notice how the line and label are clipped after the window is established but not before Table 19 15 Example The IW Command EGE Reset the printer Fe961B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode 19 30 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN Table 19 15 Example The IW Command continued SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SI 2 35 Set Absolute Character Size to 2 x 35 cm PA2000 3200 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 2000 3200 plotter units DT 1 Define label terminator to be the character without printing the character LBTHIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF IW Print a label beginning at 2000 3200 The label on the left is shown on two lines with a Carriage Return in the middle of the text for convenience in this example In an actual command sequence this label text should be all on one line to print as shown in the plot at the end of this example IW3000 1300 4500 3700 Specify a soft clip window in plotter units PD2000 1700 Pen Down print a line from the current pen position to 2000 1700 Current pen position at start of command is at the letter W baseline LBTHIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF IW Print the
94. used as a symbol in any symbol set Use it only to cancel symbol mode e g SM The SM command draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate point for subsequent PA PD PE PR and PU commands The SM command includes an automatic pen down after the symbol is drawn the pen position and any dashed line residue are restored e No Parameter Terminates symbol mode e Character Draws the specified character centered at each subsequent X Y coordinate The symbol is drawn in addition to the usual function of each HP GL 2 command The character is drawn in the font selected at the time the vectors are drawn If you change to a new symbol set the character changes to the corresponding character from the new symbol set The size SI and SR slant SL and direction DI and DR commands affect how the character is drawn Specifying a non printing character cancels symbol mode An SM command remains in effect until another SM command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions EN SM Symbol Mode 22 35 Note The following example shows several uses of symbol mode with the pen down for a line graph with the pen up for a scattergram and with the pen down for geometric drawings Symbol mode works only with the PA PD PE PR and PU commands Notice that the circle and rectangle have symbols only for the PA command coordinate point Table 22 18 Example Using the Symbol Mode Command
95. user units The Scale command does not change the locations of P1 and P2 only their coordinate values Also scaling is not limited to the rectangular area defined by P1 and P2 but extends across the entire printing area within the PCL Picture Frame 19 4 The Configuration and Status Group EN For example to divide the X axis into 12 units and the Y axis into 10 units specify the X axis to scale from 0 to 12 and the Y axis to scale from 0 to 10 P1 becomes the origin with user unit coordinate 0 0 and P2 becomes 12 10 The entire plotting area is now divided into the desired units Subsequent plotting commands use these units see Figure 19 1 If you command the printer to move to the point 3 4 the printer moves to the location equivalent to 3 4 user units not 3 4 plotter units 12 10 P2 8 PCL Picture Frame 6 VA Physical Page C0 12 0 10 IP or IP0 0 8128 10160 2 4 6 8 10 12 Figure 19 1 User Unit Scaling with Default P1 and P2 If you move the locations of P1 and P2 the size of the user units changes Assume that the previous illustration showed P1 and P2 in their default locations the lower left and upper right corners respectively of the PCL Picture Frame In Figure 19 2 P1 and P2 have the same user unit values set with the Scale command SC but their physical locations have been changed using Input P1 and P2 IP Note that the size of the user units decreased Usin
96. using both the Top Margin and Text Length commands send the Top Margin command before the Text Length command To address the entire logical page set the top margin to 0 set perforation skip mode OFF and position the cursor to the desired location The user default VMI is selectable from the control panel printing menu using the FORM menu item refer to the printer User s Manual HMI When a font is selected HMI is set automatically to correspond to the pitch of the selected font if fixed pitch or the recommended default word space if proportional Therefore when using a non standard HMI value the value must be re specified following each font selection 24 4 Programming Hints EN PCL Cursor Positioning Fonts EN Horizontal decipoint dot and column positioning ignores margins and therefore can be used to move the cursor anywhere along the present line When performing cursor positioning with decipoints PCL Units or rows and columns do not use margins Margins are intended for print and space i e CR LF FF applications Vertical decipoint dot and row positioning allows the cursor to be moved into the perforation region The top margin is the reference point for absolute vertical positioning The left edge of the logical page is the reference point for absolute horizontal positioning The current active position CAP is the reference point for relative vertical and horizontal positioning Refer
97. when scaling is off The sign positive or negative of the radius determines the location of the zero degree reference point The illustration following the parameter descriptions shows the location of the zero degree reference point for a positive and a negative radius e Sweep Angle Specifies the number of degrees through which the arc is drawn A positive sweep angle is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis a negative sweep angle is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis However the relative position of the X axis to the Y axis can change as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of the sweep angle Also if you specify a start angle greater than 360 a start angle equal to the remainder of the start angle 360 is used e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 degrees Refer to the Arc Absolute AA command discussion in Chapter 20 for further information on chords and chord angles 21 28 The Polygon Group EN EN EW700 30 60 P Positive J Sweep angle 60 7 f P Positive start angle 30 18054 T T o Zero degree j tence point Current pen location positive radius staring point Ex Jl T0 plotter unis M p T 270 Pi Positive Radius EW 700 45 90 270 po Current pen location 4 starting point Zero degree f 1 ius 700 Plotter Units Ei Positive start
98. with the least significant digit The most significant digit is used to terminate the number and is encoded into a different ASCII character range than the low order digits Each number in a coordinate pair is represented as zero or more non terminator characters followed by a terminator character A character is a non terminator or terminator depending on the range it is in refer to the following table For example in base 64 there are 64 non terminator and 64 terminator characters Either kind represents a digit 20 38 The Vector Group EN Table 20 25 Terminator and non terminator characters Range Type Non terminator Terminator 8 bit Range base 64 63 126 191 254 7 bit Range base 32 63 94 95 126 Note Values following the fractional data or select pen flag also must be encoded while n amp geq base output CHR 63 n MOD base n n DIV base end if base 64 then n 191 n if base 32 then n 95 n output CHRS n Table 20 26 Procedure for determining base range STEPS EXAMPLE Base 64 Encode all the low order 21 050 amp div 4096 5 digits into the ASCII range 63 to remainder 570 126 For a digit with value i use T ASCII character CHR F 2 BN BS G remainder CHR 63 i Encode the highest order digit or the single digit ina 5 4096ths place one digit number into the range E 191 to 254 Bets Piste Low order digit 1 s place 63 126 63 58 121 CHR 121 EN PE Polylin
99. 0 2800 Set the pen width to 5 mm lift the pen and move to 2300 2900 Set the pen down and draw a line to 3300 3200 and then another line to 4500 2800 PW 25 PU4500 1800 PD3500 2100 Set the pen width to 25 mm lift the pen and move to 4500 1800 Set the pen down and print a line to 3500 2100 22 30 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN Table 22 14 Example Using the PW Command continued 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 2300 2900 8500 2500 i Figure 22 19 Table 22 15 Related Commands Group SP Select Pen SV Screened Vectors WU Pen Width Unit Selection The Line and Fill Attributes Group PW Pen Width 22 31 RF Raster Fill Definition This command defines a rectangular pattern that may be used as area fill and for screened vectors see the SV command Use RF to create your own fill types and screen patterns RF index width height pen numberf pen number or RF index or RF Functional Parameter Format Range Default index clamped 1to8 1 solid integer width clamped 1 to 255 integer height clamped 1 to 255 integer pen integer 0 or 1 number The RF command does not select a fill type use the Fill Type FT command with a type parameter of 11 and the corresponding raster fill index number for the second parameter for example
100. 0 to 10 0 to 10 15 to 0 15 to 0 0 then Pen Up FC960A Enter PCL Mode ERE Reset the printer to complete the job and eject the page Using Scaling Effectively 19 11 Original P2 New P2 10 15 user units 10 15 user units Original P1 New P1 0 0 user units 0 0 user units Figure 19 5 Drawing equal size pictures on a page Note The P1 P2 frames are not windows or graphics limits the pen can print HP GL 2 images anywhere within the PCL Picture Frame Note that the new P1 and P2 retain their scaled values This allows you to use the same coordinates on both halves of the page In contrast if you do not assign a scale to P1 and P2 you must calculate the new plotter unit coordinates for the drawing on the second half of the page Creating Mirror Images For most drawings you will probably set P1 and P2 so that P1 is in the lower left corner and P2 is in the upper right corner of the scaling area However you can change the relationship of P1 and P2 to produce a mirror image effect You can mirror image any scaled drawing those drawings using the SC command by changing the relative locations of P1 and P2 or changing the coordinate system by using SC You can mirror image labels using the Absolute Direction and Relative Direction DI and DR commands the Relative Character Size SR command or using the Absolute Character Size SI command The DI DR and SR commands are discu
101. 0 user units down PD 30 0 0 5 With the pen down move 30 user units to the left and 5 units down PU 20 0 ER40 25 Lift the pen and move 20 user units to the left then draw the outline of a rectangle with the current pen location as one corner and a point 40 25 user units away as the opposite corner PU50 5 PD30 0 0 5 Lift the pen and move 50 user units to the right and 5 units up Place the pen down and draw a line 30 user units to the right then 5 units down PU20 0 ER 40 25 Lift the pen and move 20 user units to the right Draw a rectangle from that point with the current pen location being one corner and the opposite corner being 40 user units to the left and 25 units down 960A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page ER Edge Rectangle Relative 21 25 w 75 105 40 25 Figure 21 16 Table 21 13 20 0 Related Commands Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative The Polygon Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group 21 26 The Polygon Group EN EW Edge Wedge This command outlines any wedge Use EW to draw sections of pie charts EW radius start angle sweep angle chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range
102. 0 2000 PM1 Close the first polygon PD2080 2160 2480 Store 5 pen down locations for a 2160 2480 2340 subpolygon 2080 2340 2080 2160 PM1 Close the subpolygon PD2080 2660 2480 Store pen down locations for another 2660 2480 2840 subpolygon 2080 2840 2080 2660 PM1 Close the second subpolygon PM Polygon Mode Command 21 37 Table 21 20 Example Using the PM Command continued PD2920 2340 2920 Begin a third subpolygon that draws the 2660 2720 2660 ground plug portion of the receptacle AA2720 2500 180 Store a 180 arc that goes from 2720 2660 PD2920 2340 to 2720 2500 PM2 FP EP Close the subpolygon and exit polygon mode Fill even odd then edge the polygon and subpolygons currently stored in the buffer 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 3000 3000 2000 2600 Figure 21 21 Table 21 21 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon FP Fill Polygon The Polygon Group 21 38 The Polygon Group EN RA Fill Rectangle Absolute This command defines and fills a rectangle using absolute coordinates Use RA to fill rectangular shapes in drawings To outline a rectangle using absolute coordinates use the EA command RA X Y Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates currentunits 2 to 290 1 no default The RA c
103. 0 or 1 6 parameters or less than 4 parameters ignores command for type 2 any more or less than 5 parameters ignores command Xuin Xmax OF Yvin Ymax0r number out of range ignores command Xractor 0 Or Yeactor 0 ignores command 19 46 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN The Vector Group Introduction The information in this chapter enables you to achieve the following results in your programs e Use absolute and relative coordinates when plotting e Draw lines arcs bezier curves and circles e Encode coordinates to increase your printer s throughput The following commands are described in this chapter Table 20 1 The Vector Group Commands Command Summary AA Arc Absolute Draws an arc using absolute coordinates AR Arc Relative Draws an arc using relative coordinates AT Absolute Arc Three Point Draws an arc from the current pen location through two absolute points BR Bezier Relative Draws a bezier curve using relative coordinates as control points BZ Bezier Absolute Draws a bezier curve using absolute coordinates as control points Cl Circle Draws a circle with a specified radius Introduction 20 1 Table 20 1 The Vector Group Commands continued PA Plot Absolute Enables movement to absolute coordinate locations with respect to the origin 0 0 PD Pen Down Lowers the pen to the page
104. 00 1900 Lift the pen and move to 2900 1900 then draw a line to 3100 1900 960A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 22 20 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN 4300 3000 Mitered join Round end Figure 22 16 Table 22 10 Triangular ends Related Commands Group FT Fill Type LT Line Type PW Pen Width UL User Defined Line Type AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point The Line and Fill Attributes Group The Vector Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group LA Line Attributes 22 21 LT Line Type This command specifies the line pattern to be used when drawing lines Use LT to vary lines and enhance your plot Note that the ends of dashed line segments in a line pattern are affected by current line attributes refer to the LA command earlier in this chapter LT line type pattern length mode or LT or LT99 Functional Parameter Format Range Default line type clamped integer 8 to 8 solid line 99 restores previous line type pattern length clamped real gt 0 4 of the distance between P1 an
105. 1 1 spacing 1 7 syntax 1 5 termination character 1 6 value field 1 6 escape sequences PCL amp esc 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 7 4 8 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 5 2 5 4 5 5 5 9 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 22 5 24 6 4 6 6 6 9 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 8 6 8 9 8 10 8 12 8 14 8 16 8 18 8 26 8 27 8 28 8 29 9 4 9 5 10 2 10 4 10 12 11 6 11 49 11 50 12 6 12 7 13 6 13 7 13 12 13 16 13 22 13 23 14 3 14 4 14 9 15 6 15 8 15 11 15 13 15 14 15 15 15 16 15 29 15 30 16 8 16 9 16 10 16 21 16 24 16 25 24 12 ETX 23 11 23 44 even odd fill method for polygons 21 12 EW command 21 6 21 7 21 27 execute macro 12 4 exit language universal UEL Glossary 14 exponential format 17 11 Extra Space ES command 23 8 23 16 23 51 F factory default Glossary 4 factory default environment 3 2 Glossary 5 HP GL 2 context table 3 5 PCL context table 3 2 faxback service HP FIRST Customer Support 2 feature settings 3 2 FF Form Feed 6 13 Fl command 23 54 fill and line types 22 1 fill examples rectangular area 14 13 fill patterns starting position 22 6 user defined 22 13 Fill Polygon FP command 21 12 21 31 fill procedure rectangular area 14 1 Fill Rectangle Absolute command 21 39 Fill Rectangle Relative command 21 42 EN EN Fill Rectangular Area command 14 9 Fill Type command 22 9 fill types 22 4 Fill Wedge WG command 21 27 21 45 filled rectangles 21 4 filling characters H
106. 1 6 GT Global TrueType Data 11 41 H Half Line Feed 6 13 Half Line Feed command 6 13 hard clip limits 17 19 hatching patterns 22 9 header font 11 6 user defined symbol set 10 4 Header Size field user defined symbol set 10 5 height defined Glossary 5 character descriptor 11 57 extended font header 11 31 font header 11 22 11 23 font selection 8 24 pixels user defined pattern descriptor 13 18 Height command font selection 8 12 help customer support Customer Support 1 HMI Horizontal Motion Index 6 3 Glossary 6 command 5 20 defining column width 2 5 hints 24 4 HMI command 5 20 setting affected by unit of measure 4 13 horizontal character spacing 7 5 horizontal cursor positioning columns command 6 4 decipoints command 6 6 PCL Units command 6 6 control codes 6 7 horizontal escapement 23 16 Horizontal Picture Frame Size command decipoints 18 8 horizontal rectangle size decipoints command 14 3 PCL Units command 14 3 horizontal spacing 8 10 horizontal tab 6 9 HP customer support Customer Support 1 HP Distribution Customer Support 2 HP FIRST fax line Customer Support 2 HP Forum CompuServe Customer Support 1 HP Personal Peripherals Assist Line Customer Support 2 HP GL 2 I Introduction 17 1 defined Glossary 6 adapting to match PCL 19 15 character cell 23 12 Character Group 17 5 23 1 character positioning 23 62 character size and slant 23 8 command sequence 18 5 commands see also commands
107. 2 6 1 17 21 Glossary 1 Glossary 3 current pattern 13 2 Current Pattern command 13 12 current units 17 11 currently selected status 16 3 cursor Glossary 3 cursor positioning 2 2 absolute 6 2 24 5 adaptive compression 15 27 and Unit Of Measure command 4 13 CAP Glossary 1 character printing 6 1 clipped character 24 12 columns 6 4 commands 6 1 EN EN control codes horizontal 6 7 control codes vertical 6 13 decipoints 6 6 6 11 End of Line Wrap 24 12 half line 6 13 hints 24 5 HP GL 6 1 PCL Units 6 6 6 12 printing characters 11 57 raster graphic 15 29 relative 6 2 24 5 rows 6 9 saving 6 14 stack 6 14 top margins 5 16 units 6 3 vertical 5 16 customer support Customer Support 1 D data block adaptive compression 15 25 data compression 15 2 bitmap character 11 53 class 2 character data 11 54 raster data 15 13 data offset scalable character descriptor Intellifont 11 64 data processing suspending 16 24 data segments formats 11 41 data size Intellifont character descriptor 11 63 data type 10 5 11 14 data user defined pattern 13 18 decipoint 2 5 6 6 defined 2 5 6 4 Glossary 3 vs typographic point 6 4 default defined Glossary 3 HP GL 2 18 15 factory settings 3 2 HP GL 2 19 3 HP GL 2 settings 3 5 HP GL 2 table 19 19 label conditions HP GL 2 23 7 location P1 and P2 19 23 print resolution 2 3 setting 3 1 user environment 3 6 3 8 Default Values command 17 23 19 3 19 19 Default Values comm
108. 2 mode most vector graphics variables retain their previous HP GL 2 value However the following changes in the PCL environment can affect the HP GL 2 environment e Resetting the printer FOE or control panel reset Executes an IN Initialize command Defaults the PCL Picture Frame size Defaults the PCL Picture Frame anchor point Defaults the HP GL 2 plot size Defaults the PCL logical page orientation e A page size page length or orientation command Defaults the PCL Picture Frame anchor point Defaults the PCL Picture Frame Defaults the HP GL 2 plot size Defaults P1 and P2 IP IR commands Resets the soft clip window to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries IW command Clears the polygon buffer PMO PM2 Updates the cursor to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 e Redefining the PCL Picture Frame Defaults P1 and P2 IP IR commands Resets the soft clip window IW to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries Clears the polygon buffer PMO PM2 Updates the current pen position to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 e Setting the picture frame anchor point Defaults P1 and P2 IP IR commands Resets the soft clip window to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries IW command Clears the polygon buffer PMO PM2 Updates the current pen position to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 e Setting an HP GL 2 plot size Changes the picture frame scaling factor Default Settings 18 15
109. 23 4 Label Origin Command 23 10 The Character Group EN EN These lines use one X Y coordinate pair one LO command to center labels and a Carriage Return and Line Feed after each line Without this command an alternative method would involve calculating the length of the line in CP Character Plot cells dividing by two and using the CP command to Backspace the required number of cells The LO command saves calculation decreases the number of characters sent to the printer and allows you to take advantage of proportional fonts when the character widths are not known to the software Terminating Labels LB tells the printer to print every character following the command rather than interpreting the characters as graphics commands In order to allow the normal terminator the semicolon to be used in text the command is defined so that you must use the special print label terminator mode to tell the printer to once again interpret characters as graphics commands If the command had been defined otherwise you wouldn t be able to print semicolons in your text The default label terminator is the non printing ASCII end of text character ETX decimal code 3 You must use the label terminator or the printer prints the rest of your file as text instead of executing the commands You can change the label terminator using the Define Label Terminator DT command Enhancing Labels 23 11 Working with the Character
110. 2500 0 0 1500 0 0 Specify Pen Down and draw lines between the points EQOA Enter the PCL mode ERE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 0 1500 Start 0 0 oe 2500 0 Figure 20 1 Drawing lines EN Drawing Lines 20 3 Note Any line drawn along the border of the effective window causes the line to be clipped producing a line width of one half of what it should be For example in the above plot the lines from 0 0 to 0 1500 and 0 0 to 2500 0 is clipped Drawing Circles The Circle Cl command uses your current pen position as the center of the circle you specify the radius of the circle The following example shows a simple command sequence using Cl to draw a circle with a radius of 500 plotter units Table 20 3 Example Drawing Circles E E Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing PA2400 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to position 2400 2500 C1500 Draw a circle with a radius of 500 plu plotter units the center of the circle is the current pen location 2400 2500 E A Enter the PCL mode ESE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 4 The Vector Group EN Current pen location 2400 2500 Radius 500 plotter units Figure 20 2 Drawing circles Drawing A
111. 3500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 38500 2500 RF2 8 4 Define a raster fill pattern index number 2 that 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 is 8 dots wide by 4 dots high 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FT11 2 Select the user defined pattern having an index number of 2 RF Raster Fill Definition 22 33 Table 22 16 Example Creating and Printing a Fill Pattern RR4000 800 EP Fill a rectangle with the fill pattern just specified with a lower left corner of 3500 2500 and an upper right corner 4000 plu to the right and 800 plu up edge the outline of the rectangle 960A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page I Figure 22 20 Table 22 17 Related Commands Group AC Anchor Corner FT Fill Type SV Screened Vectors The Line and Fill Attributes Group 22 34 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN SM Symbol Mode This command draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate point using the PA PD PE PR and PU commands Use SM to create scattergrams indicate points on geometric drawings and differentiate data points on multiline graphs SM character or SM 7 Parameter Format Functional Range Default character label most printing characters decimal codes 33 58 60 126 161 and 254 Decimal code 59 the semicolon is an HP GL 2 terminator and cannot be
112. 90 P1 X v o RO90 IP IW P1 Figure 19 17Using IP and IW after the RO Command Table 19 17 Related Commands Group IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window The Configuration Status Group 19 38 The Configuration and Status Group EN RP Replot Note EN This command is ignored by the printer to eject a page the printer must be in PCL printer language mode The following commands cause a conditional page eject a page is ejected if there is any printable data in the print buffer EGE Reset UEL Universal Exit Language Flush All Pages Page Length Page Size Orientation e Paper Source The PCL Form Feed control code causes an unconditional page eject and advances the cursor position to the top of form on the next page A page eject caused by any of the above commands except Paper Source defaults the HP GL 2 pen position To print more than one plot use the Number of Copies command For information about printing more than one copy of an HP GL 2 illustration see Number of Copies Command in Chapter 4 RP Replot 19 39 SC Scale This command establishes a user unit coordinate system by mapping user defined coordinate values onto the scaling points P1 and P2 SC XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX typef left bottom or SC XMIN XFACTOR YMIN YFACTOR type or SC Parameter Format Functional Range Default XMIN X MAX real
113. Absolute command 20 5 20 9 Arc Relative AR command 20 5 Arc Relative command 20 13 arcs drawing 20 5 area fill ID command see also pattern ID command 13 8 14 5 area fill user defined patterns also see user defined patterns 13 13 ASCxx 10 5 11 14 aspect ratio 19 8 Glossary 1 assigning font ID numbers 9 4 assist line HP Customer Support 2 AT command 20 7 20 16 auto continue 24 14 Glossary 1 automatic macro overlay 12 4 24 8 automatic pen down 17 21 auto rotation font 8 20 Backspace 6 7 base pattern 13 13 baseline position font header 11 18 BASIC HP GL 2 example 17 13 baud rate Glossary 1 Bezier Absolute BZ command 20 8 20 22 Bezier curves HP GL 2 20 8 Bezier Relative BR command 20 8 20 19 bi directional 1 0 16 2 binary data 1 6 15 1 binding modes 4 5 bitmap fonts 7 2 7 9 11 2 character descriptor format 11 51 EN EN character design data 11 57 coordinate system 11 4 header 11 7 11 8 status readback 16 12 black fill 14 9 black rule 13 12 block size adaptive compression 15 25 bold stroke weight 7 6 boolean B data type 10 5 11 14 11 51 bottom margin 24 4 bound font 9 8 Glossary 1 boundaries landscape page 2 8 limiting HP GL 2 17 19 PCL Picture Frame 19 6 portrait page 2 7 printable area 2 7 2 8 boundaries page 2 2 BR command 20 8 20 19 BS Backspace 6 7 buffer overflow ERROR 22 24 15 byte counts 15 29 BZ command 20 8 20 22 C C programming language
114. C Anchor Corner command to position the fill type in relation to the figure Rectangle 3 has an anchor corner set in its the lower left corner Rectangle 4 has an anchor corner set below the lower left corner to alter the pattern s position and give contrast to the adjacent figure Selecting a Pen and Changing Line Width EN Even though the printer does not print with a physical pen as a plotter does the printer uses a logical pen which emulates the action of a physical pen You must use the SP1 Select Pen command to draw black lines on the paper You can change the width of the logical pen using the Pen Width PW command Subsequent lines are drawn using the new width Use PW to vary line thicknesses and enhance your plots You may change widths as often as you like without sending an SP command again Pen line widths can be specified either in millimeters or as a percentage of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 Use the WU Pen Width Unit Selection command to select how the pen width is specified Since using the WU command defaults the width of both pens black and white send WU before a PW command Selecting a Pen and Changing Line Width 22 5 AC Anchor Corner This command positions the starting point of any fill pattern Use AC to ensure that the selected fill pattern is positioned as expected within the figure AC X Y or AC Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates
115. Cell In each font the basis for each character or space is the character cell Think of the character cell as a rectangular area around a character that includes blank areas above and to the right of the character Refer to the Figure 23 5 fine Feed iT 2 2 z li Character Width 1 Origin H Character Plot Baseline Cell Width Figure 23 5 The Character Cell and HP GL 2 Table 23 5 Term Description Baseline The imaginary line on which a line of text rests A character s descender such as the bottom of a lowercase g extends below the baseline Linefeed The distance from the baseline of a line of text to the baseline of the next character line above or below For most fonts the linefeed is about 1 2 times the point size 1 33 times the point size for Stick fonts Point Size Traditional character measure roughly equivalent to the height of a capital letter M plus the depth of a descender 23 12 The Character Group EN Note EN Table 23 5 continued Cap Height The distance from the baseline to the top of a capital letter Character The point at which the baseline meets the left edge Origin of the character cell Character The lateral area allocated for character rendering Width Character The distance from the left edge of one character to Plot CP the beginning of the next character Cell Width Character A rectangular area with the height of a line
116. Command 21 35 commands PAO 1750 PMO the absolute coordinates 0 1750 specify the first point of your polygon Each subsequent pair of coordinates defines a point or vertex of the polygon You can define points with the pen up or down However the EP command only draws between points that are defined when the pen is down On the other hand the FP command fills the area s between all vertices regardless of whether the pen is up or down when defined It is good programming practice to close the polygon before exiting polygon mode Closing a polygon means adding the final vertex that defines a continuous shape the last coordinates or increments represent the same location as the first If you have not closed the polygon executing PM7 or PM2 forces closure by adding a point to close the polygon You can also use the Initialize IN or Default Values DF commands while in polygon mode Both commands exit polygon mode clear the polygon buffer and begin executing subsequent commands immediately You must exit polygon mode to execute other HP GL 2 graphics commands Note Sending an E while in polygon mode causes the printer to exit polygon mode clear the polygon buffer exit HP GL 2 mode and eject a page Sending an E while in polygon mode is not recom mended but it performs an important function allowing you to recover from a previous job that left the printer in polygon mode PM1 Use PM1 to close the current
117. Default radius current units 290 to 230 4 no default start angle clamped real 32768 to 32767 no default modulo 360 sweep angle clamped real 360 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5 The EW command defines and edges a wedge using the current pen line type and attributes The EW command includes an automatic pen down When the command execution is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored The only difference between the EW command and the WG Fill Wedge command is that the EW command produces an outlined wedge and the WG command a filled one Always use isotropic scaling in drawings that contain wedges unless you wish the wedges to stretch with changes in the aspect ratio of the drawing causing elliptical wedges For more information refer to the discussion of scaling and the Scale SC command description in Chapter 19 EN EW Edge Wedge 21 27 Anisotropic Isotropic scaling scaling Figure 21 17 Anisotropic and Isotropic Scaling e Radius Specifies the distance from the current pen location to the start of the wedge s arc Since the wedge is a portion of a circle this parameter is the radius of the circle It specifies the distance from the current pen location which becomes the center of the circle to any point on the circumference of the circle The radius is interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units
118. Direction DI command specifies the angle at which you want to print the characters independent of the location of P1 and P2 The Relative Direction DR command specifies the angle at which you want to print the characters as a function of the P1 and P2 distance thus when you change P1 and P2 the label angle changes to maintain the same orientation The DI and DR commands allow you to print text at any angle with the letters in their normal side by side orientation ENSE M Ss ev D 3 NOILO3HIG DIRECTION DIRECTIONx Figure 23 2 Label Orientation and Direction Bit map characters are always printed orthogonally to the page refer to Figure 23 17 Scalable characters print in the direction specified Enhancing Labels 23 9 The Define Variable Text Path DV command allows you to specify the text path right left up or down and the direction of Line Feeds with respect to the text path P U TFEL RIGHT D D W N Figure 23 3 Define Variable Text Path Command The Label Origin LO command simplifies placing labels on a drawing Normally the first character origin is the current pen location when the Label command is issued The LO command allows you to specify that the label be centered and or right or left justified from the current pen location For example the following illustration shows four centered lines of text Lines of any length can easily be centered without cumbersome calculations Figure
119. For more information about fill types refer to the FT command description in Chapter 22 Table 21 22 Example Using the RA Command with Different Fill Types E Reset the printer 2 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA400 400 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to RA800 1200 400 400 Draw a rectangle with 400 400 as the lower left corner and 800 1200 as the upper right corner PA400 1200 FT3 50 RA800 1600 Move the pen to 400 1200 select fill type 3 parallel lines with a 50 plu space between lines and draw a rectangle with 400 1200 as the lower left corner and 800 1600 as the upper right corner PA400 1600 FT4 RA800 2000 Move to 400 1600 and specify fill type 4 cross hatching Draw a rectangle with a lower left corner of 400 1600 and an upper right corner of 800 2000 PA1200 400 FT RA1600 1200 EA1600 1200 Move to location 1200 400 and select the default fill type solid black Fill and edge a rectangle using 1200 400 as the lower left corner and 1600 1200 as the upper right corner 21 40 The Polygon Group EN EN Table 21 22 Example Using the RA Command with Different Fill Types continued PA1200 1200 FT3 50 RA1600 1600 EA1600 1600 Move to absolute position 1200 1200 and select f
120. Hewlett Packard recommends using polygon mode when the number of points in a polygon is 1000 or less e The Polyline Encoded command can reduce data by 60 to 70 e When drawing shapes use a command that was designed to draw that shape For example to draw a rectangle use the ER command to produce it instead of stroking the shape line by line e When drawing arcs or circles use the Bezier commands to eliminate the need to compute the chord angle thus resulting in better quality and efficiency e To Scale text use the HP GL 2 font selection commands such as SD or AD that use Intellifont or TrueType to scale the text Scaling text in HP GL 2 using the SR or SI commands is much less efficient e Font transformations in HP GL 2 such as mirroring scaling slanting rotating and outlining are very processing intensive An ERROR 21 print overrun may occur The error can be controlled by using the HP LaserJet Page Protection feature EN HP GL 2 Vector Graphics 24 9 Performance PCL Commands Since PCL printers are command driven devices and each command takes a finite amount of time to process pages composed of a large number of commands may not print at maximum speed Most commands can be used frequently on a page without adversely affecting the printer s performance however certain commands take more time to process and therefore if used frequently on a page may decrease printer performance An excessive nu
121. I or DR commands The text path set by DV is not affected by changes in P1 and P2 0 0 degrees Right Within a label each character begins to the right of the previous character This is a horizontal text path unless altered by DI or DR 1 90 degrees Down Within a label each character begins below the previous character This is a vertical text path unless altered by DI or DR e 2 180 degrees Left Within a label each character begins to the left of the previous character This is a horizontal text path unless altered by DI or DR 23 46 The Character Group EN e 3 270 degrees Up Within a label each character begins above the previous character This is a vertical text path unless altered by DI or DR The following illustration shows the four text paths C U TEE RIGHT Z x OU Figure 23 26 Four Text Paths e Line Specifies the location of each character with respect to the preceding character relative to the labeling direction defined by the DI or DR commands e 0 90 degrees Normal Line Feed Sets the direction of Line Feeds 90 degrees with respect to the text path EN DV Define Variable Text Path 23 47 OJ PPI T rz minc DEEF ENIL N LAMRON NORMAL LINE FEED D IAEIDOZ omm MART Figure 23 27 DV Command Character Position for Normal 0 Parameter e 0 90 degrees Reverse Line Feed Sets the direction of Line Feeds 90 degrees with respect to the text path
122. Note that the circle printed in the new area is smaller but is proportionately identical 19 8 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 2 Example Changing the Size of a Drawing E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode using the default picture frame size and anchor point IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode IP0 0 2000 2000 Set P1 to be 0 0 and P2 to be 2000 2000 SCO0 10 0 10 Set up user unit scaling to range from 0 0 to 10 10 SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA5 5 Begin absolute plotting from the center of the square 5 5 CI3 Print a circle with a radius of 3 user units 1P2500 500 3500 1500 Input a new P1 and P2 position for printing the smaller circle PA5 5 Begin absolute plotting from the center of the new square 5 5 CI3 Print the second circle with a radius of 3 user units Fc960A Enter PCL Mode EGE Reset the printer to complete the job and eject the page EN Using Scaling Effectively 19 9 Original P2 New P2 New P1 Original P1 Figure 19 4 Changing the size of a drawing Drawing Equal Size Pictures on a Page You may occasionally want to print more than one drawing on the same page for a side by side comparison This can be useful for comparing parts assemblies layouts or other similar information The easiest way to draw equal sized pictures on one pi
123. P Fill Polygon WG Fill Wedge SC Scale The Configuration Status Group Cl Circle The Vector Group LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group 21 30 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 15 continued LT Line Type PW Pen Width Table 21 16 Possible Error Conditions Condition Printer Response polygon buffer overflow edges contents of buffer FP Fill Polygon Note EN This command fills the polygon currently in the polygon buffer Use FP to fill polygons defined in polygon mode or with the Edge Rectangle or Edge Wedge commands EA ER EW RA RR or WG FP fill method or FP Parameter Format Functional Range Default fill method clamped 0 or 1 0 odd even fill integer e Fill Method Specifies the algorithm used to determine which portions of the polygon are inside the polygon and therefore are to be filled 0 Even odd fill algorithm default 1 Non zero winding fill algorithm Even odd method 0 and Non zero method 1 winding fill methods are described in detail under Filling Polygons earlier in this chapter The FP command fills any polygon that is currently in the polygon buffer FP accesses the data in the polygon buffer but does not clear the buffer or change the data in any way FP Fill Polygon 21 31 The FP command fills between points defined with either the pen down or the pen up The po
124. P GL 2 23 20 filling polygons 21 12 final font selection 9 11 first code font header 11 30 user defined symbol set header 10 7 fixed underline 8 29 fixed spaced fonts character spacing 5 20 7 4 8 9 font selection 8 23 printing 23 15 floating underline 8 29 Flush All Pages command 16 24 FN command 23 56 font 7 1 defined Glossary 5 alternate font definition 23 18 auto rotation 8 20 bitmap 7 2 7 9 11 2 bitmap in HP GL 2 mode 23 15 bitmap vs scalable 7 2 bitmap coordinate system 11 4 bound 9 8 bound and unbound 9 8 Glossary 1 cache 16 22 cartridge 7 2 Glossary 5 character cell illustration 11 19 characteristic 23 19 characteristic priority 8 2 characteristics 7 1 8 4 24 5 classifications 11 2 Control command 9 5 control symbol sets 10 12 copy assign 9 5 data type 10 5 deleting 4 2 9 3 9 5 24 8 descriptor size 11 15 design coordinate system 11 4 designating HP GL 2 example 23 73 disk 7 2 downloading 7 2 9 2 entity 16 3 extended status readback 16 10 filling characters HP GL 2 23 20 fixed spaced 7 4 font type header field 11 15 formats 7 2 header see also font header 11 1 11 6 height HP GL 2 23 71 height PCL 7 5 height measured in PCL points 23 15 HP GL 2 alternate font selection 23 66 HP GL 2 font size 23 74 HP GL 2 fonts 23 15 HP GL 2 ID number selection 23 54 HP GL 2 selection using font ID 23 56 ID command 9 4 ID number 9 1 23 56 Intellifont scalable 11 2 internal 7 2 7 11
125. P GL 2 comments are ignored by the printer DF Default Values EN This command returns the printer s HP GL 2 settings to the factory default settings Use the Default Values DF command to return the printer to a known state while maintaining the current locations of P1 and P2 unlike the IN command When you use DF at the beginning of a command sequence graphics parameters such as character size slant or scaling are defaulted DF The DF command resets the printer to the conditions listed in Table 19 7 Table 19 7 Default Conditions Function Command Default Condition Anchor Corner AC Anchor corner not the same as the picture frame anchor point set to lower left corner of PCL Picture Frame relative to the current coordinate system Alternate Font AD Stick Font 11 5 pt 9 cpi Definition upright medium Character Fill Mode CF Solid fill no edging CO Comment 19 19 Table 19 7 Default Conditions continued Absolute Direction DI1 0 Character direction parallel to X axis Define Label DT ETX and non printing Terminator mode Define Variable Text DV Text printed left to right Path with normal Line Feed Extra Space ES No extra space Fill Type FT Solid fill Input Window IW Set equal to PCL Picture Frame Window Line Attributes LA Butt caps mitered joins and miter limit 5 Label Origin LO1 Standard
126. P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP IP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HPHP HP HP HP HP HP HP NP HP HP HP HP HP P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP IP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP NP NP HP HP HP HP MP HP HP HP HP HP HP Figure 22 8 HP GL 2 User Defined Pattern 22 12 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN For fill type 21 the option1 parameter selects one of the six predefined PCL cross hatch patterns using a value between 1 and 6 The following illustration shows the six different PCL cross hatch patterns and their corresponding parameter numbers Sd a s d ed 5 wa q 1 sd ed lt 4 t DEA d T x od oS oS d oS a 295 wed 2 2 2 zs to o aces t nee lt 5 lor XO nates e oS So 900 r SERS ete OS 9S ee teretes ste P Jo oS s ees o ete eS e Ss le e oS oS Sete T OS o eo sees s SR ee Ae es Re 66 e RLL RRK coe Ne ee wet Q5 oS te rates mates veces 2905 rates ret 2925 ies IRLI S zm exe SSR os ote Ete ROO OOo Se S estem atat SORES i oo e SRS eee sexes Meroe ee see lt 5 x OR ORORUOR IRR aO i d SRK K RK HO aeeteconecececacocaconecac
127. P1 and P2 The pen width units are selected via the WU command the default is metric millimeters PW width pen or PW Parameter Format Functional Range Default width clamped real 32768 to 32767 Dependent pen integer 0 or 1 1 Black 1 Dependent on the mode set by the Pen Width Unit Selection WU command if mode is metric default width is 0 35 mm if mode is relative default width is 0 1 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 You may change the pen width as often as you like without sending another SP command If the pen is down when you change the width the new width takes effect at the next line f you use WU to change the type of units used for the width parameter metric or relative send the WU command before PW e No Parameters Defaults the pen line width according to the current units set by WU 0 35 mm if metric 1 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 if relative e Width Specifies the line width When the parameter is zero the printer assumes the thinnest line width 1 dot wide Metric widths are scaled by the ratio of the size of the PCL Picture Frame to the HP GL 2 plot size For example if the HP GL 2 plot size is twice as large as the PCL Picture Frame WU PW 3 sets the width of vectors to 0 15mm If the ratios are different for the X and Y axes the smaller ratio is used If the width is less than the thinnest available then the thinnest width is used PW
128. PE Polyline Encoded Increases throughput by encrypting common HP GL 2 commands PR Plot Relative Enables movement relative to the current pen location PU Pen Up Lifts the pen from the page RT Relative Arc Three Point Draws an arc from the current pen location through two relative points Drawing Lines You can draw lines between two points X Y coordinate pairs using the PD Pen Down command and a series of absolute and or relative coordinate pairs The printer draws only the portion of the line that falls within the effective window Note When using HP GL 2 to draw lines you can increase your printer s throughput by using the Polyline Encoded PE command to send coordinates The PE command requires that you convert coordinates from decimal to base 64 or 32 This conversion especially increases throughput when using a serial interface The PE command with its parameters is used in place of the PA PD PR and PU commands 20 2 The Vector Group EN In the following example note that the PA Plot Absolute command specifies absolute plotting and the coordinate pair 0 0 sets the beginning pen location Table 20 2 Example Drawing Lines EGE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black You must use the SP command to be able to print HP GL 2 images PAO 0 Begin absolute plotting from coordinate 0 0 PD
129. PM1 are stored as one subpolygon e 2 Closes current polygon or subpolygon and exits polygon mode The following paragraphs explain how to use each parameter The order in which you use these commands is very important PMO or PM Use PMO to clear the polygon buffer and enter polygon mode While in polygon mode only certain commands are allowed The following list contains these commands 21 34 The Polygon Group EN Note EN Table 21 19 Polygon Mode Allowable Commands Group DF Default Values The Configuration Status Group IN Initialize AA Arc Absolute The Vector Group AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up RT Relative Arc Three Point PM1 PM2 Polygon Mode The Polygon Group The polygon buffer stores the lines vectors that define your polygon These vectors are accessed later when you exit polygon mode and fill and or edge the polygon While in polygon mode the Cl command is interpreted differently than other graphics commands Refer to Drawing Circles in Polygon Mode earlier in this chapter for more details When you define a polygon the pen location before the PMO command is the first point vertex of the polygon and the first point stored in the polygon buffer For example if you execute the PM Polygon Mode
130. PU45 90 EA85 65 Lift the pen and move to 45 90 Draw the outline of a rectangle with an upper left corner of 45 90 and a lower right corner of 85 65 PU95 95 PD125 95 125 90 Lift the pen and move to 95 95 Lower the pen and draw a line to 125 95 then to 125 90 PU145 90 EA105 65 Lift the pen and move to 145 90 Draw the outline of a rectangle with the upper right corner at 145 90 and the lower left corner at 105 65 960A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page EN EA Edge Rectangle Absolute 21 19 Start 75 105 65 95 65 90 45 90 85 65 Figure 21 13 Table 21 9 95 105 95 95 115 130 125 95 125 90 145 90 105 65 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative The Polygon Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group 21 20 The Polygon Group EN EP Edge Polygon EN This command outlines the polygon currently stored in the polygon buffer Use EP to edge polygons that you defined in polygon mode and with the Fill Rectangle and Wedge Commands RA RR and WG EP The EP command outlines any polygon that is currently in the polygon buffer This includes we
131. Printing with Fixed Spaced and Proportional Fonts Proportional fonts by definition use different amounts of horizontal space for each letter This variation produces some differences in the definition of the character cell and in the way some of the labeling commands work with these fonts These differences are described in this section EN Using Fonts 23 15 Figure 23 8 and Figure 23 9 show the difference between fixed spaced and proportional fonts CP cells 1 Space Width of Space Control Code 1 linefeed Uppercase character height Character Character origin width fixed Subsequent character origins Figure 23 8 Fixed Spaced Font With proportional fonts the actual space occupied by each character varies according to the character s width Figure 23 9 CP cells 1 space is variable 1 linefeed Uppercase character height Character Character origin width varies Subsequent character origins Figure 23 9 Proportional Font 23 16 The Character Group EN When printing proportional fonts the Character Plot CP command uses the width of the Space control code to determine horizontal spaces and the Line Feed height for determining vertical spacing The Extra Space ES command uses the horizontal escapement distance a font metric to compute horizontal spaces and the Line Feed height for determining vertical spacing Both of the character size commands SI and SR use cap height and average characte
132. R 20 memoryoverflow 16 2 24 15 ERROR 21 printoverrun 24 10 24 15 ERROR 22 bufferoverflow 24 15 ERROR 40 datatransfer 24 15 Numerics 12345X Universal Exit Language 4 3 1T Job Separation 4 11 9 Clear Horizontal Margins 5 15 A AA command 20 9 Absolute Arc Three Point command 20 16 Absolute Character Size command 23 8 23 14 23 74 absolute cursor positioning 6 2 24 5 Absolute Direction command 23 9 23 21 23 29 absolute vs relative pen movement 17 25 AC command 22 5 22 6 AD command 23 18 adaptive compression block size 15 25 15 27 compression methods 15 25 control bytes 15 25 cursor position 15 27 data block 15 25 delta row 15 25 15 27 duplicate row 15 25 15 26 15 27 empty row 15 25 15 26 15 27 format 15 25 operation hints 15 27 row length 15 27 run length encoded 15 25 15 27 seed row 15 27 TIFF 15 25 15 27 y offset 15 27 addressable area 2 2 Advance Full Page command 19 33 alternate secondary font 23 56 alternate font HP GL 2 selection 23 66 Alternate Font Definition command 23 18 alternate vs standard fonts HP GL 2 23 17 Anchor Corner command 22 5 22 6 anchor corner changing example 22 6 anchor point picture frame 18 1 18 10 angle of rotation 20 7 21 6 angle of rotation negative Glossary 8 angle of rotation positive Glossary 10 angles measuring 23 31 angularity 7 6 anisotropic scaling 19 4 19 41 19 42 AP Application Support Format 15 11 41 AR command 20 13 Arc
133. R Plot Relative RO Rotate Coordinate System RT Relative Arc Three Point 1 APD or PU command with parameters also updates the Carriage Return point The CP command with a nonzero lines parameter updates the Carriage Return point s vertical location The Label LB command does not update the Carriage Return point to the current pen location but continues labeling from the current pen location This feature allows you to issue several label commands that write one long label and still use a Carriage Return to get to the beginning of the entire label Control Codes You can effectively use the following control characters in labels All other control codes are ignored Table 23 4 Commands Updating Carriage Return Point to Current Location Control Code DecimalCode Backspace 8 Horizontal tab 9 Line feed 10 Carriage return 13 Shift Out 14 23 6 The Character Group EN Table 23 4 Commands Updating Carriage Return Point to Current Location continued Shift In 15 Space 32 1 Equivalent to Select Alternate Font SA command 2 Equivalent to Select Standard Font SS command Default Label Conditions The following label default conditions are established when the printer is initialized or set to default conditions To change these settings refer to the appropriate chapter or command EN Symbol Set Character Set Roman 8 Font Spacing
134. SM Symbol Mode Line and Fill Attributes Group U Pen Up This command moves to subsequent points without drawing Use PU to move to another location without drawing a connecting line PU X Y or PU Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates current 230 to 230 4 no default increments units The PU command emulates a pen plotter which must raise the pen to prevent drawing stray lines on the page e No Parameters Prevents drawing subsequent graphics commands unless the command contains an automatic pen down X Y Coordinates Increments Move to the point s specified You can specify as many X Y coordinate pairs as you want When you include more than one coordinate pair the printer moves to each point in the order given 20 46 The Vector Group EN Note EN When you use the Symbol Mode SM command PU draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you use the polygon mode PM command the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer for use when the polygon is edged or filled Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Whether the PU command uses absolute coordinates or relative coordinates increments depends on the most recently executed PA or PR command If you have not issued a PA or PR command absolute plotting PA is used If an odd number of
135. Select Alternate Font command 23 66 Select Current Pattern command 13 12 Select Default Font command 8 27 Select Pen SP command 22 5 22 38 Select Primary Font command 23 54 Select Secondary Font command 23 56 Select Standard Font command 23 85 SELECT status response 16 11 semicolon 17 9 separators HP GL 2 syntax 17 7 serial I O Glossary 13 serif style font header 11 27 Set Compression Method command 15 16 Set Pattern Reference Point command 13 13 13 22 Set Picture Frame Anchor Point command 18 10 Set Status Readback Location Type command 16 8 Set Status Readback Location Unit command 16 9 shaded fill 22 11 fonts 7 11 FT command 22 9 pattern selection 13 8 14 5 patterns 13 9 14 6 14 9 Shift In SI 8 5 23 8 Shift Out SO 8 5 23 8 23 66 short edge binding mode 4 5 shortening commands 1 8 SI Shift In 8 5 SI command 23 8 23 14 23 74 example 23 75 signed byte SB 10 5 11 14 character descriptor 11 51 signed integer SI 10 5 11 14 signed long integer SLI 10 5 11 14 SIMM fonts 7 2 macro storing 12 1 simplex printing 4 5 simplex duplex print command 4 5 size HP GL 2 drawing 19 9 SL command 23 8 23 78 example 23 79 slant character 23 8 23 78 SM command 22 35 SO Shift Out 8 5 soft font Glossary 13 soft fonts 7 2 creation 11 1 status readback 16 13 Soft symbol sets 10 12 soft clip window 17 19 18 8 18 10 18 15 19 18 19 29 19 35 19 37 20 20 20 22 solid fill 22 9 Source image 13 1 13 2 S
136. Select fill type 1 solid black WG 1000 270 60 Fill a wedge with a radius of 1000 user units a start angle of 270 anda sweep angle of 60 EW 1000 270 60 Edge the outline of the wedge that was just filled 21 48 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 26 Example Filling then Edging vs Edging then Filling Chart continued 950A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page QS eie SRK KS eS oss oS u 749 9 9 9 SOS e lS SRO Q2 eS tete SES Figure 21 28 The center point of the above circle is located at 0 0 Note When transparency mode TR commana is opaque filling then edging an object may produce different results from edging and then filling This is especially true when large pen widths are used The following example illustrates this Table 21 27 Example E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select printer logical pen number 1 TRO Set transparency mode OFF opaque PU4000 6000 Position pen EN WG Fill Wedge 21 49 Table 21 27 Example continued PW5 Select pen width of 5 units PMO Enter polygon mode CI1000 Draw a circle with a radius of 1000 units PM2 Close polygon and exit polygon mode FT10 30 Select 3096 shading fill type FP EP Fill then Edge polygon PU4000 3000 Se
137. T HZI mmm IT TITITDODITIO R LINE FEED DE SREVER REVERSED DEEF ENIL oOmADmM lt mID omm MZH Figure 23 28 DV Command Character Position for Normal 90 Parameter 23 48 The Character Group EN EN Example Using theDV Command The following example illustrates how Line Feeds and Carriage Returns affect vertical labels Horizontal labels are shown for comparison Table 23 24 Example Using the DV Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA2000 3000 DV1 Specify absolute plotting and move to 2000 3000 Define the text path so that each character begins below the previous character vertical text path DT LBABC CR LF Define the character as the label terminator non printing Print ABC followed by a Carriage Return Line Feed CR LF LBDEF LF Print DEF followed by a Line Feed LBGHI LF Print GHI followed by a Line Feed LO3 Change the label Origin to 3 the default LO1 was used prior to this LBJKL Print JKL LO1 Return to the default label Origin LO1 PA4000 3000 DVO0 Move to 4000 3000 and define the text path so that each character begins to the right of the previous one horizontal default text path LBABC CR LF Print ABC followed by CR LF LBDEF LF
138. The HP GL 2 Coordinate System Note EN Both PCL and HP GL 2 use a Cartesian Coordinate System The Cartesian coordinate system is a grid formed by two perpendicular axes usually called the X axis and Y axis refer to Figure 17 4 The intersection of the axes is called the origin of the system and has a location of 0 0 The default HP GL 2 coordinate system is different than the PCL coordinate system Y is down in PCL and up in HP GL 2 In addition the default origin is at the lower left in HP GL 2 and at the upper left in PCL The HP GL 2 coordinate system can be set up to match the PCL coordinate system See the example entitled Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System in Chapter 19 Figure 17 4 The HP GL 2 Coordinate System To locate any point on the grid the printing area within the PCL Picture Frame move from the origin a number of units along the X axis then move a number of units parallel to the Y axis The number of units you move matches a coordinate location Each point is designated by the combination of its X coordinate and Y coordinate known as an X Y coordinate pair In positive X values are plotted to the right of the origin and positive Y values are plotted above the origin The HP GL 2 Coordinate System 17 15 Note Study Figure 17 4 to locate these points 0 0 2 2 6 2 6 3 10 0 6 3 6 2 2 2 0 0 Draw a straight line between each poin
139. a X4 Y4 Xo Yo X3 Ya Parameter Format Functional Range Default X4 Y4 control points current 2 to 223 1 no default units The BZ command uses the current pen location and three specified control points to draw a bezier curve After each new Bezier the last control point of the previous curve becomes the first control point of the next Bezier All curve control points are specified as absolute coordinates Bezier curves are drawn with the current pen line type current line attributes and pen state up down The curve is clipped to the hard clip limits and the soft clip window Following the command execution the current pen position is updated to the end point of the curve The BZ command is allowed in Polygon Mode The first chord after PM1 is not treated as a pen up move e X4 Y4 Specify the location of the second X4 Y1 third Xo Y2 and fourth Xs Y3 control points as absolute coordinates Table 20 14 Example Using the BZ Command Bezier Absolute FECE Reset the printer EL B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing 20 22 The Vector Group EN EN Table 20 14 Example Using the BZ Command Bezier Absolute PA1016 5080 Specify the absolute point 1016 5080 as the starting location PR PD Spec
140. abel direction and the sign of the parameters Up Left i Right LABEL REE lores DI1 0 Down Down Right 4 Left T IG NOILIJSHTO 138V Up Figure 23 12Interaction of Label Direction and Parameter Sign CP Character Plot 23 25 The following illustration shows the direction of labeling with a vertical text path set by DV1 or DV1 0 refer to the Define Variable Text Path DV command for more information Left A4aDmMm lt Down I Up C A L Right Figure 23 13 Labeling with a Vertical Text Path The following example produces lettering along a line but not directly on top of it and aligns labels along a left margin Movement of the Carriage Return point is demonstrated as well as different methods of placing the text The text is placed using the CP command with parameters then with a Carriage Return Line Feed CR LF combination and using a CP command without parameters to emulate a CR LF Table 23 10 Example Using the CP Command ESE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black 23 26 The Character Group EN Table 23 10 Example Using the CP Command PA5000 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to PD1500 2500 5000 2500 set the pen down and draw PU a line to 1500 2500 lift the pen CP5 35 Move th
141. able items such as toner cartridges or paper These support personnel in turn can call special resources within HP when necessary Help From Your Dealer If you purchased your printer from an HP dealer or system vendor your dealer is the best source of assistance Your salesperson should be familiar with your needs equipment configuration and software and should be able to provide you with the information you need Your dealer can also access special support resources and programs within HP Contact your dealer for details on available support options Help from HP The CompuServe HP Forum The HP Forum on CompuServe is a fast and easy way to get drivers and updated application notes for HP LaserJet printers As soon as printer drivers and notes are available they are uploaded to HP Forum for instant access by CompuServe members Customer Support 1 If you are not a member of CompuServe but would like to join call CompuServe at 1 800 848 8199 operator 51 and take advantage of the Free Introductory Membership which includes e A 15 introductory usage credit to CompuServe e A private User ID number and Password e A complimentary subscription to CompuServe s monthly publication CompuServe Magazine HP Distribution Software drivers and application notes are also available through HP Distribution by calling at 303 353 7650 materials are mailed at no charge HP FIRST Faxback support Hewlett Packard has installed
142. ace used by a polygon number of points in polygon x 8 buffer space consumed by polygon Counting the Points in a Polygon The starting pen location and each subsequent point define a polygon As shown in the following illustration a rectangle is defined by five points not four This is because the starting location is counted again as the ending location 2 3 1 Start 5 Close Figure 21 10 Drawing Polygons 21 15 Notes The following shape has seven points Figure 21 11 Counting the Points in a Circle or Arc When acircle or arc defines a polygon the number of points depends on the number of chords in the arc There is always one more point than the number of chords because the starting location is counted again as the ending location Use the following formula to determine the number of points used to draw a circle or arc Arc Angl of Points Ic Angle degrees Chord Angle degrees Using this formula a full circle with the default chord angle of 5 consists of 73 points 360 5 1 73 and a 45 arc with a chord angle of 3 consists of 16 points 45 3 1 16 If the chord angle does not divide evenly into the arc round up to the next integer before adding one 45 2 1 23 1 24 In polygon mode the smaller a circle s chord angle the more chords will be stored in the polygon buffer to draw it 21 16 The Polygon Group EN EA Edge Rectangle Absolute This command defines and outlines a
143. acter When this character appears the printer reads it and its associated characters as a command to be performed and not as data to be printed Also see PCL commands Factory Default These are the settings that are programmed into the printer at the factory These settings are in use unless you override them using either the control panel or by sending printer commands Glossary 4 EN EN Factory Default Environment A factory default is a setting programmed into the printer at the factory The group of all the printer s factory settings is referred to as the factory default environment The factory default symbol set is selectable from the control panel configuration menu refer to the printer User s Manual Font A font is a set of characters that have similar characteristics A font has an assigned name typeface and is further described by its spacing height pitch style stroke weight symbol set and orientation For example the name of the font used for this text is Helvetica its height is 10 point its style is upright and its stroke weight is medium Font Cartridge A removable media containing multiple fonts When a cartridge is plugged into the printer the printer has access to the fonts contained in the cartridge Font Header The font header and character definitions contain all the information needed to format a font for use in the HP LaserJet printers Every PCL font header begins with a font desc
144. aling Allows a user unit along the X axis to be a different size than user units along the Y axis Printed shapes are distorted when you use anisotropic scaling For example a circle might be drawn as an ellipse oval shaped instead of round Left and bottom parameters are ignored for anisotropic scaling 1 Isotropic scaling Produces user units that are the same size on both the X and Y axes The following illustrations show how the printer adjusts the location of XMIN YMIN and XMAX YMAX to create the largest possible isotropic area within the P1 P2 limits Remember the user units are always square regardless of the shape of the isotropic area 19 42 The Configuration and Status Group EN 10 10 P2 Piece CN Hard clip SCO0 10 0 10 1 limits P2 P1 SC i3 Hard clip limits SCO 20 0 10 1 Figure 19 18lsotropic Scaling e Left Bottom Positions the isotropic area in the P1 P2 limits These parameters are always specified together and are valid for isotropic scaling only The left parameter indicates the percentage of the unused space on the left of the isotropic area the bottom parameter indicates the percentage of unused space below The defaults for the left and bottom parameters are each 50 This centers the isotropic area on the page with the unused space equally divided between left and right or top and bottom as shown in the previous illustrations EN SC Scale 19 43 Although you m
145. ames and versions you are currently using Customer Support 3 Customer Support 4 EN EN Glossary Auto Continue Auto Continue mode can be configured using the printer s control panel refer to the printer User s Manual Aspect Ratio The ratio of the width to height of an image Baud Rate Baud rate is the rate at which information is transferred between the computer and the printer To communicate properly the computer and printer must both be configured to the same baud rate Bound and Unbound Fonts A bound font is a font which contains a pre specified set of symbols such as Roman 8 PC 8 etc An unbound font or more accurately unbound typeface has the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary Symbol Index such as HP s Master Symbol List MSL or the Unicode symbol list See Chapter 10 User Defined Symbol Set for more information CAP Current Active Position The PCL cursor position refers to the Current Active Position CAP like the blinking underline character cursor used on most computers This cursor identifies the current position on the page the pointer where a printing command begins laying out page data The cursor can be moved anywhere within the logical page using a combination of horizontal and vertical cursor positioning commands and control codes see Chapter 6 Cursor Positioning Glossary 1 Glossary 2 Centronics I O An industry standard
146. ameter option Ec 1B specifies that the pen position be the same as the current PCL cursor position Example To set the pen position to the current PCL cursor position send ECSe1B EN Enter HP GL 2 Mode 18 13 Enter PCL Mode This command causes the printer to return to PCL mode from HP GL 2 mode EC MHA 0 Position cursor at previous PCL cursor position 1 Position cursor at current HP GL 2 pen position 0 0 1 even values are mapped to 0 odd values are mapped to 1 Default Range Sending the Enter PCL Mode command causes the printer to stop interpreting the incoming data as HP GL 2 commands and to begin interpreting the data as PCL commanas The value field specifies the cursor position when PCL mode is entered 0 A 0 parameter Ec960A sets the pen position to the previous PCL position the cursor position before entering HP GL 2 mode 1 A 1 parameter Ec961A sets the cursor position to the current HP GL 2 pen position If the current HP GL 2 pen position is outside the bounds of the PCL logical page the nearest point on the logical page boundary becomes the new PCL cursor position No PCL variables except the cursor position are affected by entering and exiting HP GL 2 mode Example To exit HP GL 2 mode using the current active cursor position CAP that existed before entering HP GL 2 mode send EC960A 18 14 The Picture Frame EN Default Settings EN When you enter HP GL
147. and 17 10 DEFID fontsinternallDnumber 16 15 Define Label Terminator command 23 11 23 44 Define Symbol Set command 10 4 Define Variable Text Path command 23 9 23 29 23 30 23 37 23 46 deleting fonts 9 3 macros 12 6 delta row compression adaptive compression 15 25 15 27 raster graphics 15 16 15 20 delta X character descriptor 11 57 descriptor character 11 1 font header 11 1 user defined pattern header 13 16 design units 11 4 design window Intellifont character cell 11 4 destination image 13 1 13 2 DF command 17 10 17 23 19 3 19 19 DI command 23 9 23 21 23 29 example 23 34 disk fonts 7 2 display functions command 24 12 example 24 13 document control 4 2 dot Glossary 3 dots vs PCL Units 2 3 4 15 dots printed 2 3 downloading Glossary 4 downloading fonts 9 2 bitmap example 11 43 Intellifont example 11 44 DR command 23 9 23 21 23 37 example 23 41 drawing arcs 20 14 arcs HP GL 2 20 5 Bezier curves HP GL 2 20 8 Bezier curves with absolute coordinates 20 22 Bezier curves with relative coordinates 20 19 circles 21 14 circles HP GL 2 20 4 20 25 circles with different radii and line types 20 28 equal size pictures 19 11 lines HP GL 2 20 2 pie charts using EW 21 29 pie charts using WG 21 49 polygons 21 10 rectangles 21 3 rectangles using EA 21 18 rectangles using ER 21 24 size HP GL 2 19 9 subpolygons 21 11 Index 7 Index 8 wedges 21 6 driver design for status 16 2 DT comman
148. and 17 21 20 2 20 31 example 20 32 Pen Up PU command 17 22 20 46 Pen Width PW command 22 5 22 29 23 21 perforation region Glossary 9 region 5 11 5 19 skip 5 11 Perforation Skip command 5 19 performance printer 24 10 permanent fonts 9 3 9 5 status readback 16 8 permanent macros 12 5 PF PS Compatible Font Name 11 42 PG command 19 33 phone support HP Customer Support 2 physical coordinate system 11 4 physical page defined 2 7 size in PCL Units landscape 2 8 size in PCL Units portrait 2 7 picture frame 18 1 anchor point 17 17 Index 15 Index 16 HP GL 2 2 6 size vertical 18 9 picture presentation directives 18 1 pie charts 21 27 21 45 pitch 7 5 23 70 23 73 Glossary 10 computing 8 11 extended font header 11 30 font header 11 21 font selection command 8 10 in font selection 8 23 selections range of valid 8 10 pixel 22 33 pixel encoding user defined pattern descriptor 13 17 pixel level clipping 2 8 PJL Glossary 10 PJL commands 1 4 placement font header 11 28 placing text 23 10 Plot Absolute command 17 25 20 30 Plot Relative command 20 44 plot size horizontal 18 11 plot size vertical 18 12 plotter units plu 17 11 17 20 PM command 21 10 21 34 example 21 37 PM1 and PM2 21 36 21 37 point Glossary 10 point size defined 2 5 HP GL 2 23 71 bitmap 8 12 8 13 PCL 7 5 scalable fonts 8 12 TrueType 8 12 point factor scaling 19 4 19 41 19 44 polygon drawin
149. and must be used to enable printing PA1500 1500 Move to location 1500 1500 DT Define as a label terminator non printing FN Select Secondary Font 23 57 Table 23 30 Example Using the FN Command LBLaserJetPrinters CR LF Print LaserJet Printers in the currently selected font which is the default Stick font Carriage Return Line Feed AD4 18 FN28 SA Use the AD command to designate an 18 point font from within HP GL 2 mode then assign the PCL font with font ID number of 28 as the secondary font Then select the font LBLaserJetPrinters Print LaserJet Printers in the newly selected font Fe960A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page LaserJet Pr inters LaserJet Printers Figure 23 31 Table 23 31 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group LB Label SA Select Alternate Font SD Standard Font Definition SS Select Standard Font 23 58 The Character Group EN Table 23 31 E C Fe c6F Font Control Copy Assign Fe X Designate Font as Primary FeX Designate Font as Secondary c D Font ID assign PCL Commands LB Label This command prints text using the currently defined font Use LB to annotate drawings or create text only charts LB text text label terminator Parameter Format Functional Range Default te
150. and the RA Fill Rectangle Absolute command is that the EA command produces an outlined rectangle and RA a filled one The EA command clears the polygon buffer and then uses it to define the rectangle before drawing Refer to Drawing Polygons at the beginning of this chapter for more information The following example uses absolute coordinates to draw some rectangles The same image is drawn later using the ER command instead Compare this example with the ER example to understand the differences between the coordinates used relative vs absolute Table 21 8 Example Using EA to Draw Rectangles E Reset the printer 2 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode 21 18 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 8 Example Using EA to Draw Rectangles continued SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SC0 150 0 150 1 Set up user scaling with P1 being 0 0 user units and P2 being 150 150 user units Isotropic scaling is specified PA75 105 EA115 130 Specify absolute plotting mode and move to 75 105 Use EA to outline the shape of a rectangle that begins at 75 105 and has an upper right corner of 115 130 user units PA95 105 PD95 95 Draw a line from 95 105 to 95 95 PD65 95 65 90 Draw a line from the current pen location 95 95 to 65 95 and another line from there to 65 90
151. angle 45 u Positive fev 90 sweep angle 90 PL Cx Negative Radius Figure 21 18 Table 21 14 Example Using EW to Draw a Pie Chart E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SC 3000 3000 Enter the scaling mode specifying P1 as 2000 2000 1 3000 2000 and P2 as 3000 2000 Use isotropic scaling PAO 0 Specify absolute plotting and move to user unit location 0 0 EW 1000 90 180 Draw a wedge section with a radius of 1000 user units a start angle of 90 and a sweep angle of 180 The minus sign before the radius 1000 sets the zero degree reference point to the left side of the drawing EW Edge Wedge 21 29 Table 21 14 Example Using EW to Draw a Pie Chart EW 1000 330 120 Using the same center point and zero degree reference point draw a wedge section outline starting at 330 and sweeping 120 PR 60 110 Move the cursor 60 user units to the left and 110 user units up EW 1000 270 60 From the new center point location draw a wedge using a negative zero reference point starting at 270 and sweeping for 60 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Figure 21 19 Table 21 15 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon The Polygon Group F
152. angle Absolute ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge PM Polygon Mode RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group 21 22 The Polygon Group EN ER Edge Rectangle Relative This command defines and outlines a rectangle using relative coordinates Use ER when drawing charts or schematic diagrams that require rectangles ER X Y Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y increments current 290 to 290 4 no default units The ER command defines and edges a rectangle using relative coordinates and the current pen line type and line attributes The ER command includes an automatic pen down When the command operation is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored e X Y Increments Specify the opposite corner of the rectangle from the current pen location The current pen location is the starting point of the rectangle Increments are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Note The following illustration shows the current pen location in the lower left corner and the command s X Y increment location in the upper right corner When drawing a rectangle these points can be in any two diagonally opposite corners EN ER Edge Rectangle Relative 21 23 X Y i
153. are collinear two lines are drawn one from the current pen location and the other from the end point leaving a gap between them Refer to the following illustration Both lines extend to the PCL Picture Frame limits or current window 1 n Current Intermediate IG AN point E Picture vA rame Figure 20 21 Table 20 31 Example Using the RT Command Relative Arc Three Point FECE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode EN RT Relative Arc Three Point 20 49 Table 20 31 Example Using the RT Command Relative Arc Three Point continued SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1000 100 Specify the absolute point 1000 100 as the starting location PR PD1500 0 Specify relative plotting pen down and draw 1500 0 relative plotter units from the current pen location 1000 100 PU 1850 1050 PD350 0 Lift the pen move 1850 1050 relative coordinates place the pen down and draw a line 350 plu in the X direction PU 350 700 PD350 0 Lift the pen move 350 700 plu from the current location place the pen down and draw a line 350 plu in the X direction PUO 350 PDO 1500 1500 0 Lift the pen move 350 plu to the left place the pen down draw a line 1500 plu up and then another line 1500 units to the right RT700 750 0 1500
154. arriage Return point to the current location While DR is in effect with or without parameters the label direction is affected by changes in the location of P1 and P2 DR is also affected by the Define Variable Text Path DV command Refer to the DI command earlier in this chapter for an explanation of this interaction e No Parameters Defaults the label direction to relative and horizontal parallel to the X axis Equivalent to DR1 0 e Run Specifies a percentage of the distance between P1 and P2x e Rise Specifies a percentage of the distance between P1 and P2y EN DR Relative Direction 23 37 You define the parameters of run and rise as shown in the following illustration zd ua be Figure 23 21 Rise and Run Parameters With the DR command the use of run and rise is somewhat different than with DI Run is expressed as a percentage of the horizontal distance between P1 and P2 rise is expressed as a percentage of the vertical distance between P1 and P2 actual run run parameter 100 x P2y P1y actual rise rise parameter 100 x P2 P1y 23 38 The Character Group EN The following illustration shows the effects of using three different sets of run rise parameters Notice how the text baseline varies as the run percentage is greater than equal to and less than the value for rise Figure 23 22Effects of Different Rise Run Parameters If the P1 P2 rectangle is square the DR and DI commands
155. at a 45 angle fill a rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner and a point 1000 plu to the right and 1000 plu up as the upper right corner edge the outline of the rectangle just filled PR1000 0 FT4 400 45 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move 1000 plu to the right select fill type number 4 cross hatch create a rectangle the same size as the first one fill it with cross hatch and edge its outline PR1000 0 FT3 400 45 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move to the right another 1000 plu and create another rectangle of the same size this time filled with pattern number 3 again PA3000 1500 AC3000 1500 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move to absolute location 3000 1500 move the anchor corner to location 3000 1500 fill a rectangle with the same dimensions as the previous three rectangles and edge its outline PA4000 1500 AC4000 1500 FT4 400 45 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move to location 4000 1500 and specify the location as the anchor corner select fill type number 4 cross hatch fill and edge another rectangle PA5000 1500 AC5000 1500 FT3 400 45 RR1000 1000 ER1000 1000 Move to absolute location 5000 1500 and specify that location as the anchor corner select fill type number 3 fill and edge another rectangle 960A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page AC Anchor Corner 22 7 4000 4000
156. ates in the polygon buffer You can use the following commands in polygon mode to create polygons These commands are stored in the polygon buffer until they are replaced with another polygon or the printer is initialized Table 21 7 Polygon Definition Commands Group AA Arc Absolute The Vector Group AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute CI Circle PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded 21 10 The Polygon Group EN Table 21 7 continued PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up RT Relative Arc Three Point PM1 PM2 Polygon Mode The Polygon Group Drawing Subpolygons While in polygon mode you can define either one polygon or a series of subpolygons Like a polygon a subpolygon is a closed sequence of connected line segments For example the block letter C is one complete polygon However the block letter D is actually two subpolygons the outline and the hole One One polygon subpolygon One subpolygon Figure 21 7 Drawing Subpolygons To create one polygon for example the letter C move the pen to the starting location for the polygon then use the Polygon Mode PM command to enter polygon mode Define the shape of the C using the appropriate commands and coordinates then exit polygon mode Now draw the polygon using either the Edge Polygon EP or Fill Polygon FP command Drawing Polygons 21 11 To creat
157. ax Y max points if scaling is isotropic The end points of HP GL 2 hatching fills are drawn with the current line cap Lines are not clipped to the polygon For fill type 10 the option1 parameter specifies the level of shading The level is specified as a percentage from 0 to 100 The following illustration shows the available shading patterns FT Fill Type 22 11 lt yy Yi Li Ye E r aep e Re aS NS NS 81 99 100 Figure 22 7 HP Defined Shading Patterns tips LT 7 s For fill type 11 the option1 parameter selects the corresponding HP GL 2 user defined raster fill using the index number specified in the RF command Refer to the Raster Fill Definition RF command for more information about creating user defined fill types If you have not issued an RF command the printer uses solid fill P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP NP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP P HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP NP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP IP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP IP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP NP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP IP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP H
158. bel SD Standard Font Definition SS Select Standard Font 23 66 The Character Group EN SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts This command specifies which types of fonts are used for labeling commands It allows you to restrict font selection to only scalable fonts and the Stick and Arc fonts disregarding bitmap fonts SB n or SB Parameter Format Functional Range _ Default n clamped integer 0 or 1 0 This command is defaulted by the Default Values DF command The SB command takes effect immediately changing both the standard primary and alternate secondary fonts to be scalable only or bitmap allowed as requested e No Parameter Defaults to scalable fonts Equivalent to SBO e n Determines the type of font according to the following parameter values 0 Scalable fonts only 1 Bitmap fonts allowed Note When SB1 is active all fonts obey the same restrictions as bitmapped fonts regarding Character Fill Orientation Size and Slant see table on next page Scalable fonts respond more accurately to some HP GL 2 commands The choice of scalable or bitmap fonts can affect the performance of the following HP GL 2 commands EN SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts 23 67 Table 23 38 AffectedCommands Command Limitation CF Bitmapped characters cannot be edged DI DR Bitmapped characters can be printed only with orthogonal directions 0 90
159. binary bits integer 26 to 26 1 PR and PE have extended ranges of 2 to 239 1 plotter units If the current pen position goes out of this range the printer ignores plotting commands until it receives an absolute PA or PE coordinate within the extended ranges X Y Coordinates Specifies a coordinate pair encoded into a base 64 default or a base 32 equivalent Use base 64 if your System can send 8 bits of data without parity Use 7 bit mode and base 32 coordinate values if your system requires a parity bit When you are in symbol mode refer to the SM command in Chapter 22 The Line and Fill Attributes Group PE draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you are in polygon mode refer to the PM command in Chapter 21 The Polygon Group the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer they are used when the polygon is edged or filled 20 36 The Vector Group EN Note EN Encoding PE Flag Values and X Y Coordinates Flag values and X Y coordinates are encoded into a base 64 default or base 32 equivalent 7 bit mode The following steps give a generic algorithm for encoding a number Assume x is the number to be encoded Use steps 1 and 2 only if you are encoding fractional data otherwise begin with step 3 When converting numbers to base 32 or 64 step 4 in the following instructions note that highest order digits are always in the high range all other digits are in the low range Therefor
160. bsolute 21 3 21 17 EP Edge Polygon 21 21 ER Edge Rectangle Relative 21 3 21 23 ES Extra Space 23 8 23 16 23 51 EW Edge Wedge 21 27 EW Edge Wedge 21 7 FI Select Primary Font 23 54 EN FN Select Secondary Font 23 56 FP Fill Polygon 21 12 21 31 FT Fill Type 22 9 Horizontal Picture Frame Size 18 8 HP GL 2 Plot Horizontal Size 18 11 HP GL 2 Plot Vertical Size 18 12 IN Initialize 19 3 19 15 19 21 IP Input P1 and P2 19 23 19 36 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 19 26 IW Input Window 19 18 19 29 LA Line Attribute 22 2 LA Line Attributes 22 15 LB Label 23 3 23 59 LO Label Origin 23 10 23 62 LT Line Type 22 2 22 22 PA Plot Absolute 17 25 20 30 PD Pen Down 17 21 20 2 20 31 PE Polyline Encoded 20 34 PG Advance Full Page 19 33 PM Polygon Mode 21 34 PR Plot Relative 20 44 PU Pen Up 17 22 20 46 PW Pen Width 22 29 23 21 PW Pen Width 22 5 RA Fill Rectangle Absolute 21 39 RF Raster Fill Definition 22 32 RO Rotate Coordinate System 17 17 19 24 19 28 19 34 RP Replot 19 39 RR Fill Rectangle Relative 21 42 RT Relative Arc Three Point 20 48 SA Select Alternate Font 23 66 SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts 23 31 23 67 SC Scale 17 24 19 4 19 15 19 40 Scale SC 17 20 SD Standard Font Definition 23 68 Set Picture Frame Anchor Point 18 10 SI Absolute Character Size 23 8 23 14 23 74 SL Character Slant 23 8 23 78 SM Symbo
161. by HP LaserJet printers is due in part to the ability to lay down a fine grid of dots on the page The density of this grid is referred to as the printer s resolution Resolution is expressed as a value of dots per inch Until recently all HP LaserJet family printers printed at a resolution of 300 dots per inch In a one inch square the printer could print a dot anywhere in a grid of up to 300 dots horizontally by 300 dots vertically for a total of 90 000 possible dot locations per square inch 300 x 300 90 000 The LaserJet 4 printer is capable of printing at either 300 or 600 dpi resolution At 600 dots per inch it becomes possible to print up to 360 000 dots per square inch 600 x 600 360 000 Robust Xon The configuration of ROBUST XON determines the method by which Xon signals are generated on the interface If ROBUST XON is ON an Xon is transmitted from the printer to the host computer when the printer s 1 Kbyte I O buffer has less than 128 data bytes remaining 896 bytes empty The printer must be in the on line state and not busy If no data is received additional Xon s are transmitted at one second intervals If ROBUST XON is OFF the printer sends one Xon signal when the printer is in the on line state and is not busy The printer does not send additional Xon signals Row The distance between rows is defined by the current vertical motion index VMI Rule A solid filled rectangular area Scalable
162. cannot be edged bitmap or stick characters using the edge pen 2 Specifies filled characters using the current fill type refer to the FT command in Chapter 20 The Line and Fill Characteristics Group The currently selected pen is used Characters are not edged If the edge pen parameter is specified it is ignored 3 Specifies filled characters using the current fill type refer to the FT command in Chapter 20 The Line and Fill Characteristics Group The currently selected pen is used Characters are edged with the specified pen or current pen if the edge pen parameter is not specified Edge pen For characters that are to be edged this parameter indicates the pen that is used to edge the character black or white 0 No edging 1 Black edging The outline pen width is not selectable but varies in thickness in proportion to the point size of the font Note that the Absolute Direction DI and Relative Direction DR commands do not cause rotation of fill patterns Fill patterns remain fixed with respect to the current coordinate system The CF command remains in effect until another CF command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The edge pen width is not specifiable its thickness automatically increases in proportion with the point size CF Character Fill Mode 23 21 The thickness of fill lines for hatching and cross hatch is selected using the PW Pen Width command D
163. ce 5 4 pattern control 13 23 pattern ID 13 8 14 5 pattern transparency mode 13 7 Perforation Skip 5 19 pitch command 8 10 print direction 5 9 push pop cursor position 6 14 raster graphics presentation 15 8 raster graphics resolution 15 6 raster graphics start 15 14 Raster Height command 15 11 Raster Width command 15 13 raster y offset 15 15 Right Margin 5 14 Select Current Pattern command 13 12 Index 5 Select Default Font 8 27 Set Pattern Reference Point 13 22 Set Raster Compression Method 15 16 set status readback location type 16 8 set status readback location unit 16 9 simplex duplex print 4 5 Source Transparency Mode 13 6 spacing 8 9 stroke weight font selection 8 16 Style Font Selection 8 14 symbol set 8 6 symbol set control 10 12 symbol set ID code 10 2 Text Length 5 18 top margin 5 16 Top Offset Registration 4 8 transfer raster data 15 29 Transparent Print Data 8 28 typeface font selection 8 18 Underline command 8 29 Unit of Measure 4 13 Universal Exit Language 4 3 user defined pattern 13 16 Vertical Cursor Position decipoints 6 11 Vertical Cursor Position PCL Units 6 12 vertical cursor position rows 6 9 Vertical Motion Index VMI 5 22 Vertical Picture Frame Size 18 9 Vertical Rectangle Size 14 4 Vertical Rectangle Size decipoints 14 4 Comment CO command 19 19 compatibility 1 1 component list 11 65 components Intellifont character descriptor 11 65 compound character 11 62 compound
164. ce control code is printed while in display functions mode The PC symbol sets do have printable characters defined in this range Troubleshooting Commands 24 13 Auto Continue Mode Automatic error clearing refer to the printer User s Manual for a list of clearable errors can be achieved by setting Auto Continue Mode to ON using the Operator Control Panel configuration menu When Auto Cont is set to ON the device displays a message for 10 seconds and then attempts to continue printing the job When Auto Cont mode is set to OFF all errors cause the device to stop printing 24 14 Programming Hints EN Common Errors EN 20 ERROR This error occurs when the printer runs out of memory during a font download macro creation raster graphic download or page composition To alleviate this error the quantity of data sent to the printer must be reduced This can be accomplished by eliminating unnecessary fonts or macros reducing the raster graphics white space sent to the printer or selecting a lower resolution for the raster graphics An alternative solution is to install additional memory Additional memory is available from your Hewlett Packard Sales Representative or authorized dealer 21 ERROR This error results when a page is too complex to print The error can be corrected by reducing the complexity of the page or by enabling Page Protection mode from the control panel Refer to the Print Overrun secti
165. cify a label origin of 18 LBLeft center offset Print Left center offset PUO 500 Cl10 LO13 Lift the pen draw another small circle and specify label origin number 13 LBRight offset from point Print Right offset from point PA500 0 CI10 LO3 Move to 500 0 draw another small circle dot and specify label origin number 3 LBRight hang from point Print the last label Right hang from point FC960A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 23 64 The Character Group EN Note EN 0 500 Centered zon point 500 0 Left center offset Right hang from point 500 0 Right offset from point 0 500 The pen position at the end of the label string depends on whether two successive LB commands concatenate together as though only one label was given The DV LO combinations which permit concatenation are Table 23 35 Text Path Label Origin DVO right LO s 1 2 3 and 11 12 13 21 DV1 down LO s 3 6 9 and 13 16 19 DV2 left LO s 7 8 9 and 17 18 19 DV3 up LO s 1 4 7 and 11 14 17 21 The following two rules determine where the pen is positioned after a label string is drawn Rule 1 is for DV LO combinations which permit concatenation rule 2 clarifies other DV LO combinations 1 Ifa concatenation combination is specified the pen position is updated to give the normal delta X space betwee
166. command establishes new or default locations for the scaling points P1 and P2 P1 and P2 are used by the Scale SC command to establish user unit scaling You can also use IP in advanced techniques such as printing mirror images enlarging reducing drawings and enlarging reducing relative character size or changing label direction see the previous discussion in this chapter IP Xp Ypi Xp2 Ypz or IP j Parameter Format Functional Range Default XpiYpiLXpo Ypo integer 2 to 230 1 see below The default location of P1 is the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame the default location of P2 is the upper right corner as shown in Figure 19 9 The default picture frame extends from the top margin to the bottom margin and from the left edge to the right edge of the logical page Physical Page 8128 10160 Plotter Units PCL Picture Frame 0 0 Plotter Units Figure 19 9 The Default P1 P2 Locations IP Input P1 and P2 19 23 e No Parameters Sets P1 and P2 to their default locations adjusted by any current axis rotation Note If an IP command without parameters is executed after the axes are rotated with the RO command P1 and P2 locations change to reflect the rotation If the coordinate system orientation subsequently changes e g by sending an RO command the plotter unit position is maintained with respect to the new orientation e X Y Coordinates
167. command is in effect with or without parameters changes in P1 and P2 affect the size of characters in the currently selected font e No Parameters Defaults the relative character width to 0 75 of the distance P2X P1X and the height to 1 596 of the distance P2Y P1Y e Width Sets the character width to the specified percentage of the distance between the X coordinates of P1 and P2 A negative width parameter mirrors labels in the right to left direction Changing character size also changes the apparent stroke weight of labels the printer adjusts characters relative to changes in P1 P2 As long as the aspect ratio remains the same with changes in P1 P2 characters will have the same appearance relative to the new P1 P2 rectangle e Height Sets the character height to the specified percentage of the distance between the Y coordinates of P1 and P2 A negative height parameter mirrors labels in the top to bottom direction SR Relative Character Size 23 81 The character size you specify with SR is a percentage of P2X P1X and P2Y P1Y The printer calculates the actual character width and height from the specified parameters as follows actual width width parameter 100 x P2y P1y actual height height parameter 100 x P2 Pty For example suppose P1 and P2 are located at 6956 4388 and 6956 4388 respectively If you establish relative sizing and specify a width of 2 and a height
168. condary Font LB Label SA Select Alternate Symbol set SD Standard Font Definition EN SS Select Standard Font 23 85 TD Transparent Data This command specifies whether control characters perform their associated function or print as characters when labeling Use the TD command to print characters that function only as control characters in normal mode TD mode or TD Table 23 54 Parameter Format Functional Range Default mode clamped integer 0 or 1 0 normal The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameters Defaults the labeling mode to normal Equivalent to TDO e Mode Selects the normal or transparent data mode for labeling e 0 Normal Control codes with an associated functionality perform their function and do not print Refer to the symbol set tables in Appendix B of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide e 1 Transparent All characters print and perform no other function except the currently defined label terminator which terminates the label The printer prints a space for non printing or undefined characters Transparent data mode must be enabled to access printable characters which have character codes with an associated functionality in normal mode For example the left arrow in the PC 8 symbol set has a character code of 27 In normal mode a character code of 27 is interpreted as an escape character Eo in transparent data mode a character code
169. ction using the cosine and sine of 270 and print __ 1995 Carriage Return DI 1 0 LB 1996 CR Set the label direction using the cosine and sine of 180 and print __ 1996 Carriage Return EG 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page DI Absolute Direction 23 35 3500 2500 Figure 23 20 Table 23 16 point 9661 2 B Carriage return Related Commands Group CF Character Fill Mode CP Character Plot DR Relative Direction DV Define Variable Text Path LB Label SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant SR Relative Character Size The Character Group Table 23 17 POSSIBLE ERROR CONDITIONS Error Condition Printer Response both parameters 0 or number out of range ignores command 23 36 The Character Group EN DR Relative Direction This command specifies the direction in which labels are drawn relative to the scaling points P1 and P2 Label direction is adjusted when P1 and P2 change so that labels maintain the same relationship to the scaled data Use DR to change labeling direction when you are labeling curves DR run rise or DR Table 23 18 Parameter Format Functional Range Default run clamped 32768 to 32767 1 of P2y P1x real rise clamped 32768 to 32767 0 real The DR command updates the C
170. cursor position when entering and leaving HP GL 2 mode Typical HP GL 2 PlotCommand Sequence 18 7 Note If you have a page size independent HP GL 2 image there is no need to set plot size otherwise it is good practice to set plot size The commands that allow you to set up a PCL Picture Frame and enter exit HP GL 2 mode are discussed in detail in the rest of this chapter By reading the following command descriptions you can see how changing command parameters can affect your printed output Horizontal Picture Frame Size This PCL command specifies the horizontal dimension of the window to be used for printing an HP GL 2 plot Ec c xX it Horizontal size in decipoints 1 720th inch Default width of the current logical page Range 0 32767 valid to 4 decimal places Note The horizontal dimension specified is parallel to the PCL X axis when the print direction is set to 0 degrees the default Using this command defaults the location of P1 to the lower left corner of the picture frame and P2 to the upper right corner of the picture frame It also resets the soft clip window to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries clears the polygon buffer and updates the HP GL 2 pen position to the lower left corner of the picture frame P1 as viewed from the current orientation If no horizontal picture frame size command is used the printer defaults the picture frame size to the logical page width A parameter value of 0 or the PCL rese
171. d 21 4 21 42 RT command 20 7 20 48 example 20 49 rule Glossary 12 black 13 12 white 13 12 run and rise measuring 23 31 run length adaptive compression 15 25 encoding character data 11 54 raster graphics compression 15 16 S SA command 23 66 SB command 23 31 23 67 SC command 17 20 17 24 19 4 19 15 19 40 SC possible error conditions table 19 46 scalable defined Glossary 12 bound font header 11 10 character descriptor 11 62 compound character 11 62 fonts 7 2 7 9 11 2 23 20 fonts status readback 16 12 typeface 7 9 unbound font also see unbound font 9 8 unbound font header 11 11 Scalable or Bitmap Fonts command 23 31 23 67 Scale command 17 20 17 24 19 4 19 15 19 40 scale factor font header 11 34 scaling 17 24 effect on current units 17 11 parameters 19 45 picture frame scaling factor 18 1 points P1 and P2 17 24 19 4 possible error conditions for SC table 19 46 type 0 anisotropic 19 41 type 1 isotropic 19 41 type two point factor 19 44 types 19 4 19 40 user units 17 20 EN EN user units pictured 19 5 Screened Vectors command 22 39 screening area fill 22 39 SD command 23 68 example 23 73 secondary font 8 5 Glossary 10 HP GL 2 23 56 HP GL 2 23 18 secured paper source 24 4 seed row 15 20 15 22 adaptive compression 15 27 raster graphic termination 15 15 segment identifier Format 15 11 40 segment size Format 15 font header 11 41 segmented font data Format 15 11 39
172. d 23 11 23 44 DTR polarity Glossary 4 Duplex Page Side Selection command 4 10 duplex printing 4 5 duplicate row adaptive compression 15 25 DV command 23 9 23 29 23 30 23 37 23 46 example 23 49 E E Printer Reset 4 2 EA command 21 3 21 17 Echo command 16 25 edge pen 23 21 Edge Polygon command 21 21 Edge Rectangle Absolute command 21 17 Edge Rectangle Absolute command 21 3 Edge Rectangle Relative command 21 3 21 23 Edge Wedge EW command 21 7 21 27 edging 21 3 effective window 17 19 19 30 20 2 eject page 19 33 Em defined 7 5 empty row adaptive compression 15 25 encoded symbol set user defined symbol set 10 6 encoding raster data 15 2 encoding X Y coordinates 20 34 20 37 End Raster Graphics command 15 30 ending labels 23 11 end of line wrap command 24 12 end of text character 23 11 23 44 enlarging reducing HP GL 2 images 19 8 Enter HP GL 2 Mode command 18 13 Enter PCL Mode command 18 14 entity 16 3 entity status readback 16 3 environment factory default 3 1 3 2 macro overlay 3 1 modified print 3 1 3 7 reset 3 8 user default 3 1 3 6 4 2 EP command 21 21 example 21 21 ER command 21 3 21 23 erase pattern 14 9 error clearing automatic 24 14 error codes entity status readback 16 19 ES command 23 8 23 16 23 51 escape character amp esc 1 3 Glossary 4 escape sequences defined 1 3 Glossary 4 example 1 7 group character 1 6 parameter character 1 6 parameterized 1 5 printer commands
173. d 30x fill a rectangle with the just specified fill using the rectangle bounded at the lower left corner by current the pen location and a point 2500 X units and 300 Y units away as the upper right corner PR0 300 FT10 36 Move the pen position up 300 plu specify RR2500 300 the fill type as 3696 shading fill a rectangle ER2500 300 with 36 shading with the lower left corner being the current pen location and the upper right corner 2500 plu to the right and 300 plu up from there edge the outline of the same rectangle 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page jen 2900 Figure 22 10 22 14 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Table 22 7 RF Raster Fill Definition Related Commands Group LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge FP Fill Polygon The Polygon Group CF Character Fill Mode The Character Group SV Screened Vectors The Line and Fill Attributes Group LA Line Attributes Specifies how line ends and line joins are physically shaped Use this command when drawing lines thicker than 0 35 mm LA kind value kind value kind value or LA Parameter Format Functional Range Default kind clamped integer 1 through 3 1 value clamped integer Kind 1
174. d P2 mode clamped integer 0 or 1 0 relative The LT command applies to lines drawn by the AA AR AT Cl EA EP ER EW FP PA PD PE PR RA RR RT and WG commands Line types are drawn using the current line attributes set by the Line Attribute LA command For example if you have used LA to specify rounded ends the printer draws each dash in a dashed line pattern with rounded ends e No Parameters Defaults the line type to solid and saves the previous line type pattern length and any unused portion of the pattern residue e Line Type Subsequent lines are drawn with the corresponding line pattern Line patterns can be of fixed or adaptive type 22 22 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN e Positive line types 1 8 are fixed line types and use the specified pattern length to draw lines Any unused part of the pattern the residue is carried over into the next line The residue is saved when any of the following commands are received Cl EA EP ER EW FP PM RA RR or WG The residue is restored when the current pen position is restored upon completion of these HP GL 2 commands e The following commands clear current residue and vector end points Table 22 11 Commands that Affect LT1 LT8 Command Group AC Anchor Corner LA Line Attributes LT Line Type except LT and LT99 PW Pen Width RF Raster Fill Definition SPSelect Pen TR Transparency Mode UL User D
175. d printing location without drawing a line Use the Pen Down PD command with X Y coordinates to lower the pen and begin drawing from the current location to the first specified X Y coordinate Upon entering HP GL 2 mode for the first time following a reset FE command no pen has been selected and the pen is up This means that no lines are drawn when HP GL commands are given until a pen is selected This can be done using the Select Pen SP command Most drawing commands require that the pen be lowered to produce marks on the page Once lowered with a Pen Down PD command the pen remains down for subsequent HP GL 2 printing commands until a Pen Up PU or Initialize IN command is issued The pen remains selected until a new SP command is received You must be aware of the pen s up down status to avoid drawing stray lines between parts of your picture Upon entry into HP GL 2 mode a good programming practice is to select a pen and command a pen up move to the initial starting position This ensures that a pen is selected and is in the proper position to begin drawing Every time you use a PU or PD command the printer updates the pen up down status The following table shows the commands that include an automatic PD command as part of their function After performing their complete function they return the pen to its previous up down state Pen Status and Location 17 21 Table 17 8 Commands That Include an Automatic Pen Down
176. dback 16 3 16 8 location unit status readback 16 3 16 9 location in font selection 8 24 LOCTYPE status response 16 11 LOCUNIT status response 16 11 logical page 2 2 17 19 Glossary 7 boundaries 2 7 2 8 orientation 7 8 17 17 logical pen 20 31 long edge binding mode 4 5 lost mode HP GL 2 17 11 LT command 22 2 22 22 M macro 12 1 24 8 defined Glossary 7 call 12 4 cartridge 12 1 cartridge ID number 12 8 Control command 12 7 creation 12 3 custom made 12 1 deleting 4 2 12 5 12 6 12 7 enabling 12 7 entity 16 3 execute 12 4 HP GL 2 mode 12 4 ID number assigning 12 3 invocation 12 4 12 7 letterhead example 12 9 Macro ID command 12 6 nesting 12 7 overlay 12 4 12 5 24 8 permanent 12 5 12 7 ROM based 12 8 SIMM 12 1 start definition 12 7 status readback 16 10 16 16 stop definition 12 7 temporary 12 5 12 7 using within another macro 12 7 Macro Control command 12 7 Macro ID command 12 6 macro overlay environment 3 1 manual overview v manuals related x I Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format x IIPCL 5 Comparison Guide x IISoftware Application Notes vi I TrueType Font File Specification x margins bottom 5 18 clearing 5 15 left 5 13 resetting 5 15 right 5 14 text area 24 4 top 5 16 master font size 11 4 Master Symbol List MSL I Isee also MSL 9 11 defined Glossary 8 master underline Index 13 Index 14 position field 11 34 thickness field 11 34 master x resolution pattern descriptor
177. dges and rectangles defined using the EA ER EW RA RR and WG commands EP accesses the data in the polygon buffer but does not clear the buffer or change the data in any way The EP command only edges between points that were defined with the pen down using the current pen line type and attributes When the command execution is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored The following example creates a shape in polygon mode then uses EP to outline it Table 21 10 Example Using the EP Command E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black PA2000 10 Specify absolute plotting and move to position 2000 10 PMO PD10 2000 10 10 Enter polygon mode store a pen down 2000 10 PM1 command and then store points 10 2000 10 10 and 2000 10 Close the polygon PU610 610 CI500 PM2 While still in polygon mode lift the pen and move to 610 610 Draw a circle with a diameter of 500 plu then close the current subpolygon and exit polygon mode EP Edge Polygon 21 21 Table 21 10 Example Using the EP Command continued EP Outline the polygon that was just stored in the polygon buffer 950A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 10 2000 610 610 10 10 2000 10 Figure 21 14 Table 21 11 Related Commands Group EA Edge Rect
178. dth to 1 mm select character fill mode 3 fill amp edge and edge with pen number 1 black print the letter B PW 5 LBC Set the pen width to 5 mm to change the thickness of the fill lines print the letter C Fe960A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page EE Figure 23 11 Table 23 9 Related Commands Groups DI Absolute Direction The Character Group DR Relative Direction SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Characteristics Group CF Character Fill Mode 23 23 CP Character Plot This command moves the pen the specified number of spaces and lines from the current pen location Use CP to position a label for indenting centering etc CP spaces lines or CP Parameter Format Functional Range Default spaces clamped real 32768 to 32767 no default lines clamped real 32768 to 32767 no default The CP Character Plot command includes an automatic pen up When the command is completed the original pen up down status is restored CP moves the pen position in relation to the current position CP is a movement command and does not affect the margin to repeat the same movement for subsequent labels you must issue new CP commands For information about the Carriage Return point see Moving to the Carriage Return Point in the Printing Labels discussion near the beginning of
179. e 5 E COA Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 25 10 1050 1060 5 X 0 0 1000 0 2000 0 Figure 20 9 Table 20 7 Related Commands Group AT Absolute Arc Three Point The Vector Group BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute AR Arc Relative Cl Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point 20 12 The Vector Group EN Table 20 7 LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width AR Arc Relative Note EN This command draws an arc using relative coordinates which starts at the current pen location and pivots around the specified center point AR Xincrement Yincrement Sweep angle chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default Xincrement Yincrement current 230 to 230 4 no default units sweep angle clamped 32768 to 32767 no default real chord angle clamped 0 5 to 180 5 real The AR command draws the arc starting at the current pen location using the current pen up down status line type and attributes After drawing the arc the pen location remains at the end of the arc Do not use an adaptive line type when drawing arcs with small chord angles The printer attempts to draw the complete pattern in every chord there are 72 chords in a circle using the default chord angle 9 Xincrement YIncrem
180. e This chapter explains these PCL commands The following terms are used in this discussion Picture presentation directives are a group of PCL commands which e Provide the means to enter and exit HP GL 2 context e Define a delimiting rectangle for the graphic image e Specify a scaling factor so existing HP GL 2 graphics can be scaled and placed anywhere on the PCL logical page Picture frame refers to the destination rectangle when transferring HP GL 2 graphics into the PCL logical page The PCL picture frame size commands specify the size of the destination rectangle Picture frame scaling factor is the ratio of the size of the picture frame to the size of the source HP GL 2 plot There may actually be two scaling factors one for the x direction and one for the y direction Picture frame anchor point refers to the upper left corner of the picture frame which is set to the current active position CAP in the PCL environment at the time the picture frame anchor point command is executed Introduction 18 1 Defining the Image Area PCL Picture Frame There is a group of commands that allows you to specify an area on the page for placing an HP GL 2 graphic image These commands are the Picture Presentation Directives and are used to define a bounding rectangle to contain the HP GL 2 image Figure 18 1 illustrates the Picture Presentation Directives The rectangular area surrounding the image is the PCL Picture Frame and t
181. e background you must set transparency mode to OFF TRO e 1 Selects the black pen numbers greater than 1 are also interpreted as 1 Use the Pen Width PW command to change the line width You may change widths as often as you like without sending an SP command again Note If you are not using the Transparency Mode TR command white is always transparent For more information on the Transparency Mode command see the TR command description later in this chapter 22 38 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Table 22 20 Related Commands Group PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group WU Pen Width Unit Selection TR Transparency Mode SV Screened Vectors EN This command selects the type of screening area fill to be applied to vectors Options include lines hatching patterns fill types 3 and 4 arcs circles edges of polygons rectangles wedges and PCL user defined patterns SV does not affect solid fill types stroked characters or edges of characters SV screen type option1 option2 or SV Parameter Format Functional Range Default screen type clamped 0 1 2 21 22 No screening solid integer option option2 clamped type dependent type dependent integer Refer to the table following the parameter descriptions There are four types of screen fill shaded fill HP GL 2 user defined raster fill predefined PCL c
182. e if there is only one digit in a number it is in the high range Table 20 24 Procedure to encode a number STEPS EXAMPLE 1 Fraction adjustment If you are X 82 83 using fractional data this step converts the number of decimal places in your data to the number of binary fractional bits Assume n is the number of fractional binary bits specified by the fractional data flag a Multiply the number of decimal 2 x 3 33 6 66 places contained in the data by 3 33 b Round that number up to the next integer to get integer n n round decimal places amp times n 7 3 33 x x amp times 2 x 82 83 x 2 10 525 42 PE Polyline Encoded 20 37 Table 20 24 Procedure to encode a number continued 2 Round to an integer Round the results of step 1 to the nearest integer X round x x round 10 525 42 10 525 3 Set the sign bit If x is positive multiply it by two If x is negative multiply the absolute value of x by two and add one This sets the sign bit if x amp geq 0 X 2xxX X 2 x 10 525 21 050 else X 2 x abs x 1 4 Convert the number to base 64 or 32 and encode the data Convert x to a base 64 number if your system sends 8 bits without parity Convert x to a base 32 number if your system sends 7 bits with parity seven bit flag is sent Encode each base 64 or 32 digit into the ASCII character range as described below Output each character as it is encoded starting
183. e systems out of alignment Table 19 5 Example Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System in Portrait Orientation EE Reset the printer EQ amp l2A Set the page size to letter Fe amp I0O Specify portrait orientation Fe amp I0E Set top margin to 0 Fe pOxoY Move to position 0 0 Fe c5760x7920Y Set picture frame to 8 x 11 size of logical page EC COT Set picture frame anchor point to current PCL cursor position 0 0 Fc961B Enter HP GL 2 mode with the HP GL 2 cursor or pen at the PCL cursor position Using Scaling Effectively 19 15 Table 19 5 Example Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System in Portrait Orientation IN SP1 Initialize HP GL 2 command values and select pen number 1 black The IN command moves the pen position from the anchor point to the HP GL 2 origin the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame SC0 3 3867 0 3 3867 2 Set up a user scale with a user unit equal to 1 300 inch Scale command type 2 the scale is the ratio of plotter units user units 1016 plotter units per inch 300 dots per inch 3 3867 The minus 2 Y value changes the HP GL 2 Y direction to match that of the PCL coordinate system IRO 100 0 100 Place P1 point 0 0 at the top of the PCL picture frame PUO 0 Lift the pen and move to 0 0 upper left corner since HP GL 2 coordinate system now matches PCL coordinate system
184. e Encoded 20 39 Table 20 26 Procedure for determining base range continued Next order digit 64ths place 63 126 6348 71 CHR 71 High order digit 4096ths place 191 254 191 4 5 196 CHR 196 Base 32 Encode all the low order 21 050 amp div 1024 20 digits into the ASCII range 63 to remainder 570 94 For a digit with value i use Li L ASCII character CHR 63 i Maud n Encode the highest order digit or the single digit in a one digit 20 1024ths place number into the range 95 to 126 17 32nds place 26 1 s place Low order digit 1 s range 63 94 63 26 89 CHR 89 Next order digit 32 s place 63 94 63 17 80 CHR 80 High order digit 1024ths place 95 126 95 202 115 CHR 115 20 40 The Vector Group EN Note EN When using PE in the default relative mode the application program does not know the current pen location after printing a label normally the current pen location is updated to the end of the label If this presents a problem in your program follow these steps 1 Create a flag called lost in your program 2 After labeling or any command which updates the current pen location set lost to true 3 If lost true at the beginning of the PE command use an absolute flag for the first coordinate pair only subsequent coordinates are interpreted as relative 4 Set lost to false At the beginning of your application program set lost to tr
185. e HP GL 2 functions to their default settings Use the IN command to return the printer to a known HP GL 2 state and to cancel settings that may have been changed by a previous command sequence The ESE Reset issues an automatic IN command IN In this manual all command sequence examples begin with IN to clear unwanted conditions from the previous command sequence even though an FcE command automatically executes an IN command Once HP GL 2 mode is entered and commands are issued the HP GL 2 conditions are no longer initialized To place HP GL 2 into the default state send the IN command IN Initialize 19 21 The IN command sets the printer to the same conditions as the DF command plus the following e Raises the pen PU e Returns the pen location to the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame PAO 0 e Cancels drawing rotation RO e Sets P1 and P2 to the lower left and upper right corners respectively of the PCL Picture Frame IP e Sets pen width mode to metric units are millimeters WU e Sets the pen width to 0 35 mm PW e Sets number of pens to 2 black 1 and white 0 Table 19 9 Affected Commands Group DF RO IP Configuration Status Group PD PU Vector Group WU PW Line and Fill Attributes Group Table 19 10 Related Commands Group DF Default Values Configuration Status Group 19 22 The Configuration and Status Group EN IP Input P1 and P2 This
186. e a series of subpolygons for example the letter D move the pen to the starting location of the first subpolygon then enter polygon mode Define the outer shape of the letter D using the appropriate commands and coordinates then close the subpolygon staying in polygon mode Define the inner shape of the D then exit polygon mode Now draw the subpolygons using either the Edge Polygon EP or Fill Polygon FP command For more information on entering and exiting polygon mode refer to the Polygon Mode PM command discussed in this chapter In polygon mode you can define points with the pen up or down However the Edge Polygon EP command only draws between points defined when the pen was down In contrast the Fill Polygon FP command fills between all points regardless of whether they were defined when the pen was up or down Exception the line connecting two subpolygons is never drawn and is not a fill boundary Filling Polygons There are two methods which can be selected for filling polygons the even odd fill method and the non zero winding fill method Even Odd Fill Method There is a simple way to determine which portions of a single polygon or series of subpolygons is filled when you send a Fill Polygon FP command using the default method 0 fill using even odd rule Draw a straight line extending from any point within an enclosed area of the polygon to a point outside the polygon FP fills the enclosed area in qu
187. e default HP GL 2 orientation the origin of the HP GL 2 coordinate system defaults to the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame HP GL 2 and PCL X coordinates increase in the same direction but the Y coordinates increase in opposite directions Notice that a change in the PCL logical page orientation changes the orientation of the PCL coordinate system and the HP GL 2 coordinate system X Y PCL Text Direction Anchor PEE a Point Default Label Direction Y Picture Frame 0 0 x Portrait Orientation Y PCL Text Direction HP GL 2 Anchor Default Label Point Y Direction 0 0 4x Landscape Orientation Figure 17 6 Orientation Interactions Between PCL and HP GL 2 The relationship between the coordinate systems can be changed using the HP GL 2 Rotate RO command Rotations specified by the RO command are relative to the default HP GL 2 orientation which matches the PCL orientation Figure 17 7 shows how the RO command modifies the default HP GL 2 orientation Note A change in PCL print direction has no effect on the HP GL 2 orientation the physical position of the picture frame or the picture frame anchor point EN HP GL 2 amp PCL Orientation Interactions 17 17 Logica Page Picture Frame ROO RO 90 Logical Page Picture Frame RO 180 RO 270 Figure 17 7 Modifying HP GL 2 Orientation on a Portrait Page 17 18 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vec
188. e determine the slope or angle of an imaginary line under the base of each character in the label Refer to the following illustration 4d Pd J 4 Rise ne be Figure 23 15 Character Slope Rise and Run When plotting in horizontal mode you have not used the DV command the run and rise appear to determine the slope of the entire label However if you have used the Define Variable Text Path DV command to label in a vertical path the label appears to slant in the opposite direction even though the base of each letter is plotted on the same slope The following illustration compares how labels plotted with the same run and rise parameters appear with horizontal DVO and vertical DV1 text paths 23 30 The Character Group EN Note EN Figure 23 16 Effect of Horizontal and Vertical Text Paths If an SB1 command has been sent the printer draws the label along the nearest perpendicular In the case of bisection the angle is rounded down e g 45 would round to 0 Refer to the following illustration Vector Font SBO Bitmap Font SB1 Figure 23 17 Scalable Versus Bitmap Variable Text Path Printing Suppose you want your label plotted in the direction shown in the following illustration You can do this in one of two ways measure the run and rise or measure the angle DI Absolute Direction 23 31 D18 5 4 9 D1 866 5 Figure 23 18Label Print Direction Rise and Run To measure the run and
189. e for relative mode and absolute mode If you do not specify the pattern length and mode parameters then the printer uses their current values When using relative mode and isotropic scaling the pattern length changes with changes to Xmin Y min and Xmax Y max An LT command remains in effect until another LT command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Complete pattern lengths Fixed LT6 Dots LT1 Complete pattern lengths Adaptive LT 6 Dots LTO Figure 22 18Fixed and Adaptive Line Types Table 22 13 Related Commands Group FT Fill Type The Line and Fill PW Pen Width Attributes Group UL User Defined Line Type LT Line Type 22 27 Table 22 13 AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point Cl Circle PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative RT Relative Arc Three Point The Vector Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge The Polygon Group 22 28 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN PW Pen Width EN This command specifies a new width for the logical pen Subsequent lines are drawn in this new width Use PW to vary your lines and enhance your drawings Pen width can be specified as a fixed value or relative to the distance between
190. e pen 5 spaces to the right and 35 lines up so that the label is placed just above the line DT 1 Define a label terminator and specify that it does not print SD1 21 2 1 4 14 5 0 6 3 7 4148 SS Designate a 14 point Univers Bold font and select it LBABOVE THE Print the first line of text The label text is LINE shown on two lines due to the column width restriction When coding a single line label it should all be placed on one line PA2500 2500 Move the pen to 2500 2500 and draw a dot WG20 0 360 marking the new Carriage Return point 360 black filled wedge with a diameter of 20 plu CP0 95LBBELOW THE LINECR LF WITH A NEAT Print the second line Carriage Return Line Feed print the third line CP LBMARGINS Print the fourth line Notice how the CP command without parameters functions as a CR LF FC960A Enter the PCL mode ESE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page CP Character Plot 23 27 ABOVE THE LINE BELOW THE LINE WITH A NEAT MARGIN Figure 23 14 Table 23 11 Related Commands DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction DV Define Variable Text Path ES Extra Space LB Label LO Label Origin SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SI Absolute Character Size SR Relative Character Size Group The Character Group 23 28 The Character Group EN DI Absolute Direction This command specifies the slope
191. ece of paper is to take advantage of the fact that P2 follows P1 whenever you change the location of P1 The following example illustrates this feature The example locates P1 and P2 on the left side of the paper and scales the area for the first image Then for the second image only the P1 location is moved to the right side of the paper P2 automatically tracks P1 so the printing area retains the same dimensions as the first drawing The printed rectangle around the second area shows P2 in its new location 19 10 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 3 Example Drawing Equal Size Pictures on a Page EGE Reset the printer EQ amp lt O Select landscape orientation E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode using the default picture frame size and anchor point IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode IP500 500 5450 7500 Set P1 to be 500 500 and P2 to be 5450 7500 C0 10 0 15 Set up user unit scaling to range from 0 0 to 10 15 SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PAO 0 Begin absolute plotting from the origin 0 0 PD10 0 10 15 0 15 0 0 PU Pen Down and print from 0 0 to 10 0 to 10 15 to 0 15 to 0 0 then Pen Up IP5550 500 Input a new P1 and allow P2 to automatically track it PAO 0 Begin absolute plotting from the new origin PD10 0 10 15 0 15 0 0 PU Pen Down and print from 0
192. ect fill type 3 parallel lines with 50 plu ER400 400 between each line Draw a rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner and a point 400 plu up and 400 plu to the right as the upper right corner Edge the rectangle PRO 400 FT4 Move 400 plu up from the current pen position RR400 400 Select fill type 4 cross hatching Draw a ER400 400 rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner the right corner being 400 400 relative plotter units away 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 21 44 The Polygon Group EN 800 2000 1 600 2000 EN 400 400 120 400 Figure 21 25 Table 21 25 Related Commands Group EA Edge Rectangle Absolute The Polygon Group EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute WG Fill Wedge This command defines and fills any wedge Use WG to draw filled sections of a pie chart WG radius start angle sweep angle chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default radius current unit 230 to Ber 4 start angle clamped real 32768 to 32767 sweep angle clamped real 360 chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5 EN WG Fill Wedge 21 45 The WG command defines and fills a wedge using the current pen fill type and line types The WG command includes an automatic pen down When the command
193. ed You can move the cursor to different points on the logical page using the cursor positioning commands however the cursor cannot be moved outside of the logical page bounds Macro A macro is a collection of escape sequences control codes and data downloaded to the printer whose execution can be initiated using a single command Menu A list of configurable items In the nomenclature of this document an item is one particular configurable entity such as Copies a R value is an item s particular configuration such as Copies 10 Modified Print Environment The current printer feature settings constitute the modified print environment Whenever a feature setting is altered using escape sequences the new setting is recorded in the modified print environment Glossary 7 Glossary 8 MSL Master Symbol List This is a group of symbols a symbol index An unbound font has the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary symbol index such as the MSL or Unicode symbol indexes Each symbol in the index is identified by a unique MSL number Appendix D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide contains the MSL symbol index Negative angle of rotation An angle used to create a plot in HP GL 2 which is rotated in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis Note that the relationship of the X axis to the Y axis can change as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes t
194. eed to specify the coordinates again PR2000 0 Specify relative plotting and move the cursor 2000 plu in the X direction from the current pen location FT4 100 45 Specify fill type number 4 cross hatching set the spacing to 100 plu between fill lines and set the fill line angle to 45 RR1500 1000 Fill a rectangle with the currently specified fill type Use the current pen location 0 0 as the lower left corner of the rectangle and a point 1500 1000 relative plu away for the upper right corner 950A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 1500 1000 3500 1000 0 0 2000 0 Figure 21 2 EN Drawing Rectangles 21 5 Drawing Wedges Note Note A wedge is a section of a circle Wedges are commonly used to draw pie charts You can draw a wedge by outlining edging the defined area using the Edge Wedge EW command or you can create filled wedges using the Fill Wedge WG command The wedge commands use your current pen location as the center point you specify the radius the start angle and the sweep angle The radius determines the length of the two sides of the wedge The sign positive or negative of the radius determines the location of a zero degree reference point The start angle is the number of degrees from the zero reference point at which you want to draw the first radius The sweep angle is the number of degrees through which y
195. efined Line Type WU Pen Width Unit Selection The Line and Fill Attributes Group DF Default Values IN Initialize IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale The Configuration and Status Group LT Line Type 22 23 A zero line type 0 draws only a dot at the X Y coordinates for AA AR AT Cl PA PD PR and RT commands Zero pen down values and zero length lines also produce dots A dot is a one plotter unit long vector drawn using the current line end and pen width Dots within lines are drawn at the correct angle but zero length vectors are drawn along the user s current X axis Negative line types 1 8 are adaptive line types The pattern length is automatically adjusted so that each line contains one or more complete patterns Line patterns are composed of alternate pen down and pen up moves which are percentages of the pattern length the first percentage is always pen down 99 LT99 restores the previous line type and residue if it is a fixed line type Note If a solid line type is selected LT when the LT99 command is issued and the current pen position has not changed the previously selected line type can be invoked using LT99 LT99 is ignored when a non solid line type is in effect or if the pen is in a different position than when the previous non solid line ended An example using this command is to print a line in a n
196. en SMA PA4000 400 Specify A as the new symbol and move to C1400 4000 400 draw a circle with a radius of 400 plu and print an A in the center SM PA2600 700 Specify as the new symbol and move to EA1500 200 2600 700 edge the outline of a rectangle and print an at the starting point 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 3 3 200 1000 38300 1100 3 700 500 l 2600 700 4000 400 Figure 22 21 Table 22 19 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute The Vector Group PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up EN SM Symbol Mode 22 37 SP Select Pen This command selects the printer s logical pen for subsequent plotting An SP command must be included at the beginning of each command sequence to enable the printer to draw SP pen number or SP Parameter Format Functional Range Default pen number integer 0 or 1 No pen Although your printer does not have physical pens for the purpose of compatibility it has a logical pen which you must select to print your drawing e No Parameters Cancels pen selection subsequent plotting commands are not drawn Equivalent to SPO e Pen Number Selects the printer s logical pen The printer will not draw unless an SP is sent e 0 Selects the white pen To see a white pen on a non whit
197. ent Specify the center of the arc relative to the current location The center of the arc is the center of the circle that would be drawn if the arc was 360 degrees Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If current scaling is not isotropic the arc drawn is elliptical rather than circular AR Arc Relative 20 13 e Sweep Angle Specifies in degrees the angle through which the arc is drawn A positive angle draws an angle in the positive direction angle of rotation a negative angle draws the angle in the negative direction e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 degrees Refer to the Arc Absolute AA command discussion earlier this chapter for information on setting and determining the chord angle Table 20 8 Example Using Arc Relative to Draw Arcs EGE Reset the printer FUB Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 1500 PD Specify the starting position as 1500 1500 and put the pen down AR0 2000 80 25 Draw an arc with a center point O plu in the X direction and 2000 plu in the Y direction from 1500 1500 Specify the arc section to be 80 positive angle with a chord angle of 25 AR2000 0 80 Draw an arc with a cent
198. ent to prevent clipping except at very narrow join angles miter limit miter limit Clipped mitered join Maximum clipped mitered join beveled join Figure 22 15 Miter Limit Clipping An LA command remains in effect until another LA command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions EN LA Line Attributes 22 19 The following example draws an electrical ground symbol using the LA command Table 22 9 Example Using the LA Command E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA4000 3000 Specify absolute plotting and move the pen to 4000 3000 PW2 LA1 3 Set the pen width to 2 mm specify a triangular PD3500 2500 line end place the pen down and draw from the 4000 2000 current location to 3500 2500 then to 4000 2000 PU3500 2500 Lift the pen and move to 3500 2500 set the LA2 2 3 20 line join to mitered beveled and the miter limit to PD3000 2500 20 set the pen down and draw a line to 3000 2300 3000 2500 then to 3000 2300 PU2500 2300 LA1 4 Lift the pen and move it to 2500 2300 specify round line ends and draw a line to 3500 2300 PD3500 2300 PU2700 2100 Lift the pen and move to 2700 2100 then set PD3300 2100 the pen down and draw a line to 3300 2100 PU2900 1900 PD31
199. er 40 plotter units Each user unit is 1 millimeter SC0 1 016 0 1 016 2 allows scaling in thousandths of an inch since 1 inch 2 1016 plotter units While scaling is on after any form of the SC command has been executed only those HP GL 2 commands that can be issued in current units are interpreted as user units the commands that can be issued only in plotter units are still interpreted as plotter units The command syntax discussion pertaining to each command tells you which kind of units each parameter requires The SC parameters are mapped onto the current locations of P1 and P2 P1 and P2 do not represent a graphic limit therefore the new user unit coordinate system extends across the entire range of the plotter unit coordinate system Thus you can print to a point beyond P1 or P2 as long as you are within the effective window For example you can print from the point 1 3 5 to the point 5 5 1 5 as shown in the following illustration SC Scale 19 45 PCL Picture Frame P1 0 0 user units P2 5 5 user units Figure 19 20 Example Printing point to point Table 19 22 Related Commands IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window Group The Configuration Status Group Table 19 23 Possible Error Conditions for SC Condition Printer Response no parameters turns scaling off more than 7 parameters executes first 7 parameters for types
200. er point 2000 plu in the X direction and 0 plu in the Y direction from the current pen position Specify the arc section to be 80 positive angle with a default chord angle 5 E KOA Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 14 The Vector Group EN 1500 3500 e of 25 Relative Move 0 2000 1500 1500 Figure 20 10 Table 20 9 Chord angle Relative Move 2000 0 Default chord angle of 5 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN AR Arc Relative 20 15 AT Absolute Arc Three Point This command draws an arc segment using absolute coordinates from a starting point through an intermediate point to an end point Use AT when you know these three points of an arc AT Xinter Yinter Xend Yend chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default Xinten Yinter current units 290 to 290 4 no default Xena Yend current units 290 to 230 4 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5 The AT command uses the current pen location and two specified points to calculate a circle and draw the appropriate arc segment of its circumference The arc starts at
201. ers per inch varies for proportionally spaced fonts PJL PJL Printer Job Language commands provide job level control such as the ability to switch printer languages or personalities such as PCL to PostScript between jobs PJL also provides two way communications with the printer PUL can also be used to change the printer s control panel settings and modify the message displayed on the control panel Point A PCL point is a unit of measurement that equals 1 72nd inch Font height is measured in points Positive angle of rotation An angle used to create a plot in HP GL 2 which is rotated in the direction from the X axis to the Y axis Note that the relationship of the X axis to the Y axis can change as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive angle of rotation See Drawing Arcs in Chapter 20 for more information Primary Secondary Font A PCL convention whereby two fonts can be defined internally simultaneously The primary font is accessed via the control code SI and the secondary font is accessed via the control code SO The factory default state is primary font designated Printable Area The printable area is the area of the physical page in which the printer is able to place a dot The physical page refers to the size of the media installed in the printer The relationship between physical page logical page and printable area is defined
202. es font as 5 0 6 0 7 4101 the standard primary font SI 7 1 PA1000 1000 Set the absolute character size to 7 cm wide by 1 cm high establish absolute plotting and move to 1000 1000 DT 1 Specify a label terminator SL 36 LBSlant Set the slant angle for 20 from vertical forward slant and print Slant SL Character Slant 23 79 Table 23 49 Example Using the SL Command continued PA1000 300 Move to 1000 300 change the slant SL 36 LBSlant angle to 20 from upright and print Slant EG 0A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Slant 1000 1000 Slant 1000 300 Figure 23 39 Table 23 50 Related Commands Group LB Label DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts The Character Group 23 80 The Character Group EN SR Relative Character Size Note EN This command specifies the size of characters as a percentage of the distance between P1 and P2 Use SR to establish relative character size so that if the P1 P2 distance changes the character size adjusts to occupy the same relative amount of space SR width height or SR Functional Parameter Format Range Default width clamped real 32768 to 0 75 of P2X P1X 32767 height clamped real 32768 to 1 596 of P2Y P1Y 32767 While the SR
203. es to stretch with aspect ratio changes of the drawing anisotropic scaling may produce an ellipse For more information refer to Chapter 19 for a scaling discussion and for the Scale SC command description EN Cl Circle 20 25 Anisotropic scaling Figure 20 15 Isotropic scaling Table 20 16 Example Effects of Chord Angle on Circle Smoothness ELE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black SC 3000 3000 2000 2000 1 Specify scaling mode making P1 equal to 3000 2000 user units and P2 equal to 3000 2000 user units Isotropic scaling is specified PA 1700 2000 CI750 45 Specify absolute plotting and move to 1700 2000 the center of the circle to be drawn Draw a circle with a radius of 750 user units and a chord angle of 45 PA300 2000 CI750 30 Specify absolute plotting and move to 300 2000 to draw another circle Draw this circle with a radius of 750 user units and a chord angle of 30 20 26 The Vector Group EN Table 20 16 Example Effects of Chord Angle on Circle Smoothness continued PA 1700 200 CI750 15 Specify absolute plotting and move to 1700 200 the center point of a third circle Draw this circle with a radius of 750 user units and a chord angle of 15 PA300 200 CI750 Specify absolute plotting and move to 300 200 the center of the fourth
204. estion only if the line you have drawn intersects the edges of the polygon an odd number of times Figure 21 8 illustrates this odd even rule 21 12 The Polygon Group EN The line intersects the polygon once odd filled The line intersects the polygon twice even not filled Single polygon Two subpolygons Figure 21 8 Filling Polygons Even Odd Fill Method Non Zero Winding Fill Method The non zero winding fill algorithm fill method 1 determines whether a point is inside a region enclosed by a line path using the following steps 1 Draw a ray from the point across the path segment 2 Add 1 every time the line segment crosses the ray from left to right or bottom to top 3 Subtract 1 every time the segment crosses the ray from right to left or top to bottom 4 FP fills the enclosed area in question if the sum of steps 2 and 3 is non zero Figure 21 9 illustrates the non zero winding fill concept EN Drawing Polygons 21 13 TWO SUBPOLYGONS SINGLE POLYGON Subtract 1 0 Add 1 2 The enclosed The area is NOT j va enclosed filled area IS filled Starting Point Add 1 1 Starting Point Subtract 1 2 The enclosed area IS filled Subtract 1 1 Starting Point Figure 21 9 Filling Polygons Non Zero Winding Fill Method Drawing Circles in Polygon Mode Polygon mode interprets the Circle Cl command differently than the other HP GL 2 commands The printer treats a circle as a
205. feed and Plot CP a width extending from the beginning of one Cell character to the beginning of the next The printer implements the following different types of fonts e Scalable outline font e Bitmap font e HP GL 2 Stick and Arc font These are described in more detail in Using Fonts later in this chapter Figure 23 6 and Figure 23 7 show each type of font in relation to its character cell Proportional fonts do not actually have a fixed character cell The width occupied by each character depends on the character s shape Scalable Outline Bitmap Line Feed _4 Point size Cap Height Point Size cap Height Line Feed 4 Character idt i C ter 2 H Character Plot Baseline Width Baseline Pees H Character Plot Cell Width Figure 23 6 Scalable and Bitmap Character Cell Working with the Character Cell 23 13 Stick definition grid 64 48 oO u fa 7 J e 92 zi a L o 0 Character Width Baseline k Character Plot Cell Width Figure 23 7 Stick Font Character Cell When you use the SI Absolute Character Size or SR Relative Character Size commands to change the size of the characters or use the ES Extra Space command to add extra space around them you alter the size of the CP Character Plot cell You can control almost all aspects of the label s appearance its position size slant
206. fill examples 14 13 fill transparency mode 14 11 Fill command 14 9 fill procedure 14 1 Horizontal Size command 14 3 pattern transparency mode 14 2 position 14 10 rectangular area definition 14 1 transparency mode 14 10 Vertical Size command 14 4 reducing enlarging HP GL 2 images 19 8 registration text 4 7 Top Offset command 4 8 related manuals x I Intellifont Scalable Typeface Format x IIPCL 5 Comparison Guide x IISoftware Application Notes vi ITrueType Font File Specification x Relative Arc Three Point command 20 48 Relative Character Size command 23 8 23 14 23 81 relative cursor positioning 6 2 24 5 Relative Direction command 23 9 23 21 23 37 relative vs absolute pen movement 17 25 Replot command 19 39 reset 24 3 Glossary 11 cold 3 9 key 3 8 margins 5 15 printer 3 8 Reset command 19 3 resetting environments 3 8 resolution 14 2 defined Glossary 12 defined 2 3 fonts 8 5 print default 2 3 raster graphics printing 15 6 response status see also status readback 16 11 16 22 reverse landscape orientation 5 5 reverse portrait orientation 5 5 RF command 22 32 Right Margin command 5 14 RO command 17 17 19 24 19 34 RO command 19 28 robust Xon Glossary 12 ROM based font 7 2 8 3 macros 12 8 Rotate Coordinate System RO command 17 17 19 24 19 28 19 34 rotation fonts 7 8 row Glossary 12 row height 5 22 rows and columns 2 5 6 4 rows zeroed in raster graphics 15 2 RP command 19 39 RR comman
207. finition and AD Alternate Font Definition commands e Width Specifies the width of the nominal character in centimeters A negative width parameter mirrors labels in the right to left direction Changing character size also changes the width of line used to draw Stick font characters e Height Specifies the cap height in centimeters A negative height parameter mirrors labels in the top to bottom direction Note that in most languages the width of a letter is typically less than the height If you set your characters to have a different aspect ratio they may look odd to your readers An SI command remains in effect until another SI command is executed an SR command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions 23 74 The Character Group EN Notes EN If the SB1 command is in effect an SI command may not be executed accurately Labels are rendered using the bitmap font that most closely approximates the character height or width specified by SI character size is determined by height for proportional fonts and by width for fixed spaced fonts When SB1 is in effect characters cannot be mirrored with negative SI parameters Example Using the SI Command The following example demonstrates the SI command using both the default Stick typeface and the Univers typeface The samples on the left were printed using the Stick font first using the default 11 5 point and then specifying
208. following occurs 1 If the original page length or page size is different than the current page length and page size the current page is closed and printed the page length and page size are changed to their original value and the cursor is positioned at the left edge of the logical page at the top margin on the following page 2 If the primary or secondary font is deleted a new primary or secondary font is automatically selected from the remaining fonts using the current font characteristics HP GL 2 is supported within a macro on some printers refer to the PCL Feature Support Matrix in Chapter 1 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide HP GL 2 implementation within macros matches that of PCL Macro problems can often be avoided by first ensuring that the data formats outside the macro environment 24 8 Programming Hints EN HP GL 2 Vector Graphics There are different approaches commands and techniques that can be used to create an HP GL 2 image To assist in determining the most efficient approach to creating an image several points are identified below e When using line caps and joins Most efficient Round join with butt cap Least efficient Round join with triangular cap e When using text if you want the character to be printed at the same location as it would in PCL use label origin position 21 see Label Origin command in Chapter 23 e Default pen widths 5 dots wide or less produce the highest speed e
209. g Y coordinate the printer ignores the last unmatched coordinate Table 20 21 Related Commands Group PA Plot Absolute The Vector Group PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative PU Pen Up LA Line Attributes Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width SM Symbol Mode PD Pen Down 20 33 PE Polyline Encoded This command incorporates the PA PR PU PD and SP commands into an encrypted format that substantially decreases the size of your file and the time required for data transmission This command is especially useful when using an RS 232 C interface PE flag value coord_pair flag value coord_pair or PE Note Parameter values are self terminating do not use commas with this command Also you must use a semicolon to terminate PE Parameter Format Functional Range Default flag character sw 2 Oor no default value character flag dependent coordinate pair character 230 to 230 1 no default Refer to the table following the parameter description Lines are drawn using the current line type and current units The printer draws to all points with the pen down unless a pen up flag precedes the X Y coordinates If the final move is made with the pen up the pen remains in the up position otherwise the pen is left in the down position The PE command causes the printer to interpret coordinate pairs as relative coordinates unless they a
210. g in HP GL 2 mode 21 10 buffer 21 1 21 2 buffer use 21 14 counting points in 21 15 definition commands summary 21 10 drawing circles in polygon mode 21 14 filling 21 12 mode 21 1 21 10 Polygon Group HP GL 2 commands 21 1 Polygon Group HP GL 2 commands 17 4 Polygon Mode PM command 21 34 Polyline Encoded PE command 20 34 pop cursor positioning 6 14 portrait defined Glossary 8 character data example 11 71 orientation 5 5 print boundaries 2 7 position orientation of logical page 7 8 position rectangular area 14 10 positioning cursor 2 2 cursor defined Glossary 1 page data 6 1 text 23 24 positive angle of rotation 20 7 Glossary 10 posture HP GL 2 23 71 PR command 20 44 predefined shading patterns 14 1 primary font 8 5 Glossary 10 HP GL 2 23 85 print boundaries 2 7 2 8 print data processing time 24 10 print direction 17 17 Print Direction command 5 9 print environment 3 1 defined Glossary 11 factory default 3 5 HP GL 2 19 3 modified 3 7 print job separation 4 11 print model 13 1 13 2 command sequence 13 5 current pattern 13 2 destination image 13 1 13 2 opaque mode 13 3 pattern 13 2 pattern ID area fill ID command 13 8 pattern transparency mode 13 1 13 2 13 7 rectangular areas pattern ID command 13 8 Select Current Pattern command 13 12 source image 13 1 13 2 source transparency mode 13 1 13 2 13 6 transparent mode 13 3 print overrun 24 10 print overrun ERROR 21 24 15 print resolut
211. g the Scale Command 19 5 12 10 PCL Picture Physical 10 Frame P age 8 6 4 2 246 81012 i SC0 12 0 10 IP0 2032 4064 5080 Figure 19 2 Same User Unit Scaling with New P1 and P2 To further illustrate the flexibility of user unit scaling Figure 19 3 shows the P1 and P2 locations with negative user unit values Note that the framework set by the scaling points P1 and P2 is not a graphics limit The user unit coordinate system extends across the entire PCL Picture Frame area You can print to a point beyond P1 or P2 as long as you are within the PCL Picture Frame In Figure 19 3 P1 is in the X and Y quadrant Note You can use coordinate points that are outside of the PCL Picture Frame boundaries or even off of the page but only that portion of the vector graphics image that falls within the effective window is printed For example you can draw a small portion of the circumference of a circle with a 5 foot radius by moving the pen 5 feet from the page and issuing a Cl command specifying a 5 foot radius only the portion of the arc that falls within the effective window is printed 19 6 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN Physical Page PCL Picture Frame C 15 15 15 20 IPO 0 8128 9144 Figure 19 3 New P1 and P2 User Unit Scaling with Negative Values Refer to the Scale SC command at the end of this chapter for more information on scaling drawings Using the Scale Comma
212. gons Some of the commands in this chapter define and draw complete shapes while others act only on the contents of the polygon buffer The information in this chapter enables you to achieve the following results in your programs e Draw circles wedges and rectangles e Use polygon mode for drawing polygons subpolygons and circles The following commands are described in this chapter Table 21 1 The Polygon Group Commands Command Summary EA Edge Rectangle Absolute Outlines a rectangle defined with absolute coordinates EP Edge Polygon Outlines the contents of the polygon buffer ER Edge Rectangle Relative Outlines a rectangle defined with relative coordinates EW Edge Wedge Defines and outlines a wedge shaped polygon FP Fill Polygon Fills the polygon shape specified in the polygon buffer PM Polygon Mode Allows you to create user defined polygons in the polygon buffer Introduction 21 1 Table 24 1 The Polygon Group Commands continued RA Fill Rectangle Absolute Fills a rectangle specified with absolute coordinates RR Fill Rectangle Relative Fills a rectangle specified with relative coordinates WG Fill Wedge Defines and fills a wedge shaped polygon Using the Polygon Buffer As mentioned a buffer is a temporary storage area for information The polygon buffer collects the commands and coordinates that define a polygon you want to pr
213. he first set of lines for cross hatched fill are drawn at the specified angle and the next set are drawn at that angle plus 90 degrees Note A positive angle is an angle rotated from the X axis to the Y axis as shown below A negative angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis Y 90 180 CT 270 09 X Figure 22 6 Positive Angle of Rotation 22 10 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Note Note EN The relationship of the X axis to the Y axis and the Y axis can be changed as a result of scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive and negative angle of rotation Types 3 and 4 use the current pen and line type defined by the Line Type Pen Width and Line Attribute commands If the spacing between lines is defined in plotter units no Scale command used turning scaling on or changing the locations of P1 and P2 has no affect on the spacing If however the spacing is defined in user units the spacing fluctuates with changes in the location of P1 and P2 the Xmin Y min and Xmax Y max points if scaling is isotropic or subsequent scaling command changes Turning off scaling causes the spacing to be frozen in the plotter unit equivalent of the current user unit value If the spacing is a percentage of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 the percentage is maintained and spacing fluctuates with changes to P1 and P2 the XminsYmin and Xm
214. he location on the page of the PCL Picture Frame is determined by the picture frame anchor point Refer to Figures 2 3 and 2 4 for the default picture frame size Anchor z Point Picture Frame A Scaling Occurs HP GL 2 Plot Size Picture Frame PCL Logical Page HP GL 2 Graphic Resulting HP GL 2 Image Scaled to fit within PCL Picture Frame Figure 18 1 The Picture Presentation Directives 18 2 The Picture Frame EN Automatically Adjusting Image Size to Fit the PCL Picture Frame EN Framelmported HP GL 2 drawings can be adjusted automatically to fit the size of the PCL Picture Frame without changing the locations of P1 and P2 in Scale mode as described earlier This is called picture frame scaling When using picture frame scaling specify the HP GL 2 plot size unless the drawing is page size independent described below If a drawing s not page size independent the printer will not adjust the size of the image to fit the picture frame without the HP GL 2 plot size command the drawing and the picture frame are assumed to be the same size If a drawing is page size independent it automatically enlarges or reduces to fit within the picture frame without specifying an HP GL 2 plot size Creating a Page Size Independent Plot As mentioned if an imported HP GL 2 drawing is page size independent it is adjusted automatically to fit different page sizes without specifying the HP GL 2 plot size For
215. he number of times specified in the command description text text This parameter indicates that you can type in a range of ASCII characters such as in the Label LB command Indicates that you can use a range of the previous parameter however all X coordinates must have a corresponding Y coordinate 17 8 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Note Notes EN Remember that while X Y coordinates are shown in parentheses in text for example 3 4 or 0 0 the parentheses are not part of the syntax Do not enter these parentheses in your commands iCommand terminator In most HP GL 2 commands a semicolon is optional and is shown in parentheses in most command syntax Three exceptions to the optional use of the semicolon as a command terminator occur in the following commands Polyline Encoded PE Label LB and Comment CO PE must be terminated by a semicolon LB is terminated by the non printing end of text character ETX decimal 3 or a user defined character The comment string of the CO command must be delimited by double quotes A semicolon terminator is always required following the last command prior to leaving HP GL 2 mode A comma is always shown as the separator between parameters A space or is also valid although not preferred A or is a valid separator only for numeric parameters Omitting Optional Parameters Some commands have optional parameters that take
216. her HP GL 2 chapters until you see an example that interests you or fits your objective Read through the examples and try printing them using your choice of programming languages If you need help converting the generic commands shown in the examples to a programming language see Using HP GL 2 with Programming Languages later in this chapter As you see unfamiliar commands find the page number of the command description in the index and read about the command Think of an application that you would like to program and then look for an example that uses some of the elements you desire After trying some examples and seeing how the commands interact you should be well on your way to learning the HP GL 2 language This chapter describes the interaction between the PCL printer language and HP GL 2 modes and introduces the following topics HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax Using HP GL 2 with Programming Languages The HP GL 2 Coordinate System HP GL 2 and PCL Orientation Interactions The Vector Graphics Limits Units of Measure Pen Status and Location Defining the Image Area PCL Picture Frame Scaling e Automatically Adjusting Image Size e Absolute and Relative Pen Movement Chapter 18 covers more HP GL 2 fundamentals and Chapters 19 through 23 discuss HP GL 2 commands and their syntax 17 2 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax There are two classes of commands used to print vector graphics
217. hus changing the direction of a negative angle of rotation See Drawing Arcs in Chapter 20 for more information Non volatile RAM Random Access Memory whose contents are preserved following a power failure volatile RAM is memory whose contents are not preserved when the device is powered off Non volatile RAM is generally used to preserve configured vs programmed device state information Off line On line On line is a condition when the printer will accept data from the host computer When the printer is on line the ON LINE lamp is lit When off line the printer will not accept data from the host Orientation The orientation of characters on a page if the print is across the width of the page it is portrait oriented if the print is across the length of the page it is landscape oriented Overlay Environment The overlay environment consists of the current settings for the following features with the remainder of the environment features set to their user default values Paper source Page size Number of copies Orientation Cursor position stack EN Note EN Parallel I O An input output I O interface that transmits more than one bit of information simultaneously in a parallel mode Centronics is an industry wide parallel interface standard Also see Serial I O PCL Commands PCL commands provide access to printer features Once a PCL command sets a parameter that parameter remains set unti
218. ich quadrant the label is in 23 40 The Character Group EN Note EN Quadrant Il o gt Quadrant I rise Quadrant III Quadrant IV Qa en Figure 23 24 Varying Print Direction with DR Command Parameter Sign A DR command remains in effect until another DR or DI command is executed or until the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Example Using the DR Command This example illustrates the use of positive and negative parameters how the LB command updates the current pen location and how DR updates the Carriage Return point Note that this is the same example shown with the DI command The only changes are switching the DI to DR and using the 1 0 ratio instead of the sine and cosine However if you print them both and measure them you ll discover that they are slightly different sizes The size difference results from the DR command s use of the percentage of the P2 P1 distance Labels begin at the current pen location and thus are drawn parallel to the directional line not necessarily on it DR Relative Direction 23 41 Table 23 20 Example Using the DR Command EOE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black PA3500 2500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 3500 2500 DT 1 Define the character as the label terminator DRO 1 LB__1990 Set the label direction and print 1990
219. icture frame anchor point at the PCL current cursor position If importing an existing plot defined in absolute units specify the HP GL 2 plot size using the E Ec c K Horizontal HP GL 2 Plot Size and Ec c L Vertical HP GL 2 Plot Size This plot size represents the size of the original HP GL 2 image If you are creating a drawing within an application do not send these commands Enter HP GL 2 mode using the Ec B command Send HP GL 2 commands IN SP1 Exit HP GL 2 mode by sending the EAHA Enter PCL Mode command Send more PCL commands if desired or issue an F E command to end the job and eject the page Whenever a printer reset FE is sent at the beginning of a job precede it with a UEL Ec96 12345X command whenever a printer reset is sent at the end of a job follow it with a UEL command Typical HP GL 2 PlotCommand Sequence 18 5 Table 18 1 18 6 The Picture Frame E cE E amp I2A E amp l0O E c3060x3960Y E p565x600Y E COT EC c8 5k11L E 1B Example Creating and Using a PCL Picture Frame Reset the printer Set the page size to letter Specify portrait orientation Specify a 4 25 inch wide by 5 5 inch high PCL Picture Frame 4 25in x 720 decipoints in 3060 decipoints 5 5in x 720 decipoints in 3960 decipoints Move the cursor to the point you desire as the picture frame anchor point Set the picture frame anchor point to the current cursor position Specify
220. ify relative plotting and pen down BZ1016 8128 5588 5080 4572 7112 4064 8128 7112 7620 7112 2032 Draw a Bezier using the current position 1016 5080 as the first control point The specified control points for the first curve are 1016 8128 5588 5080 and 4572 7112 The second curve uses the last control point of the previous curve as the first control point 4572 7112 The other three control points for the second curve are 4064 8128 7112 7620 and 7112 2032 E A Enter the PCL mode EE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page BZ Bezier Absolute 20 23 705579 l l i 1 l l i 1016 5080 Starting Point 1st Control Point 1 2 Q 09979 Q 5555020 3 4 5 1 l 1 6 l r T T T T T 1 BZ1016 8128 5588 5080 4572 7112 4064 8128 7112 7620 7112 2032 Figure 20 14 Table 20 15 Q 71127620 017220 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute BR Bezier Relative AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point CI Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group 20 24 The Vector Group EN Cl Circle This command draws the circumference of a circle using the specified radius and chord angle If you want a filled circle refer to the WG or PM commands Cl radius chord
221. ignores command index 0 or index gt 8 ignores command WU Pen Width Unit Selection This command specifies how the width parameter of the Pen Width PW command is interpreted whether metric or relative units WU type or WU Parameter Format Functional Range Default type clamped integer 0 to 1 0 metric Since using WU with or without parameters defaults all pen widths send the WU command before a PW command which sets a new pen width e No Parameters Defaults type parameter to O metric and all pen widths to 0 35 mm 22 46 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN e Type Specifies how the width parameter of the Pen Width PW command is interpreted 0 Metric Interprets the pen width parameter in millimeters Specifying type 0 defaults all pen widths to 0 35mm 1 Relative Interprets the pen width parameter as a percentage of the diagonal distance between P1 and P2 Specifying type 1 defaults all pen widths to 0 196 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 If the specified type parameter is not 0 or 1 the printer ignores the command A WU command remains in effect until another WU command is executed or the printer is initialized WU is not defaulted by the Default Values DF command Table 22 27 Related Commands Group PW Pen Width SP Select Pen The Line and Fill Attributes Group WU Pen Width Unit Selectio
222. ill type 3 with a 50 plu distance between each line Draw a rectangle with 1200 1200 as the lower left corner and 1600 1600 as the upper right Using the default line type edge the rectangle just drawn PA1200 1600 FT4 RA1600 2000 EA1600 2000 Move to 1200 1600 and select the cross hatch pattern fill type Draw a rectangle with the current pen location as one corner and 1600 2000 as the opposite corner 960A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 800 2000 iiss 1600 2000 400 400 1200 400 Figure 21 23 Table 21 23 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon FP Fill Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative RR Fill Rectangle Relative EA Edge Rectangle Absolute The Polygon Group RA Fill Rectangle Absolute 21 41 Table 21 23 continued FT Fill Type LT Line Type RF Raster Fill Definition The Line and Fill Attributes Group RR Fill Rectangle Relative This command defines and fills a rectangle using relative coordinates Use RR to fill rectangular shapes in drawings To outline a rectangle using relative coordinates use the ER command RR X Y Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y increments currentunits 290 to 230 4 no default The RR command defines and fills a rectangle using the current pen the current line and fill types and relative coordi
223. image would be enlarged to twice its original size to fit into the PCL Picture Frame A parameter value of zero or a reset page length paper size or orientation command defaults the HP GL 2 plot size to the height of the currently selected picture frame resulting in no scaling Example If the original HP GL 2 drawing is 7 inches tall send E c7L EN Enter HP GL 2 Mode This command causes the printer to interpret subsequent commands as HP GL 2 commands instead of PCL printer language commands EC B 0 Position pen at previous HP GL 2 pen position 1 Position pen at current PCL cursor position Default 0 Range 0 1 even values are mapped to 0 odd values are mapped to 1 EQ B is the same as EC960B As soon as the printer receives this command it switches to HP GL 2 mode interpreting commands as HP GL 2 commands until it receives an Enter PCL Mode ELE or UEL command or until the printer power is switched off and on For information on the effect of PCL settings on HP GL 2 mode see Default Settings later in this chapter The value field determines the cursor position once HP GL 2 mode is entered 0 This parameter option Ec 0B sets the pen position to the previous HP GL 2 position if this is the first time HP GL 2 mode is entered in the present print job assuming an E E has been sent the pen position is at the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame 0 0 1 This par
224. imized when the print direction is O A parameter value of zero Ec cOT specifies that the picture frame anchor point should be set to the cursor position Sending a cursor move command prior to sending this command places the picture frame anchor in the desired location All parameter values other than zero are ignored but if you do not send a Set Picture Frame Anchor command the printer defaults the anchor point to the left edge of the logical page and the default top margin The print direction command does not affect the physical location of the anchor point or the picture frame Using this command defaults the location of P1 and P2 resets the soft clip window to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries clears the polygon buffer and updates the HP GL 2 pen Posten to the lower left corner of the picture frame if entered with 0B as viewed from the current orientation Example To set the picture frame anchor point to a position 6 inches from the left logical page boundary and 5 inches below the top margin send Ec p1800x1500YEC cO0T In this example the cursor is first moved to the desired location 6 inches x 300 dots inch 1800 dots 5 inches x 300 dots inch 1500 dots Then the EC cOT command sets the picture frame anchor point to that location 18 10 The Picture Frame EN HP GL 2 Plot Horizontal Size EN This command specifies the horizontal size of the HP GL 2 drawing being imported Eat c K The horizon
225. in 17 15 outline font 7 9 output bin selection command 4 12 overlay environment 3 1 12 4 Glossary 8 macro 12 4 12 5 overview manual v P P1 and P2 19 4 19 12 19 26 23 81 commands affected by table 19 24 19 28 default location 19 23 input command 19 23 input relative command 19 26 printing beyond 19 45 scaling points 17 24 specifying location 19 26 X Y Coordinates 19 26 PA Panose format of data segment 11 42 PA command 17 25 20 30 page binding 4 7 4 8 boundaries 2 2 2 8 control 24 4 control commands 5 1 eject 16 24 19 33 19 39 format commands 5 1 length 24 4 orientation 5 5 7 8 Page Size command 5 2 page size independent image 18 3 printing boundaries 2 7 2 8 protection 24 10 size 24 4 size in PCL Units 2 7 size independent image 18 3 page size command 5 2 paper landscape size 2 8 output control 4 12 portrait size 2 7 selection 24 4 Source command 5 4 24 4 parallel I O Glossary 9 EN EN parameters formats HP GL 2 17 10 HP GL 2 syntax 17 7 scaling 19 45 user units in scaling 19 41 parentheses 17 9 parsing PCL commands 24 2 Pattern 13 8 14 5 pattern black fill 14 9 cross hatch 14 8 cross hatch fill 14 9 current 13 2 erase fill 14 9 fonts 7 11 line 13 11 raster fill 22 9 reference point 13 14 shaded fill 14 9 shading 13 9 14 6 transparency mode 13 2 user defined Glossary 15 user defined also see user defined pattern 13 13 Pattern ID Area Fill ID command 13 8 14 5 Pat
226. ing Up Soft Clip Limits Soft clip limits temporarily restrict pen movement to a rectangular area or window When you initialize or set the printer to default conditions the soft clip limits are the same as the PCL Picture Frame limits To create a window you use the Input Window IW command The printer does not draw outside the window The following illustration shows the four types of line segments you can specify from one point to another Table 19 6 The Four Types of Line Segments Type From Last Point To New Point 1 Inside window area Inside window area Inside window area Outside window area Outside window area Inside window area 2 3 4 Outside window area Outside window area PCL Picture Frame Type 1 Figure 19 8 The four types of line segments 19 18 The Configuration and Status Group Window Soft clip Limits Type 20r 3 EN The IW command lets you control the size of the HP GL 2 printing area so that you can draw a particular portion of a drawing You can leave the rest as white space or use the remaining area for labels or another drawing Refer to The Vector Graphic Limits in Chapter 17 and the IW command description later in this chapter CO Comment This command allows comments to be inserted within an HP GL 2 command sequence The comment string of the CO command must be delimited by double quotes CO text text H
227. ing an RO command the plotter unit position is maintained with respect to the new orientation If an IP command without parameters is executed after the axes have been rotated with the RO command P1 and P2 locations change to reflect the rotation The locations of P1 and P2 interact with the following commands Table 19 13 Commands Affected by P1 P2 Command Group IW Input Window The Configuration Status Group RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width WU Pen Width Unit Selection DR Relative Direction The Character Group LB Label SR Relative Character Size An IR command remains in effect until another IR command is executed an IP command is executed or the printer is initialized 19 28 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 14 Related Commands Group IP Input P1 and P2 The Configuration Status Group IW Input Window RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale IW Input Window EN This command defines a rectangular area or window that establishes soft clip limits Subsequent HP GL 2 drawing is restricted to this area Use IW to restrict printing to a specified area on the page IW Xit YLL Xur Yurb or IW Parameter Format Functional Range Default XLLYLLXUR Yun current 280 to 230 4 PCL Picture Frame units The printer interprets the command parame
228. int This polygon remains in the buffer until replaced by another polygon or until the buffer is cleared by initializing the printer Some commands use the polygon buffer automatically while other commands require that you enter the polygon mode The following commands use the polygon buffer but do not allow you to enter polygon mode first Table 21 2 Mnemonic Command Name EA Edge Rectangle Absolute ER Edge Rectangle Relative EW Edge Wedge RA Fill Rectangle Absolute HR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge 21 2 The Polygon Group EN Drawing Rectangles You can draw a rectangle by outlining edging the defined area using the Edge Rectangle Absolute EA or Edge Rectangle Relative ER commands To draw a rectangle the printer uses the current pen location for one corner you give the coordinates for the diagonally opposite corner The printer draws the rectangle defined by these two points The following simple command sequence uses EA to draw a rectangle Table 21 3 Example Drawing Rectangles E 0B Reset the printer Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 PA10 10 Select pen number 1 black You must select a pen to print HP GL 2 images Specify absolute plotting and move to 10 10 EA2500 1500 Draw the outline of a rectangle with the lower left corner being the current pen location 10 10 and the upper right corner being
229. ion default 2 3 described 2 3 specifying 2 3 printable area 2 7 area defined Glossary 10 area raster graphics 15 5 area boundaries 2 7 2 8 area clipping 2 8 area limits HP GL 2 17 19 character codes 11 15 character range 11 30 EN EN characters 24 13 control codes 24 13 printed dots 2 3 printer commands defined Glossary 11 internal units 2 5 performance speed 24 10 program language 1 1 resets 3 8 printer commands combining 1 8 shortening 1 8 Printer Job Language PJL commands 1 4 Printer Reset command 4 2 printing a character 9 13 control codes 8 28 23 86 24 12 different characters 7 1 duplex 4 5 fixed spaced fonts 23 15 labels 23 3 menu defined Glossary 11 patterns shading 7 11 processing time 24 10 proportional fonts 23 15 raster graphic resolution 15 6 simplex 4 5 text at an angle 23 29 23 31 text in HP GL 2 mode 23 1 text with LB command 23 59 23 60 printing menu Glossary 11 printing patterns shading 13 8 priority characteristics 8 1 font location 8 24 programming errors common 24 15 hints 24 1 languages with HP GL 2 17 13 status readback 16 27 proportion maintaining in scaled plots 19 8 proportional fonts 23 13 23 15 23 73 HP GL 2 23 74 defined 7 4 proportional spacing 8 9 proportional spacing font selection 8 23 PU command 20 46 Push Pop Cursor Positioning command 6 14 PW command 22 5 22 29 23 21 Q quality font header 11 28 R RA command 21 4 21 39 radius in drawi
230. ir the printer draws to each point in the order given EN PD Pen Down 20 31 Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Whether the PD command uses coordinates or increments depends on the most recently executed PA or PR command If no PA or PR command is issued absolute plotting PA is used When you use the symbol mode SM command PD draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you use the polygon mode PM command the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer and are used when the polygon is edged or filled Table 20 20 Example Using the Pen Down Command ESE Reset the printer EQ B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA10 10 Begin absolute plotting from coordinate 10 10 PD2500 10 10 1500 10 10 Set the Pen Down and draw lines between the specified points E A Enter the PCL mode EE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 32 The Vector Group EN Note EN Intermediate Intermediate point point End ON Starting point End point current point pen location l N N 4 hj 4 E 1 a b N a 4 Figure 20 18 If an odd number of coordinates is specified an X coordinate without a correspondin
231. ition Glossary 15 user defined soft control 10 12 user defined symbol set header 10 6 value calculating 11 20 Symbol Set command 8 6 Symbol Set ID Code command 10 2 SYMBOLSETS status response 16 11 syntax HP GL 2 17 6 status readback 16 6 T Tagged Image File Format TIFF Encoding raster compression 15 17 TD command 23 86 technical support line HP Customer Support 2 temporary fonts 9 5 soft 9 3 EN EN status readback 16 8 temporary macros 12 5 terminating labels 23 11 termination character 1 6 terminator HP GL 2 syntax 17 7 text angle varying with DI 23 9 area 5 11 5 18 24 4 character positioning HP GL 2 23 62 first line 5 16 height font header 11 29 length 24 4 length computing user default 5 18 orienting and placing 23 10 path 23 46 placing HP GL 2 23 9 positioning 4 7 4 8 printing 5 11 printing HP GL 2 23 59 Text Length command 5 18 width font header 11 29 thickness character 8 16 TIFF adaptive compression 15 25 15 27 raster graphics compression 15 16 top margin 24 4 Top Margin command 5 16 Top Offset Registration command 4 8 top offset character descriptor 11 56 TR command 22 38 22 42 Transfer Raster Data command 15 25 15 29 transparency mode 13 1 effect on rectangular areas 14 11 example 13 4 pattern 13 2 13 7 rectangular area 14 10 source 13 2 13 6 Transparency Mode TR command 22 38 22 42 Transparent Data command 23 86 Transparent Print Data command 8 28 24 6 tran
232. l Mode 22 35 SP Select Pen 22 5 22 38 SR Relative Character Size 23 8 23 14 23 81 SS Select Standard Font 23 85 SV Screened Vectors 22 39 TD Transparent Data 23 86 TR UL anann Transparency Mode 22 38 22 42 User Defined Line Type 22 44 WG Fill Wedge 21 45 WG Fill Wedge 21 27 WU Pen Width Unit Selection 22 46 commands HP GL 2 listing of 17 3 commands PCL c G Pattern Area Fill ID 13 8 14 5 area fill ID see also pattern ID 13 8 14 5 character code 11 49 character descriptor 11 50 define symbol set 10 4 Disable Underline command 8 29 duplex page side selection 4 10 echo 16 25 End Raster Graphics 15 30 Enter HP GL 2 Mode 18 13 Enter PCL Mode 18 14 fill rectangular area 14 9 Flush All Pages 16 24 Font Control 9 5 font header 11 6 Font ID 9 4 font selection by ID 8 26 Free Space 16 21 Half Line Feed 6 13 height font selection 8 12 horizontal cursor position columns 6 4 horizontal cursor position decipoints 6 6 horizontal cursor position Units 6 6 horizontal motion index HMI 5 20 Horizontal Rectangle Size decipoints 14 3 Horizontal Rectangle Size PCL Units 14 3 inquire status readback entity 16 10 job separation 4 11 left margin 5 13 left offset registration 4 7 line spacing 5 24 line termination 6 13 macro control 12 7 Macro ID 12 6 Number of Copies 4 4 orientation 5 5 output bin selection 4 12 page size 5 2 paper sour
233. l the same PCL command is repeated with a new value or the printer is reset There are three types of PCL commands control codes two character escape sequences and parameterized escape sequences Also see escape sequences PCL Coordination System Units The units of the X axis of the PCL coordinate system may be dots decipoints or columns The units of the Y axis may be dots decipoints or rows PCL Units These are user definable units of measure which are used in PCL commands affecting various PCL cursor moves The number of units per inch used in PCL cursor moves is determined by the current setting of the Unit of Measure command see Unit of Measure Command in Chapter 4 PCL Units were previously referred to as PCL dots but should not be confused with the printer s physically printed dots Perforation Region The perforation region is the distance from the bottom of the text area to the top of the text of the next page When perforation skip is enabled a Line Feed or Half Line Feed which would move the cursor beyond the bottom of the text area moves the cursor to the top of the text area on the next page When perforation skip is disabled a Line Feed or Half Line Feed moves to the next line or half line within the perforation region Glossary 9 Glossary 10 Pitch Pitch describes the number of characters printed in a horizontal inch Pitch only applies to fixed spaced fonts since the number of charact
234. labeling starting at current location Line Type LT Solid line relative mode pattern length 4 of diagonal distance from P1 to P2 Plotting Mode PA Absolute plotting Polygon Mode PM Polygon buffer cleared Raster Fill RF Solid black Scalable or Bitmap SBO Scalable fonts only Fonts Scale SC User unit scaling off Screened Vectors SV No screening Standard Font SD Stick Font 11 5 pt 9 cpi Definition upright medium Absolute Character SI Turns off size Size transformation Character Slant SL No slant Symbol Mode SM Turns off symbol mode Select Standard Font SS Standard font selected 19 20 The Configuration and Status Group EN Table 19 7 Default Conditions continued Transparency Mode TR1 Transparency mode on Transparent Data TD Normal printing mode User Defined Line UL Defaults all 8 line types Type In addition the printer updates the Carriage Return point for labeling to the current pen location See Chapter 23 The Character Group for more information on the Carriage Return point The DF command does not affect the following HP GL 2 conditions Locations of P1 and P2 Current pen its location width width unit selection and up down position HP GL 2 drawing rotation Table 19 8 Related commands Related Commands Group IN Initialize The Configuration Status Group IN Initialize Notes EN This command resets all programmabl
235. lect Secondary Font LB Label AD Alternate Font Definition 23 19 Table 23 7 continued SA Select Alternate Font SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition SI Absolute Character Size SR Relative Character Size SS Select Standard Font TD Transparent Data CF Character Fill Mode The Character Fill Mode command specifies the way scalable fonts are filled and edged bitmap and Stick fonts cannot be edged and can be filled only with raster fill shading or PCL cross hatch patterns Scalable characters may be filled with any of the fill patterns specified by the FT command shading hatching cross hatch and user defined raster fill patterns CF fill mode edge pen or CF Parameter Format Functional Range Default fill mode clamped 0 1 2 or3 O solid fill integer edge pen _ integer 9 90 to 230 4 0 no edging e No Parameters Defaults characters to solid fill with no edging Equivalent to CFO 0 23 20 The Character Group EN Note EN Fill mode Specifies how the printer renders filled characters according to the following parameter values 0 Specifies solid fill using the current pen and edging with the specified pen or current pen if the edge pen parameter is not specified 1 Specifies edging with the specified pen or current pen if the edge pen parameter is not specified Characters are filled only if they
236. lect pen position 4000 3000 for second circle PMO Enter polygon mode CI1000 Draw another circle with a radius of 1000 units PM2 Close polygon and exit polygon mode EP FP Edge then fill polygon circle 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Fill Then Edge Edge Then Fill Figure 21 29 The center of the left circle is located at 4000 3000 The center of the right circle is located at 4000 6000 21 50 The Polygon Group EN EN Table 21 28 Related Commands Group EP Edge Polygon EW Edge Wedge The Polygon Group SC Scale The Configuration Status Group Cl Circle The Vector Group FP Fill Polygon The Polygon Group FT Fill Type The Line and Fill Attributes Group WG Fill Wedge 21 51 21 52 The Polygon Group EN EN The Line and Fill Attributes Group Introduction The information in this chapter enables you to achieve the following results in your HP GL 2 applications e Enhance your drawings with various line types e Enhance your drawings with different fill types e Position fill type patterns The following commands are described in this chapter Table 22 4 The Line and Fill Attribute Commands Command Summary AC Anchor Corner Specifies the starting point for fill patterns FT Fill Type Selects the pattern to use when filling polygons LA Line Attributes Specifies how line
237. ling relies on the relationship between two points P1 and P2 These two points are called the scaling points because they take on the user unit values that you specify with the Scale SC command You can change the locations of P1 and P2 using either the Input P1 and P2 IP or Input Relative P1 and P2 IR command P1 and P2 always represent an absolute location in relation to the PCL Picture Frame defined in plotter units They designate opposite corners of a rectangular printing area within the picture frame You can change the size of the rectangular printing area and move it anywhere within the picture frame or even outside the picture frame depending on the plotter unit coordinates you specify using the IP or IR commands Using the Scale Command Scaling allows you to establish units of measure with which you are familiar or which are more logical to your drawing The Scale command SC determines the number of user units along the X and Y axes between P1 and P2 The actual size of the units depends on the locations of P1 and P2 and the range of user units set up by the SC command There are three types of scaling e Anisotropic e Isotropic e Point factor Anisotropic scaling indicates that the size of the units along the X axis may be different than the size of the units on the Y axis Isotropic scaling then indicates that the units are the same size on both axes Point factor scaling sets up a ratio of plotter units to
238. lotter units Table 17 7 PlotterUnits EquivalentValue 1 plu 0 025 mm 0 00098 in 40 plu 1 mm 1016 plu 1 in 3 39 plu 1 dot 300 dpi User units The size of units along the X and Y axes may be redefined using the Scale SC command User units allow you to customize the coordinate system to represent any value For example you could plot the moon cycle for the year by dividing the X axis into 31 units for days of the month and the Y axis into 12 units for months of the year To mark a point on December 25 you would give the coordinate 25 12 rather than calculating the exact location in plotter units Before printing the printer internally converts user units to dot locations 17 20 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Pen Status and Location Note EN Since printing vector graphics has traditionally been performed with plotters the terms pen and pen position are used to described the HP GL 2 cursor the current active position CAP when in HP GL 2 mode Like a physical pen this imaginary pen must be selected if you want to draw images Commands such as Pen Up PU or Pen Down PD and phrases such as current pen position or moving the pen apply to the imaginary pen just as they would a physical pen on a plotter Pen Status Pen status refers to whether the pen is up or down Use the Pen Up PU command with X Y coordinates to move the pen to the desire
239. lygon is filled using the current pen fill type line type and attributes if the fill type is not raster The FP command includes an automatic pen down When the command execution is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored The example on the next page creates a polygon composed of two subpolygons In this case the FP command fills alternating areas beginning with the outside area Table 21 17 Example E Reset the printer 950B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 1500 Specify absolute plotting and move to 1500 1500 PMO CI1000 60 PA1500 1500 CI500 PM2 Enter the polygon mode store a circle with radius of 1000 plu and a 60 chord angle store a pen move to 1500 1500 and another circle with a 500 plu radius and a 5 default chord angle Close the current polygon and exit polygon mode LT4 FT3 50 45 Select line type 4 and fill type 3 Specify a 50 plu distance between the fill lines and slant the lines at a 45 angle FP Using even odd fill method fill the polygon currently in the polygon buffer with the line and fill types just specified 960A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 21 32 The Polygon Group EN j YY 7 7 1500 1500 p M A ty Wy Wy 7
240. management 9 1 management example 9 7 master size 11 4 memory RAM usage 7 8 mirror images 23 74 number available 8 5 orientation 7 8 8 20 patterned and shaded 7 11 permanent 9 3 9 5 16 8 posture HP GL 2 23 71 primary and secondary 8 5 printed on angle 23 29 23 37 printing 23 15 proportionally spaced 7 4 RAM 7 2 resolution 8 5 ROM based 7 2 rotation 7 8 scalable 7 2 7 9 11 2 scalable in HP GL 2 mode 23 15 scalable or bitmap HP GL 2 23 67 scaling technology font header 11 34 secondary 8 5 select table 8 1 8 4 8 5 selection see also font selection 8 1 SIMM 7 2 size selection 8 9 soft 7 2 soft status readback 16 13 spacing HP GL 2 23 15 23 70 special effects 7 11 status readback 16 10 Stick Arc in HP GL 2 23 15 stroke weight 7 6 stroke weight HP GL 2 23 71 style 7 6 style values 8 14 styles pictured 8 15 symbol set HP GL 2 23 69 symbol set PCL 7 3 temporary 9 3 9 5 16 8 TrueType 11 3 TrueType character coordinates 11 5 typeface HP GL 2 23 72 typeface designs pictured 7 7 unbound see also unbound font 9 8 Index 9 Index 10 Font Control command 9 5 font header 11 1 Glossary 5 baseline position 11 18 bitmap 11 7 bitmap character cell 11 19 bitmap example 11 43 calculating symbol set value 11 20 cap height formula 11 31 cell height 11 18 cell width 11 18 character complement 11 35 checksum 11 39 11 42 command 11 6 copyright 11 39 exa
241. mand E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA4000 3000 Specify absolute plotting and move to 4000 3000 UL8 0 15 0 15 0 15 40 15 Redefine the user defined line type with an index number of 8 specify the lines and spaces as follows in percentages of the line distance gap1 as a dot 0 gap2 as a space 15 gap3 as another dot 0 gap4 as a space 15 gap5 as another dot 0 gap6 as a space 15 gap as a line 40 and gap8 as a space 15 LT8 10 PU2000 2500 PD5000 2500 Specify line type number 8 just defined with a pattern length of 1096 of the distance between P1 and P2 in this case the lower left and upper right corners of the default PCL Picture Frame lift the pen and move to 2000 2500 set the pen down and draw to 5000 2500 2 0A Enter the PCL mode E Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Pattern length pe n EMEN p pee sss EEG L u Figure 22 24 UL User Defined Line Type 22 45 Table 22 25 Related Commands Group LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type Table 22 26 POSSIBLE ERROR CONDITIONS Condition Printer Response sum of gap parameters equals zero ignores command a gap is negative
242. mand The following example shows the SD command used to designate a 25 point Univers Bold font in the ASCII symbol set use the Select Standard Font SS command to select this font after it is designated SD 1 21 2 1 4 25 5 0 6 3 7 Symbol Font Height Posture Stroke Typeface Set Spacing Weight Note that the pitch parameter is missing in the above command because the designated font is proportionally spaced Table 23 45 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group DT Define Label Terminator Fl Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LB Label SA Select Alternate Font SI Absolute Character Size SR Relative Character Size SS Select Standard Font SD Standard Font Definition 23 73 SI Absolute Character Size Note This command specifies the size of labeling characters in centimeters Use SI to establish character size independent of P1 and P2 SI width height or SI Parameter Format Functional Range Default width clamped real 32768 to 32767 dependent height clamped real 32768 to 32767 dependent Dependent on the current pitch and font height set by the AD or SD commands While SI is in effect with or without specifying parameter values the size of characters in the currently selected font are not affected by changes in P1 and P2 e No Parameters Character size is as specified by the SD Standard Font De
243. mber of font selections per page selection using font characteristic commands or selection by ID number may decrease printer performance Print Data There is a limit on the amount of data as well as the number of commands that the printer can process per page at maximum speed Print Overrun As data is received by the printer it is processed and stored in an intermediate format The intermediate data is later processed and printed During the physical printing of a page the page moves through the printer at a constant speed Thus some pages cannot be printed because the page s intermediate data cannot be processed fast enough to keep up with the physical speed of the page as it moves through the printer When this condition occurs an error number 21 ERROR 21 print overrun is displayed on the printer s control panel A page causing this error can be printed by setting the printer s page protection feature to ON see next section Page Protection If enabled page protection reserves an amount of memory for the page image process allowing the printer to create the entire page image in memory before physically moving the paper through the printer 24 10 Programming Hints EN Note EN The page protection feature is available only with additional optional memory on many HP LaserJet printers One exception is the LaserJet 4 printer which supports page protection for letter size paper in 300 dpi mode with the
244. menu selections include such features as Auto Continue I O configuration and Resolution Enhancement setting The configuration menu includes features which are not part of the print environment features which can not be selected with printer commands EN EN Control Code A control code is a type of PCL language command that initiates a printer function for example CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed and FF Form Feed Control Panel The combination of keys LEDs and a display that allows an operator to communicate with a device and allows the device to communicate with an operator Current Active Position CAP See CAP Cursor Although the printer does not actually have a cursor the cursor position refers to the currently active printing position like the blinking underline character used on most computer terminals The cursor can be moved anywhere within the logical page using a combination of horizontal and vertical cursor positioning commands and control codes Decipoint A decipoint is a unit of measurement that equals 1 720th of an inch Default A value used instead of a programmatically selected value A factory default is a value programmed into the device at the factory this value is stored in read only memory ROM and cannot be changed by a user or operator A user default is a default which is selectable via the control panel Dot The dot is the smallest printable unit On HP LaserJet printers
245. moves to the next character origin If you want to return a pen to its previous location prior to the next label command you can send a Carriage Return after the label text but before the label terminator When you embed Carriage Return characters in a label each portion of the label is positioned according to the label origin just as if they were written as separate label commands An LO command remains in effect until another LO command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Table 23 34 Example Using the LO Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 SC 4000 4000 Select pen number 1 5000 5000 specify scaling by assigning 4000 5000 to P1 and 4000 5000 to P2 LO Label Origin 23 63 Table 23 34 Example Using the LO Command continued S1 17 26 PA0 500 Set the absolute character size to 17 cm wide by 26 cm high move to 0 500 PD 500 0 0 500 Set the pen down and draw 500 0 0 500 lines from 0 500 to 500 0 to 0 500 to 500 0 and then to 0 500 DT Define label terminator as character CI10 LO4 LBCentered on point Draw a small circle radius 10 plu to represent the label origin point specify a label origin of 4 and print Centered on point PU 500 0 CI10 LO18 Lift the pen and move to 500 0 draw another small circle and spe
246. mples 11 43 11 44 first code 11 30 font naming ASC16 11 33 font number 11 32 font scaling technology 11 34 font type 11 15 format byte 11 15 formats 11 7 formats of data segments 11 41 global Intellifont data 11 35 global italic angle 11 35 height 11 22 height extended 11 31 Intellifont bound 11 10 Intellifont unbound 11 11 last code 11 30 master underline position 11 34 master underline thickness 11 34 MSL symbol index 11 35 number of characters 11 30 OR threshold 11 35 orientation 11 19 pitch 11 21 pitch extended 11 21 11 30 placement 11 28 quality 11 28 resolution specified bitmap 11 8 scalable example 11 44 scale factor 11 34 segment size Format 15 11 41 segmented font data Format 15 11 39 segmented font identifier 11 40 serif style 11 27 size 10 5 spacing 11 19 11 20 stroke weight 11 23 style LSB 11 23 style MSB 11 16 style word 11 16 11 23 symbol set 11 19 11 20 text height 11 29 text width 11 29 typeface LSB 11 24 typeface MSB 11 24 typeface vendor version 11 26 typeface word 11 24 typeface previous usage 11 26 underline position distance 11 29 underline thickness 11 29 variety 11 35 width type 11 23 X resolution 11 33 xheight 11 22 Y resolution 11 34 font header formats of data segments AP Application Support Segment 11 41 CC Character Complement 11 41 IF Intellifont Face Data 11 42 PF PS Compatible Font Name 11 42 XW x windows font name 11 42 Font ID command 9 4 font
247. n 22 47 22 48 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN The Character Group Introduction When you create an HP GL 2 graphic and want to add text you can either enter PCL mode to add text to your image or you can print text from within HP GL 2 mode If this is your first experience with HP GL 2 you should know that the term label is used throughout this chapter to indicate the printing of text This chapter discusses the various ways you can label your images using the printer s vector graphics commands The information in this chapter enables you to perform the following e Position and print labels using any LaserJet font e Change label size slant and direction e Designate and select standard and alternate fonts e Print with proportional and fixed spaced fonts e Work with the character cell The following commands are described in this chapter Table 23 1 The Character Group Commands Command Summary AD Alternate Font Definition Specifies an alternate font for labeling CF Character Fill Mode Specifies how outline fonts are rendered CP Character Plot Moves the pen the specified number of character cells from the current pen location Dl Absolute Direction Specifies the slope of labels independent of P1 and P2 locations Introduction 23 1 Table 23 1 The Character Group Commands continued DR Relative Direction Specifies the slope of labels
248. n Percentages E 0 100 0 25 25 50 25 ic 35 30 35 40 10 0 10 40 35 10 10 10 35 25 10 10 10 10 10 25 35 10 0 10 0 10 35 25 10 0 10 10 10 O 10 25 O2monceoco o QOO Noo ooo ooooo O N QI A aaa 600000050 l ooooo h L i ooooo a i ooo ek ok ooo o pry e Figure 22 17 Line Type Patterns and Pattern Percentages e Pattern Length Specifies the length of one complete line pattern either as a percentage of the diagonal distance between the scaling points P1 and P2 or in millimeters see mode below You must specify a length greater than zero or the printer ignores the command If you do not specify a length the printer uses the last value specified e Mode Specifies how the values of the pattern length parameter are interpreted If you do not specify a mode the printer uses the last value specified Values other than 0 or 1 invalidate the command e 0 Relative mode Interprets the pattern length parameter as a percentage of the diagonal distance between P1 and P2 e When specified as a percentage the pattern length changes along with changes in P1 and P2 22 26 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN e 1 Absolute mode Interprets the pattern length parameter in millimeters e When specified in millimeters fixed line type patterns assume the specified length but adaptive line type pattern lengths are adjusted to fit an integral number of patterns per vector This is tru
249. n the last character of the first label and the first character of the second label For proportional fonts that use a pair wise spacing table the pen position is updated using an average delta X space 2 Ifa non concatenation combination is specified the pen position that existed immediately prior to the LB command is restored LO Label Origin 23 65 Table 23 36 Related Commands Group CP Character Plot The Character Group DV Define Variable Text Path LB Label SA Select Alternate Font This command selects the alternate font already designated by the AD command for subsequent labeling Use the SA command to shift from the currently selected standard font to the designated alternate font SA The SA command tells the printer to draw subsequent labeling commands using characters from the alternate symbol set previously designated by the AD command The SA command is equivalent to using the Shift Out control character SO decimal 14 within a label string The default designated alternate font uses symbol set 277 Roman 8 The alternate font remains in effect until an SS command is executed a Shift In control character SI decimal 15 is encountered or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Table 23 37 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group DT Define Label Terminator Fl Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LB La
250. nates The RR command includes an automatic pen down After the command is executed the original pen location and up down status are restored e X Y Increments Specify the corner of the rectangle that is diagonally opposite from the current pen location which is the starting point of the rectangle Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Note The following illustration shows the current pen location in the lower left corner and the command s X Y increments in the upper right corner However these points can be in any two opposite corners depending on the coordinates used 21 42 The Polygon Group EN EN XY increment location Current pen location starting point Figure 21 24Fill Rectangle Relative The only difference between the RR command and the ER Edge Relative Rectangle command is that the RR command produces a filled rectangle and ER an outlined one The RR command clears the polygon buffer and then uses it to define the rectangle before drawing A rectangle requires enough buffer space to hold five points The following example uses RR with three different fill types refer to the FT command description to create rectangles such as those you might use in a bar chart The rectangles in the right bar are edged using the ER command Table 21 24 Example Using the RR Command with Different Fill Types E Reset
251. ncrement location Current pen location starting point Figure 21 15Edge Relative Rectangle Command The only difference between the ER command and the RR Fill Relative Rectangle command is that the ER command produces an outlined rectangle and RR a filled one The ER command clears the polygon buffer and then uses it to define the rectangle before drawing Refer to Drawing Polygons earlier in this chapter for more information The following example uses relative coordinates to draw the same image shown in the EA command example Compare this example with the EA example to understand the differences between the coordinates used Table 21 12 Example Using ER to Draw Rectangles E Reset the printer 960B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing S C0 150 0 150 1 Specify user scaling with P1 being 0 0 and P2 150 150 the 1 indicates isotropic scaling 21 24 The Polygon Group EN EN Table 21 12 Example Using ER to Draw Rectangles continued PA75 105 ER40 25 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to 75 105 Draw a rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner and a point 40 25 user units away as the upper right corner PR20 0 PD0 10 Specify relative plotting and move the pen 20 user units to the right Place the pen down and draw a line to a point 1
252. nd 19 7 Using Scaling Effectively Note The following sections describe how to combine scaling and P1 P2 concepts to do the following e Enlarge or reduce the size of a drawing e Draw equal size pictures on the same page e Create mirror imaged pictures Enlarging or Reducing a Picture The basic technique for changing a picture s size is to scale the printing area defined by P1 and P2 then move the locations of P1 and P2 to define a smaller or larger area This is especially useful when you want to print the picture on any portion of the page Only scaled drawings those using the SC command are enlarged reduced when the P1 P2 locations change Use PCL Picture Frame scaling when importing HP GL 2 images created without the SC command see Automatically Adjusting the Image Size in Chapter 18 To maintain the proportions of scaled plots set P1 and P2 to define an area with the sameaspect ratio as the original scaling rectangle For example if the area defined by P1 and P2 is 3000 x 2000 plotter units its aspect ratio is 3 2 To enlarge the plot set P1 and P2 to define a larger area that maintains a 3 2 ratio The following example illustrates this technique using a square P1 P2 scaling rectangle with a scale of 0 to 10 for both axes By definition a square always has an aspect ratio of 1 1 After drawing a circle within the scaled area the locations of P1 and P2 move to form a new square area that maintains the 1 1 ratio
253. nes and line types you draw by using the Pen Width PW command 22 2 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN EN PW 13 _ _ PW 5 PW1 5 a a Figure 22 2 Line Types Attribute Once you specify a line type and line attributes all lines created by the following commands are drawn using the new line type and attributes Line types and their interactions with fill patterns are discussed later in this chapter Table 22 2 Commands Affectedby Line Types Command AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute PA Plot Absolute PD Pen Down PE Polyline Encoded PR Plot Relative RT Relative Arc Three Point Group The Vector Group CI Circle EA Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER Edge Rectangle Relative The Polygon Group Using Line Attributes and Types 22 3 Table 22 2 Commands Affectedby Line Types continued EW Edge Wedge FP Fill Polygon RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge Using Fill Types Using the Fill Type FT command adds detail to your drawings and increases their visual effectiveness The fill type affects the RA Fill Rectangle Absolute RR Fill Rectangle Relative WG Fill Wedge FP Fill Polygon commands and CF Character Fill commands PCL 5 printers support solid parallel line hatching HP GL 2 cross hatch raster fill
254. ng arcs 21 28 RAM fonts 7 2 8 3 Raster Fill Definition RF 22 32 raster graphics 15 1 15 5 defined Glossary 11 adaptive compression 15 25 binary data 15 1 clipping 15 11 command sequence 15 4 compression 15 16 15 23 Glossary 2 compression example 15 19 15 24 compression coding efficiency 15 19 compression TIFF Encoding 15 17 compression byte counts 15 29 data block 15 25 data compressions reduction 15 13 delta row compression 15 16 15 20 End command 15 30 example 15 31 Height command 15 11 image 15 1 left margin 15 14 memory usage 15 6 orientation 15 8 presentation 15 14 Presentation command 15 8 presentation mode 15 15 24 7 printable area 15 5 printing zeroed row 15 23 raster area 15 2 raster area height 15 11 raster fill 22 9 Raster Fill Definition RF 22 32 Raster Y Offset command 15 15 repeating row 15 23 resolution 15 14 15 15 24 7 Resolution command 15 6 run length data compression 15 16 Seed row 15 22 Set Compression Method command 15 16 Start command 15 14 Termination command 15 30 termination implied 15 15 throughput 24 7 TIFF data compression 15 16 Transfer Raster Data command 15 29 vs HP GL 2 graphics when to use 17 1 Width command 15 13 zeroed rows 15 2 Raster Height command 15 11 raster image 15 1 Raster Width command 15 13 Raster Y Offset command 15 15 Index 17 Index 18 real number 17 10 rectangle drawing HP GL 2 mode 21 3 effect of transparency mode 14 11 fill 14 1
255. ngle a circle or arc always has the same number of chords regardless of its size For example for the default chord angle a circle is always composed of 72 chords 360 5 per chord 72 chords This results in larger circles appearing less smooth than smaller circles with the same chord angle setting the chord angle to a smaller number will help large circles or arcs appear more smooth see Figure 20 8 Chord angle Default chord of 25 angle of 5 a Figure 20 8 Changing Arc Smoothness with the Chord Angle Table 20 6 Example Varying the Chord Angle EGE Reset the printer EL B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA2000 0 Specify 2000 0 as the starting point PD AA0 0 45 25 With the pen down draw a 45 arc positive angle with center coordinates of 0 0 and a chord angle of 25 PU1050 1060 Lift the pen and move to 1050 1060 PD AA0 0 45 10 With the pen down draw a 45 arc negative angle using the same center point as the first arc but with a 10 chord angle AA Arc Absolute 20 11 Table 20 6 Example Varying the Chord Angle continued PU1000 0 Lift the pen and move to 1000 0 PD AAO0 0 45 With the pen down draw another 45 arc positive angle with the same center point but with the default chord angl
256. nt line width type and attributes When you use the symbol mode SM command PA draws the specified symbol at each X Y coordinate When you use the polygon mode PM command the X Y coordinates enter the polygon buffer for use when the polygon is edged or filled Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If an odd number of coordinates is specified in other words an X coordinate without a corresponding Y coordinate the printer ignores the last unmatched coordinate 20 30 The Vector Group EN Table 20 19 Related Commands Group PE Polyline Encoded The Vector Group PR Plot Relative PD Pen Down PU Pen Up LA Line Attributes Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width SM Symbol Mode PD Pen Down This command lowers the printer s logical pen and draws subsequent graphics commands PD X Y or PD Parameter Format Functional Range Default X Y coordinates current 290 to 290 1 no default increments units This command emulates a pen plotter which must lower the pen to draw lines on the page e No Parameters Prepares the printer to draw subsequent graphics commands e X Y Coordinates Increments Draws in current units to the point specified You can specify as many X Y coordinate pairs as you want When you include more than one coordinate pa
257. nt one or if your computer cannot use the default ETX decimal code 3 DT abel terminator mode or DT Parameter Format Functional Range Default label label text any character except ETX terminator NULL LF 5e and decimal code 3 decimal codes 0 5 27 and 59 respectively mode clamped O0 or 1 1 non printing integer The character immediately following DT is interpreted to be the new label terminator You must terminate all Label LB commands following a DT command with the specified label terminator e No Parameter Defaults the label terminator to ETX not a semicolon and the mode to non printing 1 e Label Terminator Specifies the label terminator as the character immediately following the DT mnemonic If you use a space between the mnemonic and the label terminator parameter the space becomes the label terminator 23 44 The Character Group EN e Mode Specifies whether the label terminator is printed 0 The label terminator prints if it is a printable character and performs its function if it is a control code 1 Default The label terminator does not print if it is a printing character and does not perform its function if it is a control code A DT command remains in effect until another DT command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions The following command shows how to define and print using a non printing label terminator
258. nt s point size see the Using the Fl Command example FN font ID Parameter Format Functional Range Default font ID integer 0 to 32767 no default 23 56 The Character Group EN Notes EN When the printer receives this command and the requested font is present the secondary font characteristics are set to those of the requested font If the selected font is proportionally spaced the pitch characteristic is not changed This command does not select the font for label printing if you are currently using the standard font The Fl and FN commands implicitly change the value of SB For example if SB 0 and FI selects a bitmap font SB is set to 1 This affects the performance of certain HP GL 2 commands Refer to SB command later in this chapter Example Using the FN Command The following example demonstrates assigning a font ID number from within PCL mode entering HP GL 2 mode using the FN command to select that font and printing a short line of text Table 23 30 Example Using the FN Command EGE Reset the printer Fe c28D Specify a font ID number of 28 Fe s1 p18v0s3b4148T Select an 18 point Univers Bold font as the primary font Fe c6F Assign the currently selected font as a temporary font with the current ID number 28 FC9e0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP comm
259. nt the fourth image Fc960A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Using Scaling Effectively 19 13 Table 19 4 Example Creating a Mirror Image continued SUBROUTINE Subroutine that prints the arrow figure on the next page PA1 2 PD1 4 3 4 3 7 2 7 4 9 6 7 5 7 5 4 12 4 12 5 14 3 12 1 12 2 1 2 PU P2 3000 5100 P2 1500 5100 P1 1500 3600 P1 3000 3600 First Image Second Image Normal P1 1500 5100 P1 3000 5100 P2 3000 3600 P2 1500 3600 Third Image Fourth Image Figure 19 6 Creating a mirror image 19 14 The Configuration and Status Group EN Notes EN Adapting the HP GL 2 Coordinate System to Match the PCL System The following example uses the IP and SC commands to change HP GL 2 coordinate system to match the default PCL coordinate system The IP command is used to invert the Y axis so that the Y values increase as the pen moves down the page The SC command equates user units to dot positions 800 dots per inch The example draws a few lines in both PCL and HP GL 2 modes to demonstrate that the coordinate systems are lined up correctly the end points of the lines intersect Sending an IN Initialize or DF Default command causes the coordinate system to revert to the HP GL 2 default Since this example is based on the default top margin and text length changing the top margin or the text length moves the two coordinat
260. nter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA2500 2500 Move to absolute location 2500 2500 DT Specify the asterisk as the label terminator SD1 21 2 1 4 25 5 0 6 3 7 4148 SS Designate the 25 point Univers Bold font as the standard font and select it LBThis is a Label Prints This is a Label in the currently selected font Fc960A Enter the PCL mode E cE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page This is 2500 2500 Figure 23 32 23 60 The Character Group a Label EN Table 23 33 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition CP Character Plot DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction DT Define Label Terminator DV Define Variable Text Path ES Extra Space Fl Select Primary Font FN Select Secondary Font LO Label Origin SA Select Alternate Font SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition SI Absolute Character Size SL Character Slant SR Relative Character Size SS Select Standard Font TD Transparent Data The Character Group LB Label 23 61 LO Label Origin This command positions labels relative to the current pen location Use the LO command to center left justify or right justify labels The label can be drawn above or below the current pen location and can
261. of 27 prints a left arrow 23 86 The Character Group EN EN Table 23 55 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition DT Define Label Terminator LB Label SA Select Alternate Font SD Standard Font Definition SS Select Standard Font The Character Group TD Transparent Data 23 87 23 88 The Character Group EN EN A Programming Hints Introduction This chapter provides information for use during the development of PCL software Introduction 24 1 PCL Command Parsing A job stream may contain commands that are device specific If these commands are not supported by the PCL device they are ignored For example a Duplex Print command has no effect on the HP LaserJet Ill IIIP or LaserJet 4 printers since these are non duplexing printers However on printers which support duplex printing such as the HP LaserJet IIID and LaserJet IIISi the job is printed in duplex mode 24 2 Programming Hints EN Job Control Note EN Printer Reset Hewlett Packard strongly recommends the use of both the EE command and the E 12345X command Universal Exit Language Start of PUL also referred to as the UEL Command at the beginning and end of each job The order of these commands is critical refer to Table 24 1 for an example This allows the next job to start with the default settings as a known base Starting with the default environment at the beginning of each print job
262. oke weight to change in relation to the change in P1 P2 If the aspect ratio of the P1 P2 rectangle is maintained as P1 and P2 are moved a medium stroke weight font still looks medium after it is enlarged or reduced Available stroke weights are the same as those available within PCL SD Standard Font Definition 23 71 Table 23 44 Kind 6 Stroke Weight Values Stroke WeightValue Description 7 Ultra Thin 6 Extra Thin 5 Thin 4 Extra Light 3 Light 2 Demi Light 1 Semi Light 0 Medium Book or Text 1 Semi Bold 2 Demi Bold 3 Bold 4 Extra Bold 5 Black 6 Extra Black 7 Ultra Black 9999 Stick font only 1 When the Stick font typeface 48 is selected the value 9999 renders it using the current pen width Kind 7 Typeface The typeface characteristic selects the font s design style which gives the font its distinctiveness Typefaces can only be printed if the printer has access to them if they are internal fonts are soft fonts that are downloaded to the printer or if they reside in a font cartridge or SIMM that is plugged into the printer PCL 5 LaserJet printers have at least three internal scalable typefaces Univers 4148 CG Times 4101 and the Stick font 48 For more information about the printer s internal fonts refer to Chapter 2 of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide 23 72 The Character Group EN EN Example Using the SD Com
263. ommand defines and fills a rectangle using the current pen the current line and fill types and absolute X Y coordinates The RA command includes an automatic pen down When the command operation is complete the original pen location and up down status are restored e X Y Coordinates Specify the corner of the rectangle that is diagonally opposite from the current pen location the starting point of the rectangle Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off Note The following illustration shows the current pen location in the lower left corner and the command s X Y coordinates in the upper right corner Depending on the X Y coordinates used these points can be in any two diagonally opposite corners XY coordinate location Current pen location starting point Figure 21 22Fill Rectangle Absolute EN RA Fill Rectangle Absolute 21 39 The only difference between the RA command and the EA Edge Rectangle Absolute command is that the RA command produces a filled rectangle and EA an outlined one The RA command clears the polygon buffer and then uses it to define the rectangle before drawing Refer to Using the Polygon Buffer earlier in this chapter The following example uses RA with three different fill types to create rectangles such as those you might use in a bar chart The rectangles in the right bar are edged using the EA command
264. ommands do not update the current pen location The definition of each command tells you whether the current pen location is updated or restored Use the Pen Up PU command with the desired X Y coordinates to lift the pen and move it to a new location The Default Values DF command does not reset the current pen location the Initialize IN command moves it to the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame You should specify your beginning pen location for each HP GL 2 drawing Pen Status and Location 17 23 Scaling When you scale a drawing you define your own units of measure ment instead of using plotter units the printer converts your units user units to dot positions for placing the image on the page Scaling allows control of the printer using units that are easy for you to work with For example you can scale your drawing to divide the drawing area into 100 squares As you plan the drawing you can think in terms of 100 squares rather than plotter units Here is another example of scaling since 400 plotter units equals 1 centimeter you can establish this scale to print in user units equal to 1 centimeter each Scaling begins with the scaling points P1 and P2 P1 and P2 act as two points marking opposite corners of a rectangle You can make this rectangle any size and place it anywhere in relation to the origin depending on the plotter unit coordinates you specify for P1 and P2 P1 and P2 default to the lower left and
265. on described earlier in this chapter for additional information 22 ERROR This error indicates an I O protocol problem between the printer and the host system Make sure the printer and the host system protocol hardware handshake or Xon Xoff handshake correspond and that your cable is correct for your host printer configuration 40 ERROR An error occurred while transferring data from the computer to the printer This error occurs if the computer is turned ON and OFF while the printer is on line or if the printer s baud rate parity or data character size are not the same as the computer s To clear the error message press CONTINUE RESET refer to the printer User s Manual Make sure the printer is set to the same baud rate as the computer and that your host I O has been configured for your printer If the error continues call your HP Service Representative For additional printer errors refer to the printer User s Manual Common Errors 24 15 24 16 Programming Hints EN EN Customer Support Support services are available to help you in case you have a question about your HP LaserJet printer Following are some places to turn for this support Help From Your Organization If you organization has many HP printers the best source of assistance may be within your own company Many organizations designate central support personnel to help when you have any problems with your computer system or when you need consum
266. on solid line type followed by a rectangle in solid black beginning at the end point of the previous line use LT99 to print another line in the previous non solid line type Sending any of the following commands while plotting with a solid line type clears the previous line type and a subsequent LT99 has no effect Table 22 12 Commands that Affect LT99 Command Group AC Anchor Corner The Line and Fill LA Line Attributes Attributes Group LT Line Type except LT and LT99 PW Pen Width RF Raster Fill Definition 22 24 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Table 22 12 Commands that Affect LT99 continued SP Select Pen TR Transparency Mode UL User Defined Line Type WU Pen Width Unit Selection DF Default Values The Configuration IN Initialize and Status Group IP Input P1 and P2 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 IW Input Window RO Rotate Coordinate System SC Scale Figure 22 17 first shows the line type patterns then gives the pattern percentages Note Do not use an adaptive line type when drawing circles arcs wedges or polygons The printer attempts to draw the complete pattern in every chord there are 72 chords in a circle using the default chord angle EN LT Line Type 22 25 No Parameter Default Value 8 7 Fixed line types 2 1 0 LI 1 2 Adaptive 3 line 4 4 types 5 6 7 8 M MM One Pattern Length Patter
267. onacereconeeete IRs NOS en x 2 is fet ee hs 2 cet 2820S ves rettet ORR 5 serececenecerececteeracees So ces 20s co e e SO 5 Figure 22 9 PCL Cross Hatch Patterns For fill type 22 the optional parameter selects the corresponding PCL user defined pattern specified by way of the c W command Option1 specifies the pattern associated with the user defined fill pattern Option2 is ignored if present See User Defined Pattern Graphics in Chapter 13 for a discussion of PCL user defined patterns Table 22 6 Example Using the FT Command E Reset the printer 2 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing EN FT Fill Type 22 13 Table 22 6 Example Using the FT Command continued PA2000 2000 Specify absolute plotting and move to location 2000 2000 FT RR2500 300 ER2500 300 Select the default fill type solid black fill a rectangle using solid black fill with the lower left corner being the current pen location and the upper right corner a point 2500 plu to the right and 300 plu up edge the rectangle that was just filled PR0 300 FT3 80 30 RR2500 300 Specify relative plotting and move the pen up 300 plu select fill type number 3 parallel lines with 80 plu between each line with each line tippe
268. or direction at which characters are drawn independent of P1 and P2 settings Use DI to change labeling direction when you are labeling curves in line charts schematic drawings blueprints and survey boundaries DI run rise or DI Table 23 12 Parameter Format Functional Range Default run or cos 6 clamped real 32768 to 32767 1 rise or sin 0 clamped real 32768 to 32767 0 The DI command updates the Carriage Return point to the current location While DI is in effect with or without parameters the label direction is not affected by changes in the locations of P1 and P2 However the Define Variable Text Path DV command interacts with the DI command and DR as explained later in this section e No Parameters Defaults the label direction to absolute and horizontal parallel to X axis Equivalent to DI1 0 e Run or Cos 0 Specifies the X component of the label direction e Rise or Sin 0 Specify the Y component of the label direction Together the parameters specify the slope and direction of the label EN DI Absolute Direction 23 29 You can express the parameters in measured units as rise and run or using the trigonometric functions cosine and sine according to the following relationship Where run and rise number of measured units 0 the angle measured in degrees sin cos 0 rise run 0 tan rise run and tan 0 sin gcos 8 Note that the run and ris
269. ot size is specified any unscaled HP GL 2 image any image created without the SC commana is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the PCL Picture Frame the amount of enlargement or reduction is determined by the picture frame scaling factor the ratio of the HP GL 2 plot size to the PCL Picture Frame size See Chapter 19 to specify an HP GL 2 plot size 18 4 The Picture Frame EN Typical HP GL 2 PlotCommand Sequence Note EN Before we discuss the actual commands and how they operate we will demonstrate the general sequence in which these commands are used to print HP GL 2 files The following command sequence is usually followed when creating HP GL 2 images Send the job contro and page control commands and any other PCL commands that you wish to send before drawing the HP GL 2 image See Chapters 3 4 and 5 for job control and page control information Specify the PCL Picture Frame dimensions using the E eX Picture Frame Horizontal Size and Ec ciY Picture Frame Vertical Size commands These commands determine the boundary of the window in which you place or draw your image The PCL Picture Frame represents the maximum boundary for your HP GL 2 drawing Specify the picture frame anchor point using the EC cOT Set Picture Frame Anchor Point command This command determines the position on the logical page where the upper left corner of the PCL Picture Frame is placed Receipt of this command establishes the PCL p
270. ou want to draw the arc To draw or fill a circle simply specify a 360 degree sweep angle Figure 21 4 shows the different parameters of a wedge with a positive radius A positive angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis as shown below A negative angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis Y 90 B 1809 0 X 270 Figure 21 3 The relationship of the X axis to Y axis and Y axis can change as a result of the scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive or negative angle of rotation 21 6 The Polygon Group EN P2 90 Positive ms sweep angle 7 Positive start angle 180 4 0 Zero degree reference point positive radius N N T em e To n 270 Figure 21 4 Drawing Wedges The following example draws a wedge using the EW command The radius of the wedge is 600 plotter units the wedge begins 90 from the zero degree reference point and the wedge sweeps for 60 Note In the example plots some reference points are added which are not part of the example plot These reference points are added for clarification Table 21 5 Example Drawing Wedges E Reset the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing
271. ource transparency mode 13 2 Source Transparency Mode command 13 6 SP command 22 5 22 38 SP Space 6 7 Space SP control code 6 7 Space character 5 20 spacing 7 4 Glossary 13 character 8 9 24 4 24 5 font header 11 20 font selection command 8 9 8 23 HP GL 2 23 70 special effects fonts 7 11 specifications page boundaries 2 7 2 8 SR command 23 8 23 14 23 81 example 23 83 SS command 23 85 Standard Font Definition command 23 68 standard vs alternate fonts HP GL 2 23 17 start angle 21 6 Start Raster Graphics command 15 14 status readback 16 1 bitmap fonts 16 12 clearing status 16 5 currently selected 16 3 DEFID 16 15 Echo command 16 25 entity 16 3 entity request example 16 4 entity response 16 11 error entity 16 11 error location type 16 8 error codes entity 16 19 Error INVALID ENTITY 16 19 Error INVALID LOCATION 16 19 Index 19 Index 20 Error INVALID UNIT 16 23 Error NONE 16 20 Flush All Pages command 16 24 font extended 16 10 font status 16 10 Free Space command 16 21 IDLIST 16 16 16 17 16 18 inquire entity command 16 10 LARGEST 16 22 location type 16 3 location unit 16 3 LOCTYPE 16 14 16 17 LOCUNIT 16 14 16 17 macro status 16 10 memory 16 2 memory response 16 22 NAME 16 16 response 16 5 response buffer 16 5 response syntax 16 6 response font 16 11 response font extended 16 15 response macro 16 16 response symbol set 16 18 response user defined pattern 16 17 scalable fonts 16 12
272. parallel input output I O interface Also see Parallel 1 0 Character Descriptor The character descriptor is a block of data that identifies the characteristics for a specific character such as its position and the cursor position after printing The character data which follows defines the shape of the character Chapter 11 describes the character definition and descriptor formats for PCL bitmap fonts as well as Intellifont and TrueType scalable fonts Column The width of a column is defined by the current Horizontal Motion Index HMI Compression raster graphics Raster graphics compression methods reduce the amount of code needed to generate a raster graphic image and improve the efficiency with which the image is printed The Set Compression Method command allows you to code raster data in one of four compressed formats Run length encoding tagged imaged file format TIFF rev 4 0 delta row compression and adaptive compression These techniques are described in detail under Set Compression Method Command in Chapter 15 Configuration Configuration is the process of changing certain printer settings to allow a computer to communicate properly with the printer For example interface selection is part of printer configuration The printer is configured using the control panel configuration menu Configuration Menu Identifies printer features which are set from the printer s Operator Control Panel Configuration
273. parameter tables for each command Sending a number outside the reduced parameter range may produce unexpected results 5 Label Any sequence of characters In the HP GL 2 language text is described using the term label Refer to the Label LB command in Chapter 23 for a complete description Numbers within the above mentioned ranges do not cause errors however the range may exceed the printer s physical printing area Numbers that move the pen position outside the effective window result in image clipping This topic is discussed in more detail later in this chapter under The Vector Graphics Limits When you see the term current units in a parameter table the unit system of that parameter depends on whether scaling is on or off When scaling is on the units are user units when scaling is off the units are plotter units described under Units of Measure later in this chapter The printer cannot use exponential format numbers for example 6 03E8 If you are using a computer or language that uses the exponential format you must use integer variables or a formatting technique to output fixed point real numbers Parameter values less than the range maximum are passed by the parser these values may subsequently be unscaled into resolution units e g 7200 units per inch that exceed the device dependent internally representable number range If this occurs the device enters a LOST mode all relative drawing commands are
274. porary 13 23 User Defined Pattern command 13 16 user defined symbol set l introduction 10 1 defined Glossary 15 characters and character mapping 10 4 control command 10 12 creating 10 2 data symbol set format pictured 10 4 defining designing 10 1 definition command 10 4 encoded symbol set designator 10 6 examples 10 13 headers 10 4 ID code 10 6 ID Code command 10 2 used with unbound scalable fonts 10 1 user units 17 11 17 20 creating 17 24 in scaling parameters 19 41 scaling 19 5 19 40 X and Y axis ranges in scaling parameters 19 41 V value field PCL command 1 6 values allowed HP GL 2 17 10 variety font header 11 35 vector fill 22 39 vector graphics Glossary 15 vector graphics limits 17 19 Vector Group HP GL 2 20 1 commands 17 4 vendor version font header typeface 11 24 11 26 vertical character spacing 8 12 cursor positioning control codes 6 13 text path 23 26 Vertical Cursor Positioning command decipoints 6 11 PCL Units 6 12 rows 6 9 Vertical Motion Index VMI 2 5 6 3 command 5 22 vertical motion index VMI Glossary 16 Vertical Picture Frame Size Decipoints command 18 9 Vertical Rectangle Size command decipoints 14 4 PCL Units 14 4 VMI common settings 5 23 designating and computing example 5 22 VMI command 5 22 W wedges drawing in HP GL 2 mode 21 6 EN EN wedges and circles filling example 21 8 WG command 21 6 21 27 21 45 white fill 14 9 14 10 white r
275. position 2500 1500 passing through 3200 800 and ending at 2500 100 PU3200 900 PD Lift the pen move to 3200 900 and set the pen down AT3300 800 3200 700 Print an arc starting at the current pen position passing through 3300 800 and ending at 3200 700 PU3300 800 PD3500 800 Lift the pen move to 3300 800 pen down and draw a line to 3500 800 EQOA Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 650 1150 3300 800 1000 100 Figure 20 12 20 18 The Vector Group EN Table 20 11 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute The Vector Group AR Arc Relative BR Bezier Relative BZ Bezier Absolute Cl Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point LA Line Attributes The Line and Fill Attributes Group LT Line Type PW Pen Width BR Bezier Relative EN This command draws bezier curves using relative coordinates This command uses the current pen position as the first control point and specifies the other three control points as relative increments from the first point BR X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X1 1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 Parameter Format Functional Range Default X4 Y4 control points current 273 to 225 1 no default units The BR command uses the current pen location and three specified control points to draw a bezier curve After each new Bezier the last control point of the p
276. r width in calculating character size Otherwise these commands behave the same as they do with fixed spaced fonts Designating and Selecting Fonts EN If you intend to label with the default fixed spaced font Stick you do not need to use the SD or AD commands for designating standard and alternate fonts However if you intend to use a different font for example to match accompanying PCL text you must use the SD or AD commands to designate fonts before you can select those fonts for labeling using either SA or SS Standard and Alternate Fonts The following outlines some of the principles to use when labeling with different fonts e Designate the standard and alternate fonts using the SD and or AD commands before labeling If you are using the Stick font the default as your standard font you need specify only your alternate font e Select either the standard or alternate font using either the SS or SA command before labeling Note that labeling always begins with the standard font unless you use the SA command before you begin your label or finish the previous label in the alternate font e Switch from the standard font to the alternate font either using SS and SA or the Shift In Shift Out method If you are changing fonts within a text string the Shift In Shift Out method is usually more efficient Switch from the standard font to the alternate font using the ASCII Shift Out control character SO decimal code
277. raws an arc starting at the current pen location using the current pen up down status and line type and attributes After drawing the arc the pen location remains at the end of the arc EN AA Arc Absolute 20 9 Note Do not use an adaptive line type when drawing arcs with small chord angles The printer attempts to draw the complete pattern in every chord there are 72 chords in a circle using the default chord angle XCenter YCenter Specify the absolute location of the center of the arc The center of the arc is the center of the circle that would be drawn if the arc was 360 degrees Coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If current scaling is not isotropic the arc drawn is elliptical rather than circular Sweep Angle Specifies in degrees the angle through which the arc is drawn A positive angle is drawn in a positive direction angle of rotation a negative angle is drawn in the negative direction Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 degrees The chord angle specifies in degrees the maximum angle created when lines from each end of the chord intersect the center point of the circle see drawing below The smaller the chord angle the smoother the curve Arc Segment Chord Angle 7 Drawn Chord Figure 20 7 Chord Angle 20 10 The Vector Group EN EN e Fora specific chord a
278. rcs The Arc Absolute AA and Arc Relative AR commands use the following method for drawing arcs Your current pen location becomes one end of the arc you specify the center point with one parameter setting the radius and set another parameter to specify the number of degrees through which you want the arc drawn The following illustration shows a simple command sequence using the AA command to draw a circle and an arc Table 20 4 Example Drawing Arcs ESE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA4200 2900 PD Set starting point to 4200 2900 and set pen down EN Drawing Arcs 20 5 Table 20 4 Example Drawing Arcs AA4600 2500 180 Using the Arc Absolute command specify the pivot point of the arc thereby setting the radius draw the arc for 180 in a negative angle of rotation E A Enter the PCL mode EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page Current pen location starting point 4200 2900 iom P di 4600 2500 Figure 20 3 Drawing arcs 1 of 3 20 6 The Vector Group EN NoteS Note EN Angle of Rotation A positive angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis as shown below A negative angle of rotation is in the direction of the X a
279. re preceded by an absolute value flag Relative integer coordinates produce the most compact data stream For best results scale your drawings so you use only integer coordinates and use relative plotting mode After PE is executed the previous plotting mode absolute or relative is restored 20 34 The Vector Group EN The PE command represents vectors in base 64 default or base 32 explained under Encoding PE Flag Values and X Y Coordinates In parameter value data all spaces delete characters control characters as well as ASCII characters 128 160 and 255 are ignored e No parameters Updates the Carriage Return point The PE command without parameters does not affect the pen s current location or up down status e Flag Indicates how the printer interprets subsequent values Flags are ASCII characters and are not encoded The printer disregards the eighth bit of a flag fro example a character code of 61 and a character code of 189 both send a the absolute flag Table 20 22 Flag Meaning Description Select Pen Indicates that the subsequent value is the desired pen number A PE command without pen select defaults to the currently selected pen Pen Up Raises the pen and moves to the subsequent coordinate pair value All coordinate pair values not preceded by a pen up flag are considered pen down moves gt Fractional Indicates that the subsequent value Data specifies the
280. relative to P1 and P2 locations DT Define Label Terminator Defines the character or code that turns off labeling DV Define Variable Text Path Specifies the label path as right left up or down ES Extra Space Increases or reduces space between label characters and lines Fl Select Primary Font Selects as standard a font previously assigned a PCL font ID number FN Select Secondary Font Selects as alternate a font previously assigned a PCL font ID number LB Label Prints text using the currently selected font LO Label Origin Positions labels relative to the current pen location SA Select Alternate Font Selects the font designated by AD for labeling SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts Specifies the type of fonts to be used for labels SD Standard Font Definition Specifies the standard font for labeling SI Absolute Character Size Specifies an absolute character size in centimeters SL Character Slant Specifies the slant at which labels are printed SR Relative Character Size Specifies the size of characters as a percentage of the P1 P2 distance SS Select Standard Font Selects the font designated by SD for labeling 23 2 The Character Group EN Table 23 1 The Character Group Commands continued TD Transparent Data Specifies whether control characters perform their function or are printed as
281. revious curve becomes the first control point of the next Bezier All curve control points are relative to the first control point of that curve For example points 1 2 and 3 of the example are relative to the starting point while points 4 5 and 6 are relative to point 3 BR Bezier Relative 20 19 Bezier curves are drawn with the current pen line type current line attributes and pen state up down The curve is clipped to the hard clip limits and the soft clip window Following the command execution the current pen position is updated to the end point of the curve The BR command is allowed in Polygon Mode The first chord after PM1 is not treated as a pen up move e X Y Specify the location of the second X4 Y4 third X2 Y2 and fourth Xa Y3 control points in relative increments relative to the first control point Table 20 12 Example Using the BR Command Bezier Relative EGE Reset the printer E c B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1016 5080 Specify the absolute point 1016 5080 as the starting location PR PD Specify relative plotting and pen down BR0 3048 4572 0 3556 2032 508 1016 2540 508 2540 5080 Draw a Bezier using the current position 1016 5080 as the first control point The specified control points for
282. rimary use of this command is with display functions mode The factory default is end of line wrap disabled Example To enable end of line wrap mode send E c amp s0C Display Functions Mode The Display Functions Mode command allows all escape sequences and control codes to be printed instead of being executed Ea Y Enables Display Functions Mode Es Z Disables Display Functions Mode 24 12 Programming Hints EN Note Note EN When the printer is in display functions mode all control codes and escape sequences are printed and not executed with the following exceptions e CRis printed and executed as CR LF e EcZis printed and executed Display functions mode instructs the printer to display rather than execute the data it receives The data is printed using the current text area and selected font To print characters 0 7 15 and 27 in fonts which have printable characters in these positions such as PC 8 the printer must be in Display Function Mode or be given a Transparent Print command Example To enable display functions mode send E c amp s0C Enables end of line wrap to prevent data truncation EcY Enable Display Functions Mode Data sent to the printer EZ Disable Display Functions Mode Most symbol sets do not have printable characters defined in the control code decimal range 0 to 31 and 128 to 159 If a printable character is not defined a Spa
283. riptor which identifies the basic characteristics common to all characters of a font such as font type baseline position character cell width and height character orientation symbol set etc Chapter 11 describes the font header and character definition formats for PCL bitmap fonts as well as Intellifont and TrueType scalable fonts Height The height of a font is the measurement of the body of the type in points A PCL point is 1 72nd inch The body of the type is slightly greater than the distance from the bottom of a descender such as E the tail of lower case p to the top of an unaccented capital letter Glossary 5 Glossary 6 Horizontal Motion Index HMI HMI defines the distance between columns in 1 120 inch increments When fixed pitch fonts are selected all printable characters including the space and backspace characters are affected by HMI When proportional fonts are selected the HMI affects only the space character HMI is defaulted when font orientation symbol set pitch spacing or height is specified and when switching between primary and secondary fonts with Shift In and Shift Out The default HMI is equal to the pitch value in the font header The factory default font s HMI is 12 which is 12 120 1 10 inch per character or 10 characters per inch HP GL 2 PCL 5 printers provide the ability to print vector graphics using the HP GL 2 graphics language commands HP GL 2 graphics may be created
284. rise first draw a grid with the lines parallel to the X and Y axis The grid units should be the same size on all sides but their actual size is irrelevant Then draw a line parallel to the label and one parallel to the X axis The lines should intersect to form an angle Select a point on the open end of your angle where another line would create a triangle On the line parallel to the X axis count the number of grid units from the intersection of the two lines to your selected point This is the run In the illustration above the run is 8 5 Now count the number of units from your selected point along a perpendicular line that intersects the line along the label This is the rise In the illustration above the rise is 4 9 Your DI command using the run and rise is DI8 5 4 9 If you know the angle 8 you can use the trigonometric functions sine sin and cosine cos In this example 8 30 cos 30 0 866 and sin 30 0 5 Your DI command using the sine and cosine would be DI 866 5 Whichever set of parameters you use the label is drawn in the same direction as shown in the previous illustration 23 32 The Character Group EN EN When using either method at least one parameter must not be zero The ratio of one parameter to the other is more important than the actual numbers The following table lists three common label angles produced by using 1 s and 0 s Table 23 13 DI Command Label Direction
285. rminator and the LB command to print the label including Carriage Returns and Line Feeds Printing Labels 23 3 Note In the examples in this chapter the left column identifies the command sequence data for the plot If the label command text is too wide for the column width is it continued on a second line which might indicate a Carriage Return in the text In actual use the text should be presented on one line with no carriage returns Ifa Carriage Return is required in the example it is indicated as CR LF Table 23 2 Example Printing Labels EoE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA1500 2500 SD1 21 2 1 4 25 Specify absolute plotting and move to 1500 2500 Designate the 25 point Univers Italic font 5 1 6 0 7 52 as the standard font DT 1 Define the asterisk character as the label terminator the 1 indicates the terminator shouldn t be printed SA Select the alternate font for printing Since an alternate font hasn t been designated the default 11 5 point Stick font is selected LBThis is the Print the first line of text followed by two Stick Font Default Carriage Returns and two Line Feed CR LF CH LF control codes Notice how the asterisk terminates the label SS Select the standard font LBThis is Univer
286. ross hatch patterns and PCL user defined patterns e No Parameters Defaults to no screening solid fill same as SVO0 SV Screened Vectors 22 39 e Screen type Selects the types of screening as follows 0 No screening 1 Shaded fill 2 HP GL 2 User defined raster fill RF command 21 Predefined PCL cross hatch patterns 22 PCL user defined raster fill RF command Option1 Option2 The definition of these optional parameters depends on the screen type selected The following table lists the options available for each fill type Table 22 21 Screen Type Description Option1 Option2 1 Shaded Fill Shading Ignored 0 to 100 2 HP GL 2 Pattern Index 0 Pen 1 User defined 1 Current Pen Raster Fill 21 PCL Cross hatch 1 6 Ignored 22 PCL User defined Pattern ID Ignored Pattern Fill For Type 1 specify the shading percentage using a number from 0 to 100 For example to print vectors that are shaded 15 specify SV1 15 For Type 2 option specifies the index number of the fill pattern created using the RF Raster Fill Definition command Option2 specifies whether the pattern should be printed in the color of pen number 1 option2 0 parameter or the current pen option2 1 parameter The selected pen is applied to the 1 s pixels in the raster pattern For Type 21 the optioni parameter selects one of the six predefined PCL cross hatch patterns u
287. roup EN EN Example Using the SR Command The following example first shows a label with a character size relative to P1 and P2 SR Next the locations of P1 and P2 are changed then the character size percentages are specified Notice that the new character size has equal parameters of 2 5 because the P1 P2 area is square the resulting characters are square Table 23 51 Example Using the SR Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing IP 6956 4388 Move P1 to 6956 4388 and P2 to 6956 4388 6956 4388 DT Specify as the label terminator SR PA0 2700 Default the character size as a percentage LBRELATIVE of the P1 P2 rectangle move the pen to LABEL SIZE 0 2700 and print RELATIVE LABEL SIZE 1P0 0 5500 5500 PAO 2000 Move P1 to 0 0 and P2 to 5500 5500 then move the pen to 0 2000 LBNEW P1 AND P2 CHANGE LABEL SIZE Print NEW P1 AND P2 CHANGE LABEL SIZE PAO 1000 SR2 5 2 5 Move to 0 1000 and set the character size to 2 5 by 2 5 of the P1 P2 rectangle LBNEW SRm INSTRUCTION CP Print NEW SR INSTRUCTION and send CP for Carriage Return Line Feed LBCHANGES Print CHANGES LABEL SIZE LABEL SIZE Fe960A Enter the PCL mode EOE Send a reset to end the
288. s Italic Print the next line of text in the newly specified font FC960A Enter the PCL mode E cE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 23 4 The Character Group EN This is the Stick Font Default 1500 2500 This ts Univers Italic Figure 23 1 Moving to the Carriage Return Point When you begin labeling the current pen location is the Carriage Return point the beginning of your line of text is the point at which the pen is returned when a Carriage Return control code is sent to the printer When the printer encounters a Character Plot CP command or a Carriage Return control code within a Label command the pen moves to the Carriage Return point adjusted up or down by any line feeds The Character Plot command is described later in this chapter The following commands update the Carriage Return point to the current pen location Table 23 3 Commands Updating Carriage Return Point to Current Location Mnemonic Command Name AA Arc Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point BZ Bezier Absolute BR Bezier Relative DF Default Values DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction Printing Labels 23 5 Table 23 3 Commands Updating Carriage Return Point to Current Location continued DV Define Variable Text Path IN Initialize LO Label Origin PA Plot Absolute PE Polyline Encoded P
289. se the symbol set ID value as defined by the Symbol Set ID Code Command See Chapter 10 for more information Vector Graphics A method of drawing lines area fills and other objects which is generally more efficient than raster graphics Also see HP GL 2 Glossary 15 Glossary 16 Vertical Motion Index VMl VMI vertical motion index VMI defines the distance between rows in 1 48th inch increments This command affects the Line Feed and Half Line Feed spacing The factory default VMI is eight which corresponds to six lines per inch A user default VMI can be selected from the control panel using the FORM menu item EN EN Index Symbols IIPCL 5 Comparison Guide x IISoftware Application Notes vi I TrueType Font File Specification x A Page Size 5 2 C Vertical Motion Index 5 22 D Line Spacing 5 24 E Top Margin 5 16 F Text Length 5 18 3G Output Bin Selection 4 12 3H Paper Source 5 4 L Perforation Skip 5 19 O Page Orientation 5 5 S Simplex Duplex Print 4 5 U Left Offset Registration 4 7 X Number of Copies 4 4 Z Top Offset Registration 4 8 amp minus 4 3 amp amp amp ell 4 4 4 5 4 7 4 8 4 11 4 12 5 4 5 5 5 16 5 18 5 19 5 22 5 24 amp amp a C Horizontal Cursor Positioning Columns 6 4 amp amp a G Duplex Page Side Selection 4 10 amp amp a H Horizontal Cursor Positioning Decipoints 6 6 amp amp a L Left Margin 5
290. semicolon or the first letter of the next mnemonic a white space or a tab exceptions LB uses a user defined terminator PE cannot use the first letter of the next mnemonic The last command prior to exiting HP GL 2 mode must be terminated with a semicolon The following illustration shows the flexibility of the syntax Each variation of the two command sequence is permissible however the method shown on the left is recommended in most instances The recommended method uses the first letter of the next mnemonic to terminate commands uses no space between the mnemonic and its parameters and separates parameters with a comma For clarity examples in this HP GL 2 section of the manual use semicolons as terminators as shown in the middle example below PDPU10 20 PD PU10 20 PD PU 16 26 Recommended Figure 17 2 Illustration of Syntax Flexibility HP GL 2 Commands and Syntax 17 7 The next section explains how the syntax of individual commands is presented Notations Used to Express Syntax The following describes the notations used in the syntax section of each command description Mnemonic For readability the mnemonic is shown in uppercase and separated from the parameters and or terminator parameters Parameters are shown in italic Parameters in square brackets are optional param1 param2 param1 param2 These optional parameters must be paired params params These parameters may be given t
291. sing a value between 1 and 6 Refer to the FT command for an illustration of the six different patterns and their corresponding parameter numbers 22 40 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN For Type 22 the optional parameter selects the corresponding PCL user defined pattern specified by way of the c W command Option1 specifies the pattern associated with the user defined fill pattern Option2 is ignored if present See User Defined Pattern Graphics in Chapter 13 for a discussion of PCL user defined patterns All parameters are optional If all parameters are omitted screening is turned off the vectors are solid If screen type is present but option1 and or option2 are omitted values previously specified for the specified screen type are used If none have been specified since the last power on IN DF or E Reset the defaults are assumed All screening patterns use the current anchor corner see the AC command description Table 22 22 Related Commands Group AC Anchor Corner The Line and Fill Attributes Group FT Fill Type PW Pen Width RF Raster Fill Definition WU Pen Width Unit Selection Table 22 23 POSSIBLE ERROR CONDITIONS Condition Printer Response 1 or more parameters ignores parameter SV Screened Vectors 22 41 TR Transparency Mode This command defines how the white areas of the source graphics image affect the destination graphics image
292. spacing and direction This chapter explains the commands that control these features This chapter also tells you how to select fonts other than the default font 23 14 The Character Group EN Using Fonts In HP GL 2 mode the printer uses three different types of fonts Scalable fonts Characters can be displayed at any size The characters are defined as a set of points on the outline of a character and corresponding mathematical relationships describing the interaction between these outline points A scalable outline character can be resized using SI and SR rotated using DI and DR and distorted using SL Bitmap fonts Characters defined as an array of dots ina raster pattern A bitmap character cannot be transformed using SI SR or SL but they can be used with all of the other commands in this chapter see the SB commana Bitmap characters are always placed in an orthogonal direction to the PCL page closest to the print direction established using the DI and DR commands see Figure 23 17 Stick and Arc fonts Characters are drawn as a series of vectors The characters are defined as a set of endpoints You can resize using SI or SR rotate using DI and DR and distort using SL Stick fonts Stick fonts are defined on a dimensionless grid The main body of each character fits within a 32 by 32 unit box with descenders extending beneath The Stick font is fixed spaced and the Arc font is proportional
293. sparent print model mode 13 3 tray output 4 12 treatment Glossary 14 tree data Intellifont character descriptor 11 64 tree offset Intellifont character descriptor 11 64 troubleshooting auto continue mode 24 14 Troubleshooting command 24 12 TrueType data segment 11 41 font header 11 13 fonts character coordinates 11 5 glyph data 11 69 glyphs downloading 11 49 scalable fonts 11 3 two byte typeface value 11 24 type location status readback 16 3 user defined symbol set header 10 6 typeface 7 7 Glossary 14 base value 11 27 family value 11 27 font header 11 24 font header previous usage 11 26 font selection Family command 8 18 HP GL 2 23 72 in font selection 8 24 internal 7 2 one byte value 11 24 two byte value 11 24 Typeface Family command 8 18 typographic point vs PCL decipoint 6 4 vs PCL point 2 5 U UEL Universal Exit Language Glossary 14 UL command 22 44 unbound font 16 13 Glossary 1 character complement 10 7 character complement numbers 9 10 character requirements number 9 10 creation 9 8 downloading 9 8 scalable also see unbound font 9 8 scalable fonts and user defined symbol sets 10 1 selection 9 8 status readback 16 13 symbol collections 9 9 symbol set mapping 9 11 typeface 9 8 underline fixed 8 29 floating 8 29 position distance font header 11 29 thickness font header 11 29 Underline command 8 29 unencoded adaptive compression 15 25 Unicode Glossary 14 and MSL numbers 9 11 charac
294. ss specifically desired for plotting It is shown here on two lines with a Carriage Return for convenience only SD4 18 Fl15 SS Use the SD command to designate an 18 point font from within HP GL 2 mode then select the PCL font with font ID number of 15 as the primary font Then select the primary font for printing LBLaserJetPrinters Print LaserJet Printers in the newly selected font Fe960A Enter the PCL mode ESE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page FI Select Primary Font 23 55 LaserJet Pr inters LaserJet Printers Figure 23 30 Table 23 29 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition The Character Group LB Label SA Select Alternate Font SD Standard Font Definition SS Select Standard Font Es X Select Primary Font by ID PCL Commands ae X Select Secondary Font by ID Fe citD Assign Font ID Fc c c6F Font Control Copy Assign FN Select Secondary Font This command allows any accessible font that has been assigned a font ID number to be selected as the secondary alternate font the font characteristics are assigned to the secondary font The font must be accessible to the printer as either a resident font a downloaded font or a loaded cartridge font To be selected the font must have been previously assigned a font ID number in PCL mode Also the FN command must be accompanied by an AD command specifying the fo
295. ssed in Chapter 23 The Character Group 19 12 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN The following example uses a subroutine to draw the same picture an arrow four times Because the program changes the relative locations of P1 and P2 the direction of the arrow is different in each of the four drawings The program sets P1 and P2 draws the plot then returns to reset P1 and P2 using the IP command This continues until all four possible mirror images are plotted The original drawing is shown in each picture so you can compare the orientation of the mirror image Table 19 4 Example Creating a Mirror Image EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 You must use the SP command to enable printing IP 1500 3600 3000 5100 Specify the P1 P2 locations for the first arrow figure SC 15 15 10 10 Set up user scaling 15 10 to 15 10 Run subroutine Run the subroutine below that prints the arrow image 1P3000 3600 1500 5100 Change the physical locations of P1 and P2 to flip the image to the left Run subroutine Print the second image IP1500 5100 3000 3600 Change the physical locations of P1 and P2 to flip the image down Run subroutine Print the third image 1P3000 5100 1500 3600 Change P1 P2 locations to flip the image to the left and down Run subroutine Pri
296. t UEL page length paper size or orientation commands default the horizontal picture frame size If an HP GL 2 plot size is specified the horizontal picture frame size is used to determine the horizontal scaling factor used for scaling the image to fit in the picture frame 18 8 The Picture Frame EN Example To specify a horizontal picture frame size of 5 inches send E c3600X 5 in x 720 decipoints in 2 3600 decipoints Vertical Picture Frame Size Decipoints This PCL command specifies the vertical dimension of the window used for printing an HP GL 2 plot Ec cd Y it Vertical size in decipoints 1 720th inch Default The distance between the default top and bottom margins the default text length Range 0 32767 valid to 4 decimal places Note The vertical dimension specified is parallel to the PCL Y axis when the print direction is set to 0 degrees the default Example To specify a vertical picture frame size of 6 5 inches send E c4680Y 6 5 in x 720 decipoints in 4680 decipoints EN Vertical Picture Frame Size Decipoints 18 9 Set Picture Frame Anchor Point Note This command sets the location of the PCL Picture Frame anchor point to the PCL cursor position ES cOT Default 0 Range 0 The position of the picture frame anchor point defines the location of the upper left corner of the PCL Picture Frame The upper left refers to the corner for which X and Y coordinates are min
297. t in the order listed You should have drawn an arrow This is a simple demonstration of defining a vector image when in HP GL 2 mode To specify a point when programming an application you must always give a complete X Y coordinate pair the X coordinate is first and the Y coordinate second This manual shows coordinate pairs in parentheses X Y for clarity Do not use parentheses in your command sequence Using the default HP GL 2 coordinate system the origin is in the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame as shown in Figure 17 5 Using the IP or IR commands you can move the origin to other locations Then using the SC command you can define practically any unit coordinate system This process is discussed in more detail later in this chapter under Scaling and also in Chapter 19 Physical Page PCL Picture Frame The Default HP GL 2 Coordinate System is positioned so the PCL Picture Frame Lies in the Upper Right PCL Quadrant of the Cartesian Coordinate System Origin 0 0 Figure 17 5 The Default HP GL 2 Coordinate System 17 16 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN HP GL 2 amp PCL Orientation Interactions The relationship between the orientation of the HP GL 2 coordinate system and the PCL coordinate system is important Figure 17 6 illustrates this relationship for the default HP GL 2 orientation RO 0 and the PCL logical page orientation As shown in the illustration in th
298. tal size in inches Default Range width of the currently selected picture frame 0 to 32767 valid to 4 decimal places The horizontal HP GL 2 plot size determines the horizontal scaling factor used to fit the drawing into the PCL Picture Frame For example if the horizontal HP GL 2 plot size is specified as 12 inches and the PCL Picture Frame width is 4 inches the horizontal scaling factor would be 3 1 the horizontal component of the image would be reduced to one third its original size to fit into the PCL Picture Frame A parameter value of zero or a reset page length paper size or orientation command defaults the HP GL 2 plot size to the width of the currently selected picture frame resulting in no scaling Example If the original HP GL 2 drawing is 8 5 inches wide send EC c8 5K HP GL 2 Plot Horizontal Size 18 11 HP GL 2 Plot Vertical Size 18 12 The Picture Frame This command specifies the vertical size of the HP GL 2 drawing being imported Eat c L The vertical size in inches Default Range height of the currently selected picture frame 0 to 32767 valid to 4 decimal places The vertical HP GL 2 plot size value determines the vertical scaling factor used to fit the drawing into the PCL Picture Frame For example if the vertical HP GL 2 plot size is specified as 7 inches and the PCL Picture Frame height is 14 inches the vertical scaling factor would be 1 2 the vertical component of the
299. tation 180 Rotates and shifts the coordinate system 180 degrees ina positive angle of rotation from PCL s current orientation 270 Rotates and shifts the coordinate system 270 degrees in a positive angle of rotation from PCLs current orientation Angle of Rotation Note A positive angle of rotation is in the direction of the X axis to the Y axis as shown below A negative angle of rotation is not allowed in the RO command 19 34 The Configuration and Status Group EN Note EN 90 N 180 0 X Fa 270 Figure 19 14 Angle of rotations The relationship of the X axis to Y axis can change as a result of the scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive angle of rotation The physical location of the pen does not change when you rotate the coordinate system The printer updates the pen s X Y coordinate location to reflect the new orientation The scaling points P1 and P2 rotate with the coordinate system However they maintain the same X Y coordinate values as before the rotation This means that P1 and P2 can be located outside of the PCL Picture Frame Follow the RO90 or RO270 commands with IP or IR to relocate points P1 and P2 to the lower left and upper right corners of the picture frame When the RO command is used the soft clip window if defined is also rotated and any portion that is rotated outside of the picture frame is clipped to the pict
300. ter automatically rounds fractional parameters to the nearest integer Sending a number outside this range does not cause an error but the number is clamped to the limits of the range For example when parsing a clamped integer the printer treats all numbers above 32 767 as 32 767 Certain commands have parameters which are restricted to a smaller range These ranges are listed in the parameter tables for each command Sending a number outside the reduced parameter range may produce unexpected results 3 HeaL A number with an integer portion from 1 073 741 823 230 1 to 1 073 741 823 230 1 You are assured of at least 6 significant digits including integer and fractional portion You may omit the decimal point when no decimal fraction is specified Sending a number outside the parameter range may produce unexpected results 17 10 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Note Notes EN 4 Clamped Reat A number with an integer portion from 32 768 to 32 767 you are assured of at least 6 significant digits including integer and fractional portion You may omit the decimal point when no decimal fraction is specified Sending a number outside this range does not cause an error but the number is clamped to the limits of the range For example the printer treats all numbers above 32 767 as 32 767 Certain commands have parameters which are restricted to a smaller range These ranges are listed in the
301. ter requirements 10 9 symbol index example 10 13 10 14 unit of measure Glossary 15 Unit Of Measure command 4 13 unit location status readback 16 3 Index 21 units coordinate system 6 3 cursor positioning 6 3 design window 11 4 internal printer 2 5 of measure HP GL 2 17 20 PCL coordinate system 2 5 Universal Exit Language UEL Glossary 14 Universal Exit Language command 4 3 unsigned byte UB 10 5 11 14 character descriptor 11 51 unsigned integer UI 10 5 11 14 character descriptor 11 51 unsigned long integer ULI 10 5 11 14 upright style 7 6 user default Glossary 15 computing text length 5 18 environment 3 1 Glossary 15 environment settings 3 6 symbol set 8 6 user memory 8 3 user defined fill definition raster 22 32 fill patterns 14 9 22 13 fill types HP GL 2 22 4 fonts naming ASC 16 11 33 symbol set 8 7 User Defined Line Type command 22 44 user defined pattern l introduction 13 13 defined Glossary 15 assign ID 13 8 14 5 base pattern 13 13 data 13 18 data see also descriptor 13 16 define pattern command 13 16 deleting 13 23 descriptor format header 13 16 entity 16 3 example 13 19 fill example 14 17 header fields see also user defined pattern descriptor fields 13 16 ID number 13 16 Pattern Control command 13 23 Pattern ID command 13 8 14 5 permanent 13 23 reference point 13 14 selecting ID 13 8 14 5 Set Pattern Reference Point command 13 22 status readback 16 10 16 17 tem
302. tern Transparency Mode command 13 7 PCL adapting to match HP GL 2 19 15 architecture 1 2 bitmap fonts 11 51 character definition 11 48 command processing time 24 10 commands 1 3 Glossary 9 commands unsupported 1 2 coordinate system 2 1 2 4 2 5 19 15 coordinate system width and height 14 2 coordination system units Glossary 9 default settings 3 2 Enter PCL Mode command 18 14 escape sequences 1 3 history 1 1 job control commands 4 1 levels 1 2 macro overlay environment 12 4 12 5 matching HP GL 2 coordinates 17 17 19 15 page control 24 4 PCL point vs typographic point 2 5 PCL Units vs printed dots 2 3 2 5 point 7 5 print model 13 1 printer program language 1 1 printer reset command 4 2 status readback see also status readback 16 1 unit of measure for cursor movements 4 13 units 6 3 Glossary 9 PCL picture frame 17 19 18 1 adjusting image size scaling 18 3 anchor point 18 1 boundaries 19 6 creating a simple drawing example 18 16 example 18 6 scaling 18 3 scaling factor 18 1 Set Anchor Point command 18 10 size horizontal 18 8 size vertical 18 9 PCL HP GL 2 orientation interactions 17 17 PD command 17 21 20 2 20 31 PE command 20 34 example 20 41 pen absolute vs relative movement 17 25 automatic pen down 17 21 location 17 21 17 23 19 35 23 5 movement for labeling 23 24 selection 22 5 22 38 status 17 21 width 22 30 width unit selection 22 46 Pen Down PD comm
303. ters as follows e No Parameters Resets the soft clip limits to the PCL Picture Frame limits e X Y Coordinates Specify the opposite diagonal corners of the window area usually the lower left LL and upper right UR corners Coordinates are interpreted in the current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off When scaling is on subsequent changes to P1 and P2 move the window in relation to the physical page but keep the same user coordinate locations However sending a subsequent SC command binds the window to its equivalent plotter units The window does not change with any subsequent IP or IR commands IW Input Window 19 29 When you turn on the printer the window is automatically set to the PCL Picture Frame boundaries You can define a window that extends beyond the picture frame however the printer cannot print vector graphics beyond the effective window All programmed pen motion is restricted to this area For more information refer to Windowing Setting Up Soft Clip Limits at the beginning of this chapter Edge of Printing ac Medium ogica Page Hard Clip Limits Picture Effective Frame Window User Defined Window IW Command Figure 19 12 The Effective Window If the window falls entirely outside of the PCL Picture Frame no image is drawn The IW command remains in effect until another IW command is executed or the printer is initialized or set
304. ters producing mirror images of labels A negative width parameter mirrors labels in the right to left direction SI 6 9 LBPrint tang Figure 23 35 23 76 The Character Group EN A negative height parameter mirrors labels in the top to bottom direction SI 6 9 LBPrint bur Figure 23 36 Negative width and height parameters together mirror labels in both directions causing the label to appear to be rotated 180 degrees SI 6 9 LBPrint JUL Figure 23 37 Table 23 47 Related Commands Group AD Alternate Font Definition CP Character Plot DI Absolute Direction DR Relative Direction LB Label SB Scalable or Bitmap Fonts SD Standard Font Definition SR Relative Character Size The Character Group EN SI Absolute Character Size 23 77 SL Character Slant This command specifies the slant at which labels are drawn Use SL to create slanted text for emphasis or to re establish upright labeling after an SL command with parameters has been in effect Note that the SL command has no effect when an SB1 command is in effect SL tangent of angle or SL Table 23 48 Parameter Format Functional Range Default tangent of angle clamped real 32768 to 32767 0 The printer interprets the parameters as follows e No Parameter Defaults the slant to zero no slant Equivalent to SLO e Tangent of Angle Interpreted as
305. that the original HP GL 2 plot size is 8 5 inches wide by 11 inches high This sets up a scaling factor of 2 1 because the original HP GL 2 plot size is twice as large as the PCL Picture Frame 4 25 x 5 5 inches If you are creating a drawing within an application instead of importing an existing plot do not send this command Enter HP GL 2 mode with the pen HP GL 2 cursor at the PCL cursor position In this example the cursor would be at the picture frame anchor point 600 PCL Units down from the top of the logical page and 565 PCL Units to the right of the left logical page boundary EN EN Table 18 1 Example Creating and Using a PCL Picture Frame IN SP1 PU50 50 Send the HP GL 2 commands you desire to send The IN command defaults the pen position to the HP GL 2 origin the lower left corner of the PCL Picture Frame E 961A Enter the PCL mode with the cursor at the current HP GL 2 pen position TextTextText Send some text or more PCL commands E E Reset the printer to end the job and eject a page Anchor Point 565x600Y PCL Picture Frame 4 25 x 5 5 g N HP GL2 Origin 0 0 Figure 18 2 The previous example provides an idea of the commands involved in printing an HP GL 2 plot whether importing an existing drawing or creating one within an application The example describes one way to print a plot but many things can be varied such as the picture frame size and location and the
306. the parameter values and corresponding fill types e Option1 Option2 The definition of these optional parameters depends on the type of fill selected The following table lists the options available for each fill type Table 22 5 Fill Type Description Option1 Option2 1 and 2 solid black ignored ignored 3 bes parallel spacing of lines angle of lines ines FT Fill Type 22 9 Table 22 5 continued 4 cross hatch spacing of lines angle of lines 10 shading shading level ignored 11 HP GL 2 raster fill index ignored user defined 21 PCL cross hatch pattern type ignored patterns 22 PCL user defined pattern ID ignored For fill types 3 and 4 the option parameter specifies the distance between the lines in the fill This distance is specified in current units measured along the X axis Option1 must be a positive number if zero then 196 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 is used The default spacing is 196 of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2 Subsequent changes in the P1 P2 locations affect this distance only if the spacing is defined in user units an SC command is in effect For fill types 3 and 4 the option2 parameter specifies an angle in degrees for the lines of the fill This angle is a positive angle referenced from the positive plotter unit X axis as shown in the following illustration O and 180 are horizontal 90 and 270 are vertical T
307. the first curve are 0 3048 4572 0 and 3556 2032 The second curve uses the last control point of the previous curve as the first control point 3556 2032 The other three control points for the second curve are 508 1016 2540 508 and 2540 5080 E A Enter the PCL mode EE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page 20 20 The Vector Group EN 0 3048 e l l I l l 1 l l l lh 1016 5080 Starting Point 1st Control Point Points 1 2 and 3 relative to this point Q 106 Points 4 5 and 6 x relative to this point o 2540 50 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 1 2 3 4 5 6 a i a et ee BRO 3048 4572 0 3556 2032 508 1016 2540 508 2540 5080 2540 5080 Figure 20 13 Table 20 13 Related Commands Group AA Arc Absolute BZ Bezier Absolute AR Arc Relative AT Absolute Arc Three Point Cl Circle RT Relative Arc Three Point The Vector Group LA Line Attributes LT Line Type PW Pen Width The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN BR Bezier Relative 20 21 BZ Bezier Absolute This command draws bezier curves using absolute coordinates The BZ command uses the current pen position as the first control point and specifies the other three control points as absolute coordinates BZ X4 Y4 Xo Yo X3 Y
308. the line from the current pen position to the intermediate point e If the current pen position intermediate point and end point are collinear a straight line is drawn e If the intermediate point does not lie between the current pen location and the end point and the three points are collinear two lines are drawn one from the current pen location and the other from the end point leaving a gap between them Refer to the following illustration Both lines extend to the PCL Picture Frame limits or current window X Intermediate point PCL Picture location wa Frame Figure 20 11 Table 20 10 Example Using the AT Command EGE Reset the printer E B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black PA1000 100 Specify 1000 100 as the starting PD2500 100 location place the pen down and draw a line to 2500 100 PU650 1150 Lift the pen move to 650 1150 PD1000 1150 place the pen down and draw a line to 1000 1150 EN AT Absolute Arc Three Point 20 17 Table 20 10 Example Using the AT Command continued PU650 450 PD1000 450 Lift the pen move to 650 450 place the pen down and draw a line to 1000 450 PU1000 100 PD1000 1500 2500 1500 Lift the pen move to 1000 100 place the pen down draw a line to 1000 1500 then to 2500 1500 AT3200 800 2500 100 Print an arc starting at current pen
309. the printer 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing PA400 400 Specify absolute plotting and move to location RR400 800 400 400 Fill a rectangle with the default fill black with 400 400 as the lower left corner and the upper right corner 400 plu to the right and 800 plu up from there RR Fill Rectangle Relative 21 43 Table 21 24 Example Using the RR Command with Different Fill Types continued PR0 800 FT3 50 RR400 400 Enter the relative plotting mode and move 800 plu in the Y direction and select fill type 3 parallel lines Draw a rectangle using the current pen location as the lower left corner the upper right corner is 400 plu to the right and 400 plu up from the lower left corner PRO 400 FT4 RR400 400 Move 400 plu up and select fill type 4 cross hatching Draw a rectangle using the current pen position as the lower left corner and a point 400 plu to the right and 400 plu up as the upper right corner PA1200 400 FT RR400 800 ER400 800 Move to absolute location 1200 400 and select the default fill type solid black Draw and edge a rectangle that begins at the current pen position and extends 400 plu to the right then 800 plu up from there PR0 800 FT3 50 Move 800 plu up from the current position RR400 400 and sel
310. to 32 767 but values less than 1 are automatically set to 1 22 16 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN Note EN Labels are always drawn with rounded ends and joins Line Ends The value you specify for line ends determines how the ends of line segments are shaped The following illustration describes the four types of line ends End point d 1 2 line width Butt ends 1 Terminate at the end point Square ends 2 Terminate one half line width beyond the end points 1 2 1 2 line width line width Triangular ends 3 Round ends 4 Terminate in Terminate one half line width semicircle with a diameter beyond the end points equal to the current line width Figure 22 11 Four Line Ends Line Joins The value you specify for the line joins attribute determines how connecting line ends corners are shaped The following illustration describes the five types of line joins If the first and last points of a series of lines are the same they join according to the current line join and miter limit LA Line Attributes 22 17 miter lt miter miter gt miter miter length length limit length limit Mitered join 1 Mitered beveled Join 2 Formed by two Formed by two lines extending from lines extending from the outer edge of each the outer edge of each vector until vector until they meet If the miter length ex they meet The miter limit applies ceeds the miter limit a beveled join is used to this
311. to Chapter 6 for more information on cursor positioning Character spacing information for proportionally spaced fonts can be obtained in several ways The preferred method is using Hewlett Packard s AutoFont Support AutoFont Support is a standard method for identifying font information It provides basic font information including spacing information in AutoFont format in a file with a TFM tagged font metric extension AutoFont support files can be created for any soft font using Hewlett Packard s Type Director 2 0 and later AutoFont support for Hewlett Packard s newer font cartridge products are furnished as TFM files on a disk Character spacing information for proportionally spaced fonts is available from Hewlett Packard Spacing information can be obtained from Hewlett Packard s Type Director 2 0 typeface and font management program Character spacing information can also be obtained from listings generated through the operation of the spacing feature available from Hewlett Packard s FontLoad Utility HP product number 33407B Since line spacing is independent of font height line spacing may require adjustment following font selection to ensure proper vertical alignment of text PCL Cursor Positioning 24 5 To ensure compatibility with future products select fonts by specifying all of the font characteristics If all of the characteristics are not designated the primary and secondary font tables in the printer ma
312. tor Graphics EN The Vector Graphics Limits The area on the page where a vector graphics image can be printed is determined by the intersection of the following four boundaries e Hard clip Limits e Soft clip Window e PCL Logical Page e PCL Picture Frame The hard clip limit refers to the boundaries resulting from the physical limits of the printer in PCL mode this is referred to as the printable area The soft clip limit refers to the area defined using the HP GL 2 Input Window IW command The intersection of all these areas is the effective window An HP GL 2 graphic appears on the page only if it falls within the effective window Edge of Printing PCL Medium Logical Page Hard Clip Limits PCL I Picture Effective Frame Window 3 Soft clip Limits IW Command Figure 17 8 The Effective Window Note For more information on the PCL coordinate system and the PCL 5 printer s printable limits see Chapter 2 EN The Vector Graphics Limits 17 19 HP GL 2 Units of Measure In HP GL 2 mode you can measure along the X Y axes and express coordinates using two types of units plotter units and user units Plotter Units One plotter unit equals 0 025 mm When specifying distances in plotter units the printer converts the number of plotter units to equivalent dot coordinates before printing Under default conditions the printer uses plotter units The following table lists equivalent measurements for p
313. ttom SC Scale 19 41 Note e Xwins Xmax Ym n Ymax These parameters represent the user unit X and Y axis ranges respectively For example SCO 15 0 10 indicates 15 user units along the X axis and 10 user units along the Y axis As a result the first and third parameters Xm n and Ym are the coordinate pair that is mapped onto P1 the second and fourth parameters XMax and Ymax are the coordinate pair mapped onto P2 Using the same example the coordinate location of P1 is 0 0 and P2 is 15 10 This is different from the IP command where the parameters are expressed as X Y coordinate pairs rather than as ranges Xmin Cannot be set equal to Xmax and Yyy cannot be set equal to YMAX As their names suggest you will normally want to specify XMIN smaller than Xyax and Yyy smaller than Ymax If you specify XMIN larger than Xmax and Yy larger than Ymax your illustration is drawn as a mirror image reversed and or upside down depending on the relative positions of P1 and P2 The parameters of the SC command are always mapped onto the current P1 and P2 locations P1 and P2 retain these new values until scaling is turned off or another SC command redefines the user unit values Thus the size of a user unit could change if any change is made in the relative position and distance between P1 and P2 after an SC command is executed e Type Specifies anisotropic or isotropic scaling Table 19 20 0 Anisotropic sc
314. ue Then specify the next coordinate in absolute mode PA or PE When converting and encoding data note the following e n DIV 64 n shift right 6 bits You can optimize your application by shifting 6 bits to the right since shifting is faster than division e n MOD 64 n AND 63 The number is logically AND d with 63 Example Using the PE Command The following BASIC program converts three relative real coordinates to base 64 10 LPRINT CHR 27 E Reset the Printer 20 LPRINT CHR 27 0B Enter HP GL 2 Mode 730 LPRINT IN SC1 20 1 20 1 SP1 PU5 5 40 PRINT Input number of fractional decimal places in data 750 INPUT F In this example 2 decimal places line 290 60 Calculate Number of Fractional Binary Bits 70 F F 3 33 U80 F INT F 9O ASF 100 IF F gt 0 THEN F 2 ABS F ELSE F 2 ABS F 41 110 F 191 F 120 LPRINT 1 PE gt CHRS F Coo PE Polyline Encoded 20 41 130 Convert coordinate data to base 64 140 FOR J 1 to 6 150 READ C 160 C C 2 2 170 C INT C 180 IF C 0 THEN C 2 C ELSE C 2 ABS C 41 190 WHILE C 64 200 LPRINT CHR 63 C MOD 64 210 C C64 220 WEND 230 1914 240 LPRINT CHR C 250 NEXT J 260 LPRINT 1 270 LPRINT CHR 27 0A Enter PCL Mode 280 LPRINT CHR 27 E Reset to eject page
315. ue to the way hatching and cross hatch lines are drawn they may extend beyond the character outline by up to 1 2 of the current pen width When using a small pen width and specifying a black edge pen the edging covers up hatching lines that extend outside the character outline However as the pen width increases the edge pen may not be wide enough to compensate for this resulting in a fill that overlaps the character edges To ensure that the character fill looks correct when using hatching patterns use a narrow pen width especially for small point sizes see illustration below AY Figure 23 10 Character Fill Overflowing Table 23 8 Example Using the CF Command EGE Reset the printer E 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 black SD1 21 2 1 4 140 Specify a 140 point Univers Bold font and 5 0 6 3 7 4148 SS select it for printing PA1000 3000 DT Specify absolute plotting and move to 1000 3000 specify as the label terminator FT3 50 45 Specify a hatching fill type with 50 plotter units between each line with the lines set at a 45 angle CF1 1 LBA Select character fill mode 1 edge and edge with pen number 1 black print the letter A PR127 0 Move the pen position 127 plu to the right 23 22 The Character Group EN EN Table 23 8 Example Using the CF Command continued PW 1 CF3 1 LBB Set the pen wi
316. ule 13 12 width character descriptor 11 57 lines 22 5 pixel user defined pattern descriptor 13 18 type font header 11 23 windowing 19 18 WU command 22 46 X X resolution font header 11 33 X Y axis ranges user units in scaling 19 41 coordinate pairs 17 16 X axis 17 15 PCL coordinate system 2 5 units 6 3 xHeight font header 11 22 XW x windows font name format of data segment 11 42 XY coordinate data character descriptor 11 64 data offset character descriptor 11 64 Y Y Display Functions Enable 24 12 Y resolution font header 11 34 Y axis 17 15 PCL coordinate system 2 5 units 6 3 Y offset adaptive compression 15 27 Z Z Display Functions Disable 24 12 zero degree reference 21 6 zeroed rows in raster graphics 15 2 Index 23 Index 24 EN GQ HEWLETT PACKARD Copyright 1999 Hewlett Packard Co
317. upper right corners of the picture frame respectively but you can change their locations using the Input P1 and P2 IP or Input Relative P1 and P2 IR commands After you have defined the positions for P1 and P2 or have accepted the default use this imaginary rectangle to set up scaling for your drawing With the Scale SC command you specify how many sections the rectangle divides into horizontally the X axis and how many sections the rectangle divides into vertically the Y axis With this process you have created your user units Scaling also allows you to enlarge or reduce your image by changing the locations of P1 and P2 P1 and P2 represent physical locations in relation to the PCL Picture Frame When the imaginary rectangle formed by P1 and P2 is enlarged or reduced with the IP or IR commands the HP GL 2 image is also enlarged or reduced to fit the new P1 P2 rectangle For a more detailed explanation of scaling and the Scale SC command see Chapter 19 For importing existing HP GL 2 images another method of enlarging or reducing drawings exists It involves varying the size of the PCL Picture Frame and is described next This method allows you to scale an image while maintaining the aspect ratio of all elements including fonts The Scale command does not affect the size of fonts 17 24 An Introduction to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics EN Absolute and Relative Pen Movement EN The Plot Absolute PA and Plot Relative PR
318. ure frame boundaries The soft clip window can be set equal to the picture frame by issuing an IW command see Figure 19 17 RO Rotate Coordinate System 19 35 Note The RO command also rotates the contents of the polygon buffer The RO command remains in effect until the rotation is changed by another RO command or the printer is initialized Figure 19 15 shows the default orientation and the result of rotating the orientation without relocating P1 and P2 Lt X P1 Default P1 X q Y P2 180 270 Figure 19 15Using the RO Command Without Using the IP Command 19 36 The Configuration and Status Group EN EN Figure 19 16 shows the locations of P1 and P2 when you follow the rotation with the IP command P2 P1 Roso p P RO270 IP P Figure 19 16Using IP after the RO Command When you set up a soft clip window see the IW command RO also rotates the window If a portion of a window rotates outside the hard clip limits it is clipped Note that P does not affect the window limits Use W to reset the window to the size of the PCL Picture Frame RO Rotate Coordinate System 19 37 P2 Window 7 l P2 PCL Picture Frame and Soft Clip Window PCL Picture Frame and Soft Clip Window Y Soft Clip Is X P1 Default P2 e Soft Clip Window X Only if defined 1 Y te e P1 RO906 IP RO
319. ust specify both parameters the printer applies only one the left parameter applies when there is extra horizontal space the bottom parameter applies when there is extra vertical space The following examples illustrate left and bottom parameters of 0 and 100 Left Bottom 0 0 P1 0 0 P1 0 0 SC0 10 0 10 1 0 0 SC0 20 0 10 1 0 0 Left Bottom 100 100 SC0 10 0 10 1 100 100 SC0 20 0 10 1 100 100 Figure 19 19 The Left and Bottom Parameters For Scaling Type 2 The third form of scaling point factor scaling sets a specific ratio of plotter units to user units and establishes the user units coordinate of P1 Table 19 21 Scaling Form Type Syntax Point Factor 2 SCXyin X Factor Y MIN Yractor typel 19 44 The Configuration and Status Group EN e XMIN XFACTOR Y MIN Y FACTOR Establish the user unit coordi nates of P1 and the ratio of plotter to user units Xm n and YMin are the user unit coordinates of P1 Xfactor sets the number of plotter units per user unit on the X axis Yeactor sets the number of plotter units per user unit on the Y axis e Type Must be 2 for this type of scaling An SC command remains in effect until another SC command is executed or the printer is initialized or set to default conditions Examples The following examples explain the effect of several parameter selections SC0 40 0 40 2 allows scaling in millimeters since 1 millimet
320. v 90 sweep angle 90 Pi ax Negative Radius Figure 21 27 EN WG Fill Wedge 21 47 Table 21 26 Example Filling then Edging vs Edging then Filling Chart E Reset the printer 9 0B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 mode SP1 Select pen number 1 Even though there is no physical pen the SP command must be used to enable printing SC 3000 3000 2000 2000 1 Set up user scaling with P1 being 3000 2000 and P2 being 3000 2000 Specify isotropic scaling PAO 0 FT3 75 45 WG 1000 90 180 Enter absolute plotting mode and move to user unit position 0 0 Select fill type 3 parallel lines with 75 user units between lines and the lines slanted 45 Fill a wedge with the current fill pattern use a radius of 1000 user units a starting angle of 90 and a sweep angle of 180 The zero degree reference point is on the left side of the circle indicated by the negative radius parameter 1000 EW 1000 90 180 Draw an outline edge around the same wedge FT4 60 45 WG 1000 330 120 Select fill type 4 cross hatching specifying 60 user units between lines and with the lines tilted at 45 Fill a wedge that has the same radius and center point but with a starting angle of 330 and a sweep angle of 120 EW 1000 330 120 Edge the same wedge PR 60 110 FT1 Specify relative plotting and move the pen 60 user units to the left and 110 units up
321. ve or positive direction as necessary so that it passes through the intermediate point before the end point Xincr End Y incr End Specify the location of the end point of the arc in relative increments relative to the current pen location e Chord Angle Specifies the chord angle used to draw the arc The default is a chord angle of 5 The Arc Absolute command description earlier in this chapter contains more information on chords and chord angles Intermediate and end point coordinates are interpreted in current units as user units when scaling is on as plotter units when scaling is off If current scaling is not isotropic the arc drawn is elliptical rather than circular Note the following about intermediate and end points e If the intermediate point and end point are the same as the current pen location the command draws a dot e If the intermediate point is the same as either the current pen location or the end point a line is drawn between the current pen location and the end point 20 48 The Vector Group EN e If the end point is the same as the current pen location a circle is drawn with its diameter being the distance between the current pen position and the intermediate point e If the current pen position intermediate point and end point are collinear a straight line is drawn e If the intermediate point does not lie between the current pen location and the end point and the three points
322. wave shown in the figure following the example Table 20 5 Example Drawing Bezier Curves FECE Reset the printer EL B Enter HP GL 2 mode IN Initialize HP GL 2 SP1 Select pen number 1 The SP command must be used to enable printing PA1000 5000 PD Specify absolute plotting and move to position 1000 5000 pen down BZ2000 8000 Draw a Bezier curve with 1000 5000 as 4000 2000 5000 5000 the starting point first control point Specify 2000 8000 4000 2000 and 5000 5000 as the second third and fourth control points EQOA Enter the PCL mode 20 8 The Vector Group EN Table 20 5 Example Drawing Bezier Curves continued EGE Send a reset to end the job and eject the page En Point e 20009 8000 A 4th Control Point 0x3 Y3 1000 5000 6000 5000 ij 7 1st Control Point Current Pen Position i u 4000 2000 3rd Control Point X2 Y2 Figure 20 6 Bezier Curves AA Arc Absolute This command draws an arc using absolute coordinates which starts at the current pen location and pivots around the specified center point AA Xcenter Ycenten Sweep angle chord angle Parameter Format Functional Range Default XcenterY center Current units 230 to 230 1 no default sweep angle clamped real 32768 to 32767 no default chord angle clamped real 0 5 to 180 5 The AA command d
323. within application software or imported from existing applications For various types of images many technical drawings and business graphics for example it is advantageous to use vector graphics instead of raster graphics Advantages include faster I O transfer of large images and smaller storage requirements See Chapter 17 for more information I O I O is an acronym for input output 1 0 and is used in this document when referring to hardware used to interface printers with computers l O Buffer The area within the printer s internal random access memory RAM where PCL commands and data are stored Interface Connector The LaserJet printer comes with two interface connectors serial and parallel located on the lower part of the back panel The cable that attaches the computer to the printer is connected here Also see Parallel I O or Serial I O EN EN Internal Fonts Internal fonts are the fonts resident in the printer when shipped Landscape See Orientation Logical Page The PCL logical page also referred to as the addressable area defines the area in which the cursor can be positioned Although the printer does not actually have a cursor like the blinking underline character used on most computer terminals the cursor position refers to the currently active printing position CAP In other words the location of the cursor is the position on the logical page where the next character is position
324. x D of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide contains lists of MSL and Unicode symbol index characters and their numbers also see Unicode or MSL Glossary 13 Glossary 14 Symbol Set A symbol set is a unique ordering of the characters in a font Each symbol set is defined with a unique set of applications in mind Symbol sets are created for many purposes for example the PC 8 symbol set was designed to support US IBM PC applications Treatment Treatment is the combination of font style and or weight For example some treatments of Times Roman font include upright or bold or italic Typeface Typeface is a generic name for graphics symbols having common design features Each typeface has unique and distinguishing characteristics UEL Universal Exit Language Command The Universal Exit Language UEL command 12345X causes the PCL printer language to shut down and exit Control is then returned to the Printer Job Language PJL Both PCL 5 and HP GL 2 recognize this command The UEL Command has the same effect as the E command and also enters PJL Mode of operation for printers that support PJL refer to the section Universal Exit Language Command in Chapter 4 for more information Unicode This is a grouping of symbols a symbol index used by TrueType fonts An unbound font has the capacity to be bound to a set of symbols selected from a complementary symbol index such as the Unicode or MSL symbol indexes Each
325. xample 20 11 Cl command 20 25 circle and arc counting points in 21 16 and wedges filling 21 8 drawing in HP GL 2 mode 20 4 drawing in polygon mode 21 14 smoothness and chord angle 20 26 Circle command 20 4 20 25 clamped integer 17 10 clamped real number 17 10 class 2 character descriptor 11 54 class 3 character descriptor 11 63 class 4 character descriptor 11 63 class character descriptor 11 53 11 68 clear horizontal margins command 5 15 clearing status readback 16 5 clipping 2 8 raster area 15 11 CO command 19 19 coding efficiency raster compression 15 19 cold reset 3 9 column Glossary 2 columns 5 20 columns and rows 2 5 6 4 combining commands 1 8 comma 17 9 command parameter 1 3 parsing 24 2 processing time 24 10 commands 1 3 display functions 24 12 HP GL 2 1 4 PCL 1 3 PJL 1 4 unsupported PCL 1 2 commands HP GL 2 AA Arc Absolute 20 5 20 9 AC Anchor Corner 22 5 22 6 AD Alternate Font Definition 23 18 AR Arc Relative 20 5 20 13 AT Absolute Arc Three Point 20 16 BR Bezier Relative 20 8 20 19 BZ Bezier Absolute 20 8 20 22 CF Character Fill Mode 23 20 Cl Circle 20 4 20 25 CO Comment 19 19 CP Character Plot 23 5 23 8 23 16 23 24 DF Default Values 17 23 19 3 19 19 DI Absolute Direction 23 9 23 21 23 29 DR Relative Direction 23 9 23 21 23 37 DT Define Label Terminator 23 11 23 44 DV Define Variable Text Path 23 9 23 29 23 30 23 37 23 46 EA Edge Rectangle A
326. xis to the amp minus Y axis Y 90 m 180 0 X US 270 Figure 20 4 Drawing arcs 2 of 3 The relationship of the X axis to Y axis and Y axis can change as a result of the scaling point or scaling factor changes thus changing the direction of a positive or negative angle of rotation You can also draw arcs using the Absolute Arc Three Point AT and Relative Arc Three Point RT commands These commands use three known points your current pen location plus two points you specify to calculate a circle and draw the appropriate arc segment of its circumference The arc is drawn with a positive angle of rotation so that it passes through the intermediate point before the end point Refer to the following illustration Drawing Arcs 20 7 Intermediate Intermediate point point End UNS Starting point End point current point pen location l N N N 4 hj 4 gt 1 a b Ec g Figure 20 5 Drawing arcs 3 of 3 Drawing Bezier Curves The Bezier Absolute BZ and Bezier Relative BR commands use your current pen position as the first control point in the Bezier curve You specify the second third and fourth control points If you are drawing more than one curve the fourth control point of the first curve X3 Y3 becomes the first control point of the next curve The following example shows a simple command sequence using BZ to draw a Bezier Curve in the shape of a sine
327. xt text character any character s no default The LB command includes an automatic pen down function When the command is completed the original pen up down status is restored EN text text ASCII characters are drawn using the currently selected font Refer to AD SA SD and SS commands for details on specifying and selecting fonts You can include non printing characters such as the Carriage Return CR decimal code 13 and Line Feed LF decimal code 10 These characters invoke the specified function but are not drawn Refer to Appendixes A and B of the PCL 5 Comparison Guide for a list of ASCII characters The label begins at the current pen location unless altered by LO After each character is drawn the pen location is updated to be the next character origin Refer to Working With the Character Cell earlier in the chapter LB Label 23 59 Label Terminator Terminates the LB command You must use the special label terminator refer to the DT command to tell the printer to exit the label mode If you do not use the label terminator everything following the LB mnemonic is printed in the label including other commands The default label terminator is the non printing end of text character ETX decimal code 3 You can define a different terminator using the DT command Table 23 32 Example Printing Text with the LB Command ESE Reset the printer E 0B E
328. y not contain the correct information to select the requested font from those available in the printer The shortcut method of font selection is not recommended as documented in some previous font product literature and may not result in the desired font change This is due to the increased number of available fonts in the printer The transparent print data command is required to access printable characters with character codes in the decimal range of 0 7 15 and 27 in the PC symbol sets All information about the design of a font as well as the design of its characters can be found in the font and character descriptors A Space control code is executed when an attempt is made to print a non existent character Using an ID number which has not been associated with a font results in no font change Font designers should not define the space character Use the printer s Space control code should be used for character spacing Defining the space character in the font results in a significant reduction in performance and inhibits the HMI command with proportional fonts Note Refer to HP GL 2 Vector Graphics later in the chapter for hints on using HP GL 2 text 24 6 Programming Hints EN PCL Raster Graphics EN To minimize I O transmission time and conserve memory avoid sending unnecessary raster data to the printer that represents white space This is accomplished using the raster compression modes and raster reduction
329. ypes The UL command allows you to define and store your own line types The command does not itself select a line type Use the LT command to select the line type once you have defined it with UL No Parameters Defaults all line types refer to the LT command Index Identifies the number of the line type to be redefined Specifying an index number without gap parameters sets the line type identified by the index to the default pattern for that number The index number may not be 0 The index parameter uses absolute values so UL n is the same as UL n Redefining a standard fixed line type automatically redefines the corresponding adaptive line type Gaps Specify alternate pen down and pen up stretches in the line type pattern if gaps are numbered starting with 1 odd numbered gaps are pen down moves even numbered gaps are pen up moves The first gap is a pen down move Gap values are converted to percentages of the LT command s pattern length parameter A maximum of 20 gaps are allowed for each user defined line type Gap values must be non negative a gap value of zero produces a dot if specified for an odd numbered gap that is preceded or followed by a non zero even numbered gap The sum of the gap parameters must be greater than zero 22 44 The Line and Fill Attributes Group EN The following example demonstrates redefining and printing a line type Table 22 24 Example Using the UL Com

Part II

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents